Download Carrier 50PD06 Unit installation
Transcript
® Irn to the Expertg Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Troubleshooting TABLE GENERAL Instructions OF CONTENTS SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS ......................... ......................................... BASIC CONTROL USAGE Page 2 3 ........................... Service and Alarm Output ..................................... 11 Economizer Monitoring ............................. 11 Economizer Damper Control ......................... 11 CONTROLS OPERATION ........................... 11 3 Display Configuration ComfortLink ,_ Control .............................. 3 Modes .......................................... 12 Scrolling Marquee .................................. 3 Unit Configuration ................................. 12 Accessory Navigator Display .......................... 3 General Operating Sequence 13 Operation ......................................... 3 Occupancy Determination System Pilot _ Device ............................... 4 Compressor Operation .............................. 14 CCN Tables and Display 4 Indoor Fan Operation ............................... 14 5 Outdoor Fan Operation 15 5 Economizer Operation .............................. 15 Unit Preparation .................................... 5 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) ............................ 16 Compressor Mounting ............................... 5 Cooling Modes ................................... 17 Refrigerant Service Ports ............................. 5 Heating Modes .................................... 20 Crankcase Heater(s) ................................. 5 Temperature Compensated Start ....................... 22 Compressor Rotation ................................ 5 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)® Configuration ..................................... 6 Demand Limit Internal Wiring ..................................... 6 ............................. Conventions Used in This Manual ...................... START-UP ......................................... Power Supply .............................. 11 ......................... ........................... 13 ............................. ......... 23 .................................... 23 Alarm Handling ................................... 24 TROUBLESHOOTING .............................. 24 Evaporator Fan .................................... 6 Condenser Fans and Motors ........................... 6 Complete Unit Stoppage Return-Air Filters .................................. 6 Restart Procedure .................................. 24 Outdoor-Air 6 Control Module Conmmnication 24 Inlet Screens ............................ ............................ 24 ...................... 7 Communication Failures Orifice Change (48PD Only) .......................... 7 Alarms and Alerts ................................. 25 Gas Heat (48PD Only) ............................... 7 Cooling Troubleshooting 30 7 Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) Troubleshooting 7 Economizer Troubleshooting Standard Unit Control ............................... 7 Heating Troubleshooting CCN Communication 8 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Troubleshooting Phase Loss Protection .............................. Accessory Installation ............................... CONTROLS QUICK SET-UP ......................... Control Set Point and Configuration Log Accessories ................ ............................... ....................................... Programming Operating Schedules .................... SERVICE TEST .................................... 8 10 10 Independent Outputs ............................... 10 Fan Test ......................................... 10 Cooling Test ..................................... Heating Test ...................................... THIRD PARTY CONTROL Remote Occupancy .......................... ................................ Fire Shutdown .................................... ............................ 25 ............................ .......... ......................... 31 33 ............................ 34 ........ 34 34 Thermistor Troubleshooting ......................... 37 Transducer Troubleshooting ......................... 38 Forcing Inputs and Outputs .......................... MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS .................... 38 42 11 General ......................................... 42 11 Main Base Board (MBB) ............................ 47 11 Economizer Control Board (ECB) ..................... 49 11 Modulation Board (AUX1) .......................... 51 11 Digital Scroll Control Board (DSC) .................... 52 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) ...................... 53 Recognize Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board 54 When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions manuals, be alert to the potential for personal iniury. ................... Low Voltage Terminal Strip (TBI) ..................... 55 Scrolling Marquee Display 56 Accessory Navigator TM .......................... Display ....................... 56 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)® Interface ............. 56 Field-Installed 56 Accessories .......................... SERVICE ......................................... 59 Cleaning ........................................ Lubrication ...................................... 60 62 Evaporator Fan Service and Replacement ............... 62 Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment ............... 62 Evaporator Fan Belt Tension Adjustment ............... 63 safety information. Condenser-Fan ........... Adjustment .......................... Verify Sensor Performance 63 63 .......................... Economizer Operation During Power Failure Evacuation ....................................... 64 ............ 64 64 Refrigerant Charge ................................. 64 Gas Valve Adjustment (48PD Units Only) ............... 65 High Altitude (48PD Units Only) ..................... 66 Main Burners (48PD Units Only) ..................... severe which personal iniury or death. WARNING could result in personal iniury or death. suggestions operation. which will result in enhanced Protective Devices ................................. 66 Failure to follow damage. Relief Devices 67 67 67 Replacement Parts ................................. 67 Diagnostic LEDs .................................. APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES ..................................... 67 APPENDIX B - STARTUP DATA ..................... 81 APPENDIX C - ADDITIONAL STARTUP DATA ......... 91 APPENDIX D - ADDITIONAL STARTUP DATA ....... 100 UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST ...................... 105 SAFETY reliability, Before performing service or maintenance operations on unit, turn off main power switch to unit and install lockout tag. Ensure electrical service to rooftop unit agrees with voltage and amperage listed on the unit rating plate. UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD .............................. installation, Failure to follow this warning could cause personal iniury or death. 66 Control Circuit, 24-V this caution may cause equipment This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out components or to bypass or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic modules or electrical components. 68 CONSIDERATIONS Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components. Only trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or service air-conditioning equipment. Untrained personnel can perform the basic maintenance functions of replacing filters. Trained service personnel should perform all other operations. When working on air-conditioning equipment, observe precautions in the literature, tags and labels attached to the unit, and other safety precautions that may apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing operations. Have fire extinguishers available for all brazing operations. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Have fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and National Electrical Code (NEC) for special requirements. or signifies a hazard CAUTION is used HAZARD 66 Compressor Sound Shield ........................... /_. to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal iniury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight Filter Drier ....................................... .................................... symbol Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. These words are used with the safety-alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in ELECTRICALSHOCK Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Replacement This is the safety-alert FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could iniury, death and/or property damage. result in personal Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, or maintenance can cause property damage, personal iniury, or loss of life. Refer to the User's Information Manual provided with this unit for more details. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. What to do if you smell gas: 1. DO NOT try to light any appliance. 2. DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use any phone in your building. 3.IMMEDIATELY call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. 4. If you cannot department. reach your gas supplier, call the fire or • Service Test GENERAL This publication contains and Troubleshooting Start-Up, Controls, information Operation, for the 48/50PD Service, rooftop units. (See Table 1.) These units are equipped with ComfortLink "_ controls version I.X or higher and use Puron ® refrigerant. The specific base unit installation instructions and/or wiring label diagram may also be required in conjunction with this book as a guide to a specific unit on the roof. All the units in Table 1 are Displacement Ventilation or Single Zone Variable Airflow units that provide stand-alone or network Table operation. 1 -- Rooftop • Temperatures • Pressures • Set points • Inputs • Outputs • Configuration • Timeclock • Operating Modes • Alarms Units Through MODEL SIZE NOMINAL 05 48/50PD ComfortLink CONTROL Control for connection management control is fully communicating for remote monitoring via the Internet. units can be linked together (and to other equipped units) using a 3-wire communication The ComfortLink control system Marquee, the user can access all of the and to diagnose Accessory Display accessory Navigator hand-held Navigator operational display problems can be used with the 48/50PD units. (See Fig. 2.) The Navigator display operates the same way as the Scrolling Marquee device. The Navigator display is plugged into the LEN (local equipment network) port on either Multiple ComfortLink bus. at start-up commissioning with the unit. The and cable-ready to the Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) building system. The control provides high-speed communications Scrolling can be accessed from the display. In addition, through the Scrolling Marquee, the user can access a built-in test routine that can be used USAGE The ComfortLink control is a comprehensive unit-management system. The control system is easy to access, configure, diagnose and troubleshoot. The ComfortLink the inputs and outputs to check on their values and status, configure operating parameters plus evaluate the current decision status for operating modes. The control also includes an alarm history which 4 5 06 BASIC TONS TBI or the J3 port on the ECB (economizer control board). control is easy to access through the use of a unit-mounted display module. There is no need to bring a separate computer to this unit for start-up. Access to control menus is simplified by the ability to quickly select from 11 menus. A scrolling readout information. Only provides detailed explanations of control four, large, easy-to-use buttons are required to maneuver through the entire controls menu. The display designed to be visible even in bright sunlight. For added service flexibility, Navigator module is also available. TM readout is an accessory hand-held This portable device has an extended communication cable that can be plugged into the unit's communication network at the main control box. The Navigator display provides the same menu structure, control access and display data as is available display. at the unit-mounted Scrolling Marquee C06321 Fig. 2 - Accessory Navigator Display Operation O 0 All units are shipped AlarmStNus OT[me Clock 8o:= ....... C06320 Fig. 1 - Scrolling Scrolling This device information, 16-segment display Marquee is the keypad interface used to access the control read sensor values, and test the unit. The Scrolling LED also contains (light-emitting with the Scrolling Marquee control box and is standard on all display is a 4-key, 4-character, diode) display Both displays provide the ComfortLink control system. user with an interface to the The displays have up and down arrow keys, an ESCAPE key and an ENTER key. These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display Marquee Marquee is located in the main units. The Scrolling Marquee from the factory display, which is located in the main control box. (See Fig. 1.) In addition, the ComfortLink control also supports the use of the handheld Navigator display. Configuralion module. The an Alarm Status LED. (See Fig. 1.) The display is easy to operate using 4 buttons and a group LEDs that indicate the following menu structures: • Run Status of 11 structure. The Navigator display and the Scrolling Marquee operate in the same manner, except that the Navigator display has multiple lines of display and the Scrolling Marquee has a single line. All further discussions and examples in this document will be based on the Scrolling Marquee display. See Table 2 for the menu structure. The four keys structure, which are used is organized to navigate in a tiered through the display mode structure. If the buttons have not been used for a period, the display will default to the AUTO VIEW display category as shown under the RUN STATUS category. To show the top-level display, press the ESCAPE key until a blank display is shown. Then use the up and 1 downarrowkeysto scroll through the top-level categories. These economizer commanded position (EC.CP) is forced, the Navigator display shows "80F', where the "F' is blinking to signify a force on the point. The Scrolling Marquee display shows "80." Where the are listed in Appendix A and will be indicated on the Scrolling Marquee by the LED next to each mode listed on the face of the display. When a specific mode or sub-mode is located, push .... is blinking to signify a force on the point. Remove the force by selecting the point that is forced with the key ENTER and then pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously. the ENTER key to enter the mode. Depending on the mode, there may be additional tiers. Continue to use the up and down keys and the Depending field-installed ENTER keys until the desired display item is found. At any time, the user can move back a mode level by pressing the ESCAPE key. Once an item has been selected the display will flash showing the item, followed by the item value and then followed the four digits of the to be entered There points that can be forced occupant security the Auto View of Run Status (VIEW) Software Version Numbers (VERS) Control Modes (MODE) Cooling Status (COOL) Heating Status (HEAT) Economizer Status (ECON) Component Run Hours (HRS) Component Starts (STRT) Service Test Mode (TEST) Test Independent Outputs (INDP) Test Fans Test (?ooling (COOL) Test Heating (HEAT) TEMPERATURES Air Temperatures (AIR.T) Refrigerant Temperatures (REF.T) SETPOINTS set points. A features for Pilot device details. Scrolling Marquee display, the menus in Appendix A. Appendix A is structured towards the organization of the local display (Scrolling Marquee) menus. Because of the variety of CCN programs and devices, the CCN Marquee and a For example, if PRESSURES NOT menus may be different and more items may be displayed in the CCN tables. Details on the CCN tables are included with the local tables, sub-tables, organization. SERVICE TEST is user can also access the same information through the CCN tables by using the Service tool or other CCN programs/devices. The variable names used for the CCN tables and the Scrolling Marquee be displayed with a blinking "." on a Scrolling blinking "F' on a Navigator following its value. RUN STATUS application and Display to the unit-mounted display Marquee zoning users. See Fig. 3 for System CCN Tables In addition Scrolling 2 -- Scrolling and Touch Pilot device CCN communication can use the System Pilot device to change feature is provided to limit access of Marquee or the Navigator. If the user needs to force a variable, follow the same process as when editing a configuration parameter. A forced variable, regardless where the force has come from will Table Pilot Devices the System Pilot device can serve as a wall-mounted sensor for space temperature measurement. The unauthorized the ESCAPE key and Repeat the process as from and Touch device (33PILOT-01) can be used as at this time with the PD products. Additionally, temperature again before for other items. are some TM Multiple recommended in rotating auto-view, press the ENTER key to stop the display at the desired item. Press the ENTER key again so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value of state of an item required Pilot IMPORTANT: Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. If the display is and press the ENTER key to accept it. Press the item, value or units display will resume. System 48/50PD's CCN tables and the units CCN points can be monitored, forced, or configured. meaning of each display point. Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys when the display is blank (MODE LED level) will return the display to its default menu of rotating AUTO VIEW display items. need may not apply. model, factory-installed options and some of the items in the various Mode user-interfaces. These devices can be put on the CCN bus and addressed to communicate with any other device on the network. Unlike the Scrolling Marquee and Navigator, these pilots read the Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously will scroll an expanded text description across the display indicating the full will categories The System Pilot (33CNTPILOT) Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The display will flash PASS and WORD when required. In addition, the password changes can be made. the unit accessories, by the item units (if any). Use the ENTER and arrow keys to enter password. The default password is 1111. on Mode and Menu Display INPUTS OUTPUTS General Inputs Fan Outputs (GEN.I) Current Sensor Inputs (CS£IN) Air Quality Inputs (AIR.Q) and CONFIGURATION Display Configuration (DISP) Cool Outputs Unit Configuration (UNIT) Heat Outputs (HEAT) Cooling Configuration Economize r Outputs Heating Configuration (ECgN) Alarm Relay (ALRM) are referenced within that Structure (FANS) (CqOL) points (CqOLl (HEAT) Economizer Configuration TIME CLOCK Time of Day (TIME) Cool Mode Diagnostic (DATE) (COOL) Daylight Savings Time Heat }vlode Economizer Diagnostic (SCH.L) I_al (HOE.L) PID Configuration (PID) Sensor Calibration (TRIM) C(_N Configuration (CCN/ (HEAT) (DST) Air Quality Cfg. (ALM.O/ Diagnostic Local Time Schedule Holiday Schedules (AI Q Control Modes (MODE) Month, Date Day and Year (ECpN/ Alarm*Relay Config. OPERATIN G MODES (ECON) Demand Listing (DMD.L) ALARMS Reset All Current Alarms (R.C_YRR) Re*set Alarm History (R.HIST) Currently Active Alarms (CURR) Alarm History (HIST) /1 Conventions Used in This Manual The following conventions for discussing the local display (Scrolling be used in this manual. Marquee configuration or Navigator points T, accessory) for will Point names will be written with the Mode name first, then any submodes, then the point name, each separated by an arrow symbol (-+). Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an example, the Fan Status Switch which is located in the Configuration mode, and Unit sub-mode UNIT-+ FN.S W. NAVIGATE/_ EXIT --MODIFY/ SELECT \ G be \ _ D a configuration after setting, an explanation the value. As PAGE Open). The expanded description is shown in the local display will not be shown with the path names in text, N Pilot _ User Interface tables but The CCN point names are also referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the unit with CCN software instead of See Appendix A of this manual. START-UP Hierarchy There is a hierarchy in CCN with regards to forcing a point. Programs and devices write a force at different priority levels. A higher level (smaller number, 1 being the highest) will override a lower level force. The Scrolling Marquee uses a Control Force at level 7. The Navigator writes a Service Force which is level 3. System Pilots and Touch Pilots write Supervisor Forces at level 4. Network programs can be set to write different level priority forces. IMPORTANT: Generic Compressor Status = 1 (Normal will be shown in an example, Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys sinmltaneously will scroll an expanded text description of the point name across the display. the local display, Force Configuration---, scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the up and down keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing ENTER to move into the next level of the menu structure. represents parenthesis (06322 Fig. 3 - System as This path name will show the user how to navigate through the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user would Configuration-_UNIT-_FN.SW SCROLL written When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the value j-- \ would Display Table Do not attempt to start unit, until all items on the Start-Up Checklist following steps have been completed. even (last momentarily, page) and the Unit Preparation Check that unit installation has been instructions installed in accordance and all applicable these Mounting The GENERIC points table allows the service/installer the ability to create a custom table in which up to 20 points from the 5 CCN categories (Points, Config, Service-Config, Set Point, and Maintenance) may be collected and displayed. In the Service-Config table section, there is a table named "GENERICS." This table contains placeholders for up to 20 CCN point names and allows the user to decide which points are displayed in the GENERIC points sub-table under the status display table. Each one of these placeholders allows the input of an 8-character ASCII string. Using a CCN interface, enter the Edit mode for the Service-Config table "GENERICS" and enter the CCN name for each point to be displayed in the custom points table in the order they will be displayed. When done entering point names, download the table to the rooftop unit control. Compressors are internally spring mounted. remove compressor holddown bolts. IMPORTANT: The computer system software (ComfortVIEW'_, Service Tool, etc.) that is used to interact with CCN controls, always saves a template of items it considers as static (e.g., limits, units, forcibility, 24-character text strings, and point names) after the software uploads the tables from a control. Thereafter, the software is only concerned with run time data like value and hardware/force status. With this in mind, it is important that any time a change is made to the Service-Config table "GENERICS" (which in turn changes the points contained in the GENERIC point table), that a complete new upload be performed. This requires that any previous table database be completely removed first. Failure to do this will not allow the user to display the new points that have been created and the CCN interface will have a different table database than the unit control. start-up. Refrigerant with codes. Service Do not loosen or Ports Each independent refrigerant system has a total of 3 Schrader-type service gauge ports per circuit. One port is located on the suction line, one on the compressor discharge line, and one on the liquid line, Be sure that caps on the ports are tight, Crankcase Heater(s) Compressor crankcase heater operation varies depending on the unit size and type. In general for all units, the crankcase heaters are energized operating, if there is power to the unit, the compressor and the ambient temperature is below 75 °F. IMPORTANT: Unit Otherwise, Compressor power damage must be on to compressor for 24 hours is not prior may result. Rotation []NIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in unit damage. Improper wiring will cause compressor stoppage and alarm. Correct wiring by switching leads as indicated below. to CONTROL BOX AND COMPRESSOR \ ELECTRICAL OPTIONS \ \ PANEL \ \ \ \"\ OUTDOOR \ INDOOR MOTOR \ \ ACCESS \ J DOOR f AIR SCREEN (HIDDEN) \\ \ \ CONDENSER COIL ACCESS PANEL \ GAS SECTION ACCESS / BASEPAN / FILTER ACCESS DOOR CONNECTIONS ACCESS PANEL C 07002 Fig. 4 - Panel and Filter On 3-phase units, it is important to be certain the compressors are rotating in the proper direction. To determine whether or not compressors are rotating in the proper direction, use a phase-rotation meter on the unit input power to check for LI-L2-L3 or clockwise rotation or use the Service Test mode to energize a compressor. If the compressor is rotating in the wrong direction, the controls will stop the compressor and display alarm for "Circuit A Failure to Pressurize." IMPORTANT: Indoor or outdoor fan rotation direction may not indicate proper input power phase sequence, as some 3-phase units use single-phase fan motors. To correct the wrong compressor rotation direction, perform the following procedure: 1. Turn off power to the unit and lock out the power. 2. Switch any two of the incoming unit power leads. 3. Turn on power to the unit. 4. Verify corrected compressor rotation. Power Supply All 208/230-v units are factory wired for 230-v power supply. If the 208/230-v unit is to be connected to a 208-v power supply, the transformers (TRAN1 and TRAN2) must be rewired by moving the wire from the 230-volt connection and moving to the 200-volt terminal on the primary side of the transformer. Refer to unit label diagram for additional information. Internal Wiring Check all electrical connections in unit control boxes; tighten as required. Evaporator Fan Fan belt and variable pulleys are factory-installed, but may need to be adjusted for specific applications. Be sure that the fans rotate in the proper direction. See Appendix C for unit specific fan performance data. See Appendix D for unit specific air quality Locations limits, evaporator fan motor specifications, FIOP static pressures, and fan RPM for various motor pulley settings. Appendix C and D are based on 100% fan speed (VFD at 60Hz). To alter fan performance, see Evaporator Fan Performance Adjustment in the Service section. The Supply Fan Minimum Speed (Configuration-+UNIT--,FSd_N) and the Supply Fan Maximum Speed (Configuration-+UNIT-+FSd_X) can also be used to alter fan performance. The fan should run at the maximum fan speed when setting up the application design point. The unit is equipped with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). The VFD's settings should not be used for adjusting fan performance. Specific VFD information can be found in Appendix B. IMPORTANT: When setting up and starting the unit, the heating minimum CFM requirements must be upheld when changing belts, pulleys, and configurations. During heating mode, the fan speed is always set to Supply Fan Maximum Speed (FS.MX). Condenser Fans and Motors Condenser fans and motors are factory set. Refer to Condenser-Fan Adjustment section as required. Return-Air Filters Check that correct filters are installed in filter tracks (see Physical Data table in Installation Instructions). Do not operate unit without return-air filters. IMPORTANT: For units with 4-in. filter option, units are shipped with standard 2-in. filters. To install 4-in. filters, the filter spacers must be removed. Outdoor-Air Inlet Screens Outdoor-air inlet screens must be in place before operating unit. Accessory Installation CONTROLS Check to make sure that all accessories including sensors have been installed and wired as required by the instructions and unit wiring diagrams. The following Orifice factory-installed options. configuration at start-up. Change This unit is factory gas at an elevation (48PD Only) assembled for heating from sea level to 2000 operation Use accessory high altitude kit when installing elevation of 2000 to 7000 ft. For elevations above High Altitude section to identify elevation. Purchase these orifices Follow instructions the correct orifices. in accessory using natural ft. this unit at an 7000 ft, refer to the correct orifice size for the from your local Carrier dealer. Installation Instructions to install Use accessory LP (liquid propane) gas conversion kit when converting this unit for use with LP fuel usage for elevations up to 7000 ft. For elevations above 7000 ft, refer to High Altitude section to identify the correct orifice size for the elevation. Purchase these orifices from your local Carrier dealer. Follow instructions in correct orifices. Gas Heat accessory Installation Instructions to install the before turning 1. Turn off field-supplied unit. 2. Connect pressure field-supplied 3. Connect gauge manual pressure to supply shutoff gauge 4. Turn on field-supplied gas stop, located valve. to manifold manual gas t@, external to located on (See F ig. 5.) pressure a quick the 48/50PD series units controls are pre-configured Service Test guide to setting with ComfortLink at the factory up T'_ for Field-installed accessories will require Service Test is recommended for initial Control Set Point and Configuration Log During start up, accessory installation, and equipment service set points and/or configuration changes might have to be made. When setting set points or changing configuration settings, documentation is recommended. The Control Log starting on page 106 should be filled out and left with the unit at all times. A copy should also be provided Standard There to the equipment owner. Unit Control are two different applications these units can be applied Ventilation and Single Zone VAV. a direct wired space sensor can be sensor/thermostat can be used. For used Installation to, either or a of an accessory supply air temperature (SAT) sensor in the supply duct is recommended when using a communication type control. A supply duct SAT measurement is valid for heating mode display, while the factory-standard internal SAT is not valid for heating due to its location upstream of the heating section. supply duct SAT, the heating mode display t@. gas stop. Enter will provide SET-UP start-up. Additionally, specific job requirements may require changes to default configuration values. See the CCN and Display parameter tables and other sections of these instructions for more details. conmmnicating on heat as follows: manual information and configuring controls. Unit Displacement application (48PD Only) Verify gas pressures QUICK Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAT.H When installing the is enabled by setting to ENBL. mode by setting Serrice Test-_TEST to "ON" using the Scrolling Marquee display. Use the Service Test feature to There are several configurations that should be considered for Displacement Ventilation or Single Zone VAV applications. Table set Serriee Test_HEAT_HT.1 using the Scrolling Marquee. 3 shows settings. to ON (first stage of heat) these configuration defaults and specific application These settings typical values and should be adjusted for each actual specific unit application. Refer to the Operation section for more detail on these configurations and how they effect the GAS units operation. SUPPLY IMPORTANT: Multiple zoning application is not recommended at this time with the PD product. Space (T-55, Temperature T-56, Sensor Control--Direct Wired or T-59) Wire accessory space temperature sensor(s) to the T-55 terminals on the field connection terminal board located at the unit control box. No configuration is required when installing a T-55, T-56, or T-59. Refer to Field-Installed Accessories section for additional UNION information. T-58 C06323 Fig. 5 - Field Gas Piping 5. After the unit has run for several nfinutes, verify the supply gas pressure is between 5.5-in. wg to 13.0-in. wg, and the manifold pressure is 3.50-in. wg on sizes 03-14 and 3.00 on size 16. If manifold pressure Gas Valve Adjustment section. IMPORTANT: Supply gas pressure 6. Set Service Marquee, Test-+HEAT-+HT.1 7. Exit Service Test mode "OFF" using the Scrolling must be adjusted, must not exceed by setting Marquee, to OFF Selwice refer to 13.0-in. using wg. Scrolling Test-+TEST to Communicating Thermostat Install the T-58 communicating thermostat. Connect the CCN communication bus from the T-58 to the CCN terminals on the field connection terminal board located at the unit control box. Configure the unit's CCN communication number, and baud rate. Configure the T-58's element number, bus CCN communication bus number and baud rate the same as the unit, while the element number has to be different. Configure the T-58 to send SPT to the unit's element number. Refer to the Field-Installed Accessories section for additional information. Table 3 1 ITEM EXPANSION Application Specific Configurations DEFAULT UNITS Air Setpoint DISPLACEMENT VENTILATION SINGLE ZONE VAV SASP Cool Supply 65 dF 65 55 FS.MX Supply Fan Maximum Speed 100 % 100 100 FS.MN Supply Fan Maximum Speed 20 % 20 70 FS.VM Vent Mode Fan Speed 50 ^F 50 50 M IN.C M in Corn pressor Capacity 70 % 15 70 3 FS.CD Fan Speed Control SA.MU SASP Maximum Reset Up SA.MD SASP Maximum Reset Down MRMX Econ Min at Max Fanspeed PE1 .C Power Exhaust IDF.C Demand Stage Indoor Fan Max Speed System Pilot - Communication Install the System Pilot and connect from it to the units CCN connection ^F 3 ^F 3 5 -10 ^F -3 -5 30 % 30 30 1 CFM 600 cfm 600 600 CFM 1600 (05) 2000 (06) cfm 1600 (05) 2000 (06) 1600 (05) 2000 (06) Space Sensor the CCN communication bus on the low voltage terminal board. Configure the unit's CCN communication bus number, and baud rate. Refer to the System instructions for configuring attaching it to a unit. 3 10 element number, Pilot's installation it to be used as a space temperature and gen III TEMP Monitor - Linkage Communication Thermostat (33CSTMT-01) should be information Economizer satisfactory. If they need to be changed, additional about these configuration settings can be found in the section. Power Exhaust If a Power Exhaust accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting Configuration-->ECON-->PE,EN ENBL. The default settings for the other power to exhaust configurations should be satisfactory. If they need to be changed, additional information about these configurations can be found in the Power Exhaust section. Install the linkage thermostat. Connect the CCN communication bus from the Stat to the CCN terminals on the field connection Electric Heat terminal board located at the unit control box. Configure the unit's CCN communication element number, bus number, and baud rate. If an Electric Heat accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting Configuration--,HEAT--,HT.TY to a Refer value of 2. The number of electric heat stages must be configured by setting Configuration--,HEAT--,NJtTR per the installed heater. to the configuring Linkage Thermostat's the Stat and additional installation information instructions for about it. Space Humidistat Control The humidistat input is provided board. The Space Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.SW, on the field connection terminal Humidity Switch configuration, identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input at LOW humidity. Humidistat 1 terminal is the 24 VAC source for dry contact and the Humidistat 2 terminal is the signal input. Relative Humidity Sensor Control For units with the economizer option (with the ECB-economizer control board), the humidity sensor input is provided on the field connection terminal board. The sensor can be used in addition to or instead of a humidistat. The RH Sensor on configuration, Configuration-+UNIT-+RH.S=YES, the sensor is being used instead of an OAQ sensor. OAQ Input identifies Terminal the 24vdc loop power and Terminal 4 is the 4-20 mA signal Refer to the Field Installed Accessories for more information. that 1 is input. Configure Configuration--,CCN--,CCN,4 to desired number (Default is 1). Configure Configuration-->CCN--> to desired bus number Configuration--+CCN--+BAUD (Default to desired element CCN.B is 0). Configure code number for baud is 3 = 9600 baud). Shutdown installed, the unit or Smoke Detector must be configured accessory for it was by field setting Configuration--,UNIT--,FS.SW to normally open (1) or normally closed (2) when there is not a fire alarm. Normally open (1) is the preferred configuration. IMPORTANT: On standard units, the fire shutdown terminals Fire Shutdown 1 and 2. input is the Outdoor Enthalpv If an Outdoor be configured Enthalpy accessory was field installed, the unit must for it by setting Configuration--,ECON--,EN.SW, identifies the normally open or normally when the outdoor enthalpy is low. closed status of this input IAQ Switch identifies the normally open or normally closed status of this input when the indoor air quality value is low (good) and also selects the unit response IAQ Below are quick configuration settings accessories. If these accessories were installed will already be configured. section, third party control, for field installed by the factory, they See the Field-Installed Accessories control connection tables, and CCN or tables for any accessories not mentioned information on accessories. below to this input. IMPORTANT: switch Accessories Display parameter and any additional If a Fire If an IAQ Switch accessory was field installed, the unit must be configured for it by setting Configuration--,AIR.Q--,II.CF, CCN Communication rate (Default Fire Shutdown An IAQ is already accessory configured for it by selects the unit response OAQ cannot be used if an enthalpy Sensor If an CO 2 Sensor 2000 switch on this input. was field installed, the unit must be setting Configuration-+AIR.Q-+IA.CF to this input. Default conversion to 0 to ppm. Sensor Economizer If an Outdoor If an Economizer accessory configured for it by setting unit must be configured for it by setting Configuration-+AIR.Q --,OA.CF selects the unit response to this input. Default conversion to 0 to 2000 ppm. YES. The default settings was field installed, the unit must Configuration-->ECON-->EC.EN for the other economizer be to configurations Air Quality Sensor accessory was field installed, the Fan Status Filter If a Fan Status accessory was field installed, the unit must configured for it by setting Configuration---_UNIT---_FN.SW normally preferred open (1) or normally configuration. IMPORTANT: Fan Status. Fan Status closed input Table DISPLAY MENU TIMECLOCK SCH.L SUBr-] r-]SUB MODE (2). Normally open (1) is the is not on the ternfinals 4 -- Setting KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER Time DISPLAY ENTER PER.1 Status If a Filter configured normally preferred Status accessory was field installed, the unit must for it by setting Configuration--_UNIT--_FL.SW open (1) or normally configuration. closed (2). Nom_ally Schedule - Weekdays for 7:30 to 22:30 ITEM EXPANSION Local Occupancy OCC.1 Only COMMENT Schedule Period Occupied Time ENTER 00.00 Scrolling ENTER 00.00 Hours Flash • 07.00 Select ENTER 07.00 Change 07.30 Select • ENTER 07.30 7 OCC.1 07.30 Period Occupied • UNC.1 00.00 Period Unoccupied Time 00.00 Scrolling 00.00 Hours Flash • 22.00 Select ENTER 22.00 Change 22.30 Select 22.30 ESCAPE UNC.1 22.30 • MON.1 NO Monday Time stops accepted, NO YES Select accepted Scrolling YES Change YES Monday In Period Item/Value/Units • TUE.1 NO Tuesday In Period YES ENTER Select YES YES Tuesday • WED.1 NO Wednesday In Period NO YES Scrolling Select ENTER YES Change WED.1 YES Wednesday THU.1 NO Thursday In Period NO YES Select Scrolling YES Change THU.1 YES Item/Value/Units • FRI.1 NO • ESCAPE ESCAPE ESCAPE In Period Scrolling Select YES YES FRI.1 YES again scrolls again accepted Friday In Period NO ENTER scrolls stops YES ESCAPE ENTER again accepted Item/Value/Units • Thursday scrolls stops YES In Period ENTER ENTER again accepted In Period • • scrolls stops Item/Value/Units ENTER ESCAPE again YES Change TUE.1 scrolls accepted Scrolling ESCAPE again stops MON.1 • scrolls YES ESCAPE NO flash In Period • ENTER minutes 30 Item/Value/Units ENTER ENTER again 22 Change Period Unoccupied scrolls Time ENTER • flash accepted Item/Value/Units ENTER ENTER minutes 30 Change ESCAPE stops accepted, Change Friday In Period stops YES accepted Item/Value/Units be to open (1) is the marked an Occupied ITEM be to Programming Operating The _ ComfortLink different assigned controls schedules (Periods to the desired days SERVICE Schedules will accommodate up to eight 1 through 8), and each schedule is of the week. Each schedule includes The Service Test function compressors, exhaust fans, Use of Service would set days Monday through Friday to ON for Period 1. Then the user would configure the Period 1 Occupied From point to 08:00 and the Period 1 Occupied To point to 17:00. To create a Service Test operation: different weekend schedule, the user would use Period 2 and set days Saturday and Sunday to ON with the desired Occupied On and Off times. and heating IMPORTANT: programmed By default, the time for 24 hours of occupied To create a schedule, 1. Scroll to perform the schedule periods are the following and to enter the password before any new data is SCH_ has a range of 0 to 99. The default value not used as the control only supports one internal/local schedule. If one of the 2-64 schedules is configured, then the control will force the number back to 1. Make sure the value is set to 1 to use a local schedule. the Time TIME SCHEDULE ENTER. 3. Scroll Clock Period down mode. Scroll (SCH.L) 1 (PER.l) down sub-mode, point. and press This point indicates if schedule 1 applies to Monday. Use the ENTER command to go into Edit mode, and use the Up or Down key to change the display to YES or NO. Scroll down through the rest of the days and apply schedule 1 where schedule can also be applied to a holiday. 4. Configure the beginning of the occupied Period 1 (OCC). Press ENTER the first two digits of the 00.00 desired. time period The for to go into Edit mode, and will start flashing. Use the Up or Down key to display the correct value for hours, in 24-hour (military) time. Press ENTER and hour value is saved and the minutes digits will start flashing. Use the same procedure value. to display and save the desired minutes 00.00 will start flashing. Use the Up or Down key to display the correct value for hours, in 24-hour (military) time. Press ENTER and hour value is saved and the minutes digits will start flashing. Use the same procedure to display and save the desired minutes value. 6. The first schedule such at initial system start up and changes limits for cooling are ignored. delays following Normal circuits, compressor are reduced from economizer, time guards to 30 seconds to 1 strike (versus normal and or less. 3) before changing to broadcast is ignored so all alerts and alarms are on CCN. • The words "SERVICE TEST" are inserted into every alarm message. Service turned CCN. test can only be turned ON/OFF at the unit display. Once ON, other entries may be made with the display or through To turn Service Test on, change the value of TEST to ON. To turn service test off, change the value of TEST IMPORTANT: Service Test mode Refer Control Usage to Basic Depending on field-installed the unit accessories, section model, some to OFF. may be password for more factory-installed of the Service protected. information. options, and Test functions may not apply. Outputs The independent (INDP) submenu is used to change output status for the economizer, power exhaust stages, crankcase heaters, and the alarm relay. These independent outputs can operate simultaneously with other Service Test modes. All outputs return to normal operation when Service Test is turned off. When the economizer is using the factory default Digital Control Type (Configuration---,ECON---,E.CTL is 1 or 2) then the Economizer Calibration feature may be used to automatically check and reset the economizer actuator range of motion. operation section of more details. IMPORTANT: ECONOCMD, mode functions If a network force Refer to the economizer is applied to CCN points: PE_I, PE_2, or ALMOUT, their respective test will not be usable. Those forces are at a higher level than test mode; test mode. therefore they will still be honored when in Fan Test 5. Configure the unoccupied time for period 1 (UNC). Press ENTER to go into Edit mode, and the first two digits of the needed, air temperature Independent to the LOCAL will be displayed. to the MON.I the • Circuit alerts are limited CCN is 1. A value of 0 is always occupied, and the unit will control to its occupied set points. A value of 1 means the unit will follow a local schedule, and a value of 65 to 99 means it will follow a CCN schedule. Schedules 2-64 are 2. Enter has • The status of ALM.N select CONFIGURATION (CCN). Scroll down to the Schedule Number (Configuration--,CCN--,SCH.O=SCH_. If password protection has been enabled, the user will be prompted accepted. of alarm shut down state. procedure: mode, operation (See Table 5 for point details). mode other staging operation. Configuration Test is recommended troubleshooting • Outdoor can be used to verify proper heating stages, indoor fan, outdoor fans, power economizer, crankcase heaters, and the alarm relay. an occupied on and off time. As an example, to set an occupied schedule for 8 AM to 5 PM for Monday through Friday, the user during TEST is now complete. as for weekends If a second or holidays, scroll schedule down is The fans (FANS) submenu is used to change indoor fan and outdoor fan stages. The VFD on (Supply VFD Power Test). The indoor fan speed test (F.SPD) runs the fan at the desired speed entered. The outdoor fan relay test (OFC.I) only tests the relay for switching between high and low speeds. The actual outdoor fan will not run unless cool test is on. The cooling (COOL) and heating (HEAT) service test outputs are reset to OFF for the fans service test. and repeat the entire procedure for period 2 (PER.2). If additional schedules are needed, repeat the process for as many as are needed. Eight schedules are provided. See Table 4 for an example and off via IDF output status for the power can be turned of setting the schedule. 10 Cooling Fire Shutdown Test The cooling (COOL) submenu is used to change output status for testing the cooling function. The fans (FANS) and heating (HEAT) service test outputs are reset to OFF for the cooling service test. The digital scroll controller power test (CTLR) turns on and off the compressor controller. The compressor capacity test (CPAC) is used to run the compressor at a desired capacity of 15% to 100%. If a capacity is chosen between 1 and 14, the capacity will be set to 15%. The outdoor fan will turn on to high speed when the compressor capacity is 15% default to compressor supply capacity fan maximum speed (FS.MX) when the test is first activated. The cool test fan speed (F.SPD) running. or greater. The indoor fan speed will is used to change the fan speed while the compressor All normal cooling alarms and alerts are functional. IMPORTANT: capacity When charging the unit, test and the cool test fan speed Heating should both is the compressor The fire shutdown input is provided for unit shutdown in response to a fire alarm or smoke detector. The Fire Shutdown Switch configuration, Configuration--,UNIT--,FS.SW, normally open or normally no fire alarm. Input at field connection cooling (COOL) service test outputs are reset to OFF for the heating service test. Indoor and outdoor fans are controlled normally to maintain proper unit operation. The indoor fan speed will run at the configured max speed FS.MX. All normal heating alarms and alerts are functional. • Fire Shutdown 2 = 24 VAC signal input Output The alarm output is provided on the field connection terminal board (TBI) to indicate a current alarm status. The output will be 24VAC if a current alarm exists. Monitoring On field terminal board (TBI), to monitor economizer position See economizer operation EXPANDED Directory NAME VALUES Test Mode Test Independent Outputs Economizer Position Test 0 to 100% E. CAL PE.1 PE.2 Calibrate Economizer Power Exhaust 1 Test Power Exhaust 2 Test On/Off On/Off On/Off Alarm Relay Test Crankcase Heat Test Test Fans On/Off On/Off IDF VFD Power Test On/Off F.SPD OFC.1 Indoor Fan Speed Test Outdoor Fan Relay Test 0 to 100% On/Off Test Cooling Dig Scroll Ctrl Pwr Test Compressor Capacity Test On/Off 0 to 100% COOL CTLR CAPC F.SPD signal, disconnect 0 to 100% HT.1 HT.2 Heat Stage 2 Test On/Off THIRD signal, information. commanded TBI-8 and the violet wire on disconnect the violet and wire on and the 50092 resister at TBI-J10-6. meter device between TBI-8 Place amp and TBI-9. In analog mode (E.CTL = 3), the economizer position as a 2-10v feedback signal across TBI-10 and TB1-9 IMPORTANT: connected The violet wire at the J10 connector economizer in analog Economizer Cool Test Fan Speed Test Heating Heat Stage 1 Test HEAT for additional and place volt meter device across TBI-8 • To read a 4-20mA On/Off ECON ALRM CCH FANS SITPPLY TBI-J10-8 TBI-JI0-8 Field Service INDP section TBI-9. DISPLAY MENU/ SUB-MENU/ NAME SERVICE TEST TEST and Submodes terminals 8, 9, and 10 can be used from a third party control system. In digital mode (E.CTL = 1 or 2), the economizer position can be read as a 2-10v or 4-20mA signal. TBI-9 are used as follows: • To read a 2-10v Test Modes (TBI) 1 = 24 VAC source for dry contact Economizer Service board • Fire Shutdown Alarm the of this input when there is • X = 24 VAC signal output Test 5 -- terminal identifies status • C = 24 VAC common be set to 100%. The heating (HEAT) submenu is used to change output status for the individual heat stages, gas or electric. The fans (FANS) and Table closed and 50092 as originally can be read at any time. resister wired must be to operate the mode. Damper Control For units with the economizer option or accessory and the ECB control board, the damper position can be directly controlled through the IAQ sensor input provided on the field connection terminal board. The IAQ Analog Input configuration, Configuration--,AIR.Q--,IA.CF will have to set to 3 (Control Minimum Position). When IA.CF = 3, an external 4 to 20 mA source is used to move the damper 0% to 100% directly. On/Off Terminal Terminal PARTY CONTROL 2 = 4-20mA 3 = 4-20mA IMPORTANT: Third party controls may interface with the unit ComfortLink controls through the connections described below. See other sections of these instructions for more information on the related + signal - common In configurations this are not valid. mode preset The damper minimum position positions may exceed the TM unit control Remote The remote input position to provide economizer cooling and CO2 sensor input can not be used for DCV control. Refer to the Indoor Air Quality operation and configurations. section Occupancy occupancy for more information. CONTROLS input is provided on the field connection terminal board (TB1). The Remote configuration, Configuration--,UNIT--,RM.SW, normally open or normally closed status unoccupied. • 5 = 24 VAC signal input Occupancy Switch identifies the of this input when Display Configuration The Configuration--,DISP display settings. Metric OPERATION Display This variable Metric units. submenu is used to configure the local (METR) is used to change the display from English units to • 6 = 24 VAC source for dry contact Language Selection (LANG) This variable display. 11 is used to change At this time, only English the language is available. of the ComfortLink Password Enable (PROT) This variable password is configurations. Service (PSWD) is the 4-digit if a demand LEDs unit only password that is required if (TEST) limit has been placed on the unit's Displays if one or more refrigerant circuits operation of the ComfortLink "_ display. Displays if heating operation is prevented temperature The ComfortLink controls operate under a hierarchy of command structure as defined by four main elements: the System Mode, the Econo Cool OAT Lockout (E.LOC) The System the control Mode The HVAC functional status, and the Unit Control is the top level that defines system: Disabled, Enabled, operation: Disabled, status affects Type. three main states of four main states of Fan Only, Cool, and Heat. set points Space Sensor control mode indoor air quality ventilation for cooling and heating and operation of the economizer and free cooling. in for Run Status--, MODE and Operating Modes'--, MODE. System Mode (SYS) In Run Status Modes, the current system mode and Operating Displays if economizer operation outdoor temperature limit lockout. option This configuration sets the control start-up delay after the power is interrupted. This can be used to stagger the start-up of multiple units. Modes, the current allowed HVAC Shut Down Text on IDF This configuration Failure @plies still permit factory Alert T409 but Fan Maximum Supply Fan Minimum Only economizer use for cooling (occupied cooling set point active) during Free Heating Vent Heating mode Remote HVAC Mode Disabled (HV.DN) Allow disabling of HVAC network connection. mode. This is only available on a This shows the actual setpoint heating mode. not cause unit shutdown. The (FS.MX) cooling Mode Speed (FS.MN) mode and cooling Fan Speed test. (FS.VM) This configuration sets the speed the fan will run during the ventilation mode. The fan speed does not vary during ventilation so it will remain at this speed throughout vent mode. during during (OCC) space occupancy based on closed) is installed, and the input is when the is currently Fire Shutdown Switch (FS.SW) identifies and what status (normally occupied due to an the fire or smoke This (LINK) is established between the unit configuration if a fire shutdown open, normally is installed, the input is when Switch (RM.SW) identifies if a remote installed, and what status (normally input is when UNOCCUPIED. 12 switch closed) alarm is OFF (no alarm). Remote Occupancy Displays if Linkage communication and a Linkage source. if a fan status switch open, normally This configuration identifies if a filter status switch is installed, and what status (normally open, normally closed) the input is when the filter is CLEAN. This configuration in Effect (T.OVR) if the state of occupancy identifies what status (normally indoor fan is OFF. Filter Status Switch (FL.SW) that is being used for control Displays the current state of assumed unit configuration and inputs. Active and sets the limit for the lowest speed the fan can This minimum speed limit applies to the unit This configuration that is being used for control Heat Setpoint in Effect (EFF.H) Linkage is installed Fan Status Switch (FN.SW) (EFF.C) This shows the actual setpoint cooling mode. Displays override. will Speed This configuration run out of 100%. Timed Override switch This configuration sets the limit for the highest speed the fan can run out of 100%. This max speed limit @plies to the unit at all times except for fan test. Mechanical cooling Only economizer used for cooling Currently Occupied if a fan Brief Description Fan may run for ventilation in Effect only default value is YES. Ventilation (fan-only) Cooling Free Cooling Setpoint (IDF.F) configured. A YES value will enable diagnostic Alert T409 to shut down the unit when incorrect fan status is sensed. A NO value will Fan Only Cool due to (FIOP). Unit is in test mode or System mode is disabled Heating is prevented included in Unit Configuration (Configuration--_UNIT). Configuration will be done at the factory for any factory-installed HVAC Operation Disabled Unoccupied Cooling for cooling Many configurations that indicate what factory options and/or field accessories are installed and other common operation variables are Disabled Cooling outdoor Unit Configuration Supply Expanded to A YES value will operate the indoor fan whenever the unit is in the Occupied mode. A NO value will operate the indoor fan only when heating or cooling is necessary. The factory default value is YES. mode is displayed with expandable text. This is the mode the unit decides to run in based on its inputs. There are four main HVAC modes; cooling has three different expanded texts, These modes are shown below, HVAC Mode due limit lockout. is HVAC Mode (HVAC) Status is prevented Fan On When Occupied (OC.FN) and Operating displayed with expandable text. This is an overall state of the unit. Three states are: Unit Operation Disabled, Unit Operation Enabled, or Service Test Enabled. In Run capacity. Start-Up Delay (S.DLY) The general operating mode of the control and the status of some related operation lockouts are located on the display at two locations: III or Test. Mode is the next level that defines The Occupied Gen temperature limit lockout. Modes the Occupied the Heat OAT Lockout (H.LOC) This is used to test the operation HVAC Mode, supports Circuit OAT Lockout (C.LOC) numeric due to outdoor Display The 48/50PD Thermostat. Demand Limit in Effect (D.LMT) Displays Password This variable enabled. Test IMPORTANT: TEMP Monitor enables or disables the use of a password. The used to restrict use of the control to change open, occupancy normally switch closed) is the RH Sensor On OAQ Input Level 1 Priority (RH.S) This configuration identifies if a space relative humidity sensor is installed on the outdoor air quality (OAQ) input. A YES value enables SP.RH display, A NO value disables SP, RH display and use. Space Humidity Switch (RH.SW) This configuration identifies if a space relative humidity switch is installed on the ENTHALPY input, and what status (normally open, normally LOW. closed) Temperature Compensated This factor the input is when the space humidity is The CCN point OCCUPIED as a ComfortID _ controller: the unit is considered is used in the equation of the occupied, when NO, the unit is considered unoccupied. forced, proceed to the level 2 priority. OCCUPIED Remote Normally Occupancy Switch should be Open or Normally Closed when the occupancy field-supplied three possible with (24v, single configurations an external 1. (Configuration---_UNIT---_RM.SW Temperature switch. permitted. 3. (Configuration-+UNIT-+RM.SW Switch = 2) This factor is used in the equation of the Temperature Compensated Start Time Bias for heating. A setting of 0 minutes indicates Temperature Compensated Start in Heating is not 1) The Operating PD unit must each type of switch, the appropriate listed in the table below. TYPE to a space temperature configuration of four set points: The Occupied Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints-+OCSP), the Unoccupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints--,UCSP), Occupied Heat Set Point (Setpoints--,OHSP), or the Unoccupied Heat Set Point (S etpoints-+ UHSP). Occupancy When the building is in occupied when mode, the occupied set points are Level 3 minimize unnecessary cool to heat and heat to cool changes, there is a 10-minute delay after the last stage turns off before the control Schedule The heating and cooling set points The conditioned temperature temperature sensor senses the temperature Closed (2) Normal Closed (2) Open and Occupied and Occupied an Economizer options are determined Schedule Broadcast by the state of Number and the Global (Configuration-+CCN-+BROD-+B.GS). This is the factory default. = 1-64) Follow schedule. Schedules I to 64 are local The 48/50PD unit can only store one local schedule and therefore changing changes the title of the schedule table. in the this number only 3. (Configuration--,CCN-+SCH.O-+SCH.N = 65-99) Follow the global programmed schedule. If the 48/50PD unit is configured as a Global Schedule Broadcaster (Configuration---,CCN---,ROD---,B.GS will follow the unit's programmed the schedule this schedule CCN RS-485 +, -, and ground connection. The T59 space temperature sensor is a T56 sensor with an integrated temperature display. A jumper wire is not needed between R and WI when = YES), the unit schedule and broadcast so that other devices programmed to follow number can receive the schedule. If the 48/50PD unit Broadcaster is not programmed as a Global (Configuration--,CCN--,BROD--,B.GS will receive broadcasted schedules T55, T56, T58 or T59. occupancy is affected by a number of different the unit is operating with a space temperature sensor (T-55, T-56, T-58 or T-59), occupancy and the operation of the economizer. occupancy are listed below from highest occupancy the local programmed within the controller. lower at the space temperature sensor. The T58 space temperature sensor communicates with the PD unit control board through a The building's factors. When Normal Closed is ignored. sensor senses the temperature in the conditioned space and allows for adjustment of the space temperature set point by a configurable number of degrees F higher or a configurable number of degrees F sensors Open 2. (Configuration-+CCN-+SCH.O-+SCH.N space with no provisions for adjusting the space set point at the sensor. The T-56 space temperature using space temperature and Occupied 1. (Configuration---,CCN---,SCH.O---,SCH_ = O) The unit is always considered occupied and the programmed schedule are also mode is required. T55 space Closed (Configuration---,CCN---,SCH.O---,SCH_ separated by a Heat-Cool Set Point Gap (Setpoints-,GAP) that is user configurable from 2 to 10 degrees F. This parameter prevents the unit from over cooling the conditioned space to where heating mode is required or over heating the conditioned space to where cooling are Priority The following Occupancy modes. Normal Open (1) Unoccupied when Closed active. When the building is in unoccupied mode, the unoccupied set points are active. The PD control will switch automatically between cooling and heating to maintain temperature. However, to will switch and states IMPORTANT: To perform remote occupancy, Control Board must be installed in the unit. Determination Closed Open and Unoccupied Occupied when Closed or Unoccupied when Open T59 space temperature sensor is connected to the low voltage terminal board as shown in the Installation Instructions Manual, the PD unit will try to maintain the Space Temperature at one Open STATE OF SWITCH AND STATE OF OCCUPANCY SWITCH CONFIGURATION OF SWITCH sensor T-55, T-56, T58 or T59 and will not operate with a conventional R, YI, Y2, WI, W2, G, C thermostat. When a T-55, T-56, T58 or (Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SPT) is are If the switch is configured to No Switch (0), the switch input value will be ignored and software will proceed to level 3 priority. For Sequence be connected Normally Normally permitted. General switch = 0) No Switch = Start Heating Factor This pole, single throw [SPST]). There for the remote occupancy switch: Compensated Start Time Bias for cooling. A setting of 0 minutes indicates Temperature Compensated Start in Cooling is not Compensated to is not being configured to either the user would like to 2. (Configuration-+UNIT-+RM.SW Switch Temperature is forced If OCCUPIED Level 2 Priority control Start Cooling Factor is forced via an external device such when OCCUPIED is forced to YES, programmed using the affects the unit set points The factors affecting to lowest priority. to broadcast programmed = NO), the from the this schedule number. schedule, occupancy temporarily switched from unoccupied to pressing the override button for approximately the T-55, Override 13 T-56, T-58 or T-59 space will only occur if SPT Schedule While can be occupied 3 seconds temperature Override unit unit by on sensor. Enabled (Configuration--+CCN--+SCH.O--+OV.SP) The length Timed of the override Override (Con figuration--+CCN--+ Compressor period SCH.O--+O is set to YES. is detemfined Hours by the setting V>EX). duct static pressure difference and indoor fan RPM. Make correction to static pressure for all options installed in the unit per the accessory pressure drop table. Deternfine Indoor Fan Max Operation The 48/50 PD units use a Copeland Digital Scroll Compressor that can vary the refrigerant capacity between 100 and 15%. This is accomplished by a mechanism in the compressor that separates the two scroll spirals which stops the pumping of the refrigerant gas. This mechanism is operated by the differential pressure between the suction and discharge of the compressor. The pressure to operate the unloading mechanism is controlled by a small solenoid situated in a refrigerant line between the top of the compressor and the suction line. When the solenoid is energized the compressor is unloaded. The solenoid coil is controlled by the Copeland Digital Scroll Controller (DSC) that operates (Service Test--+INDP--+ECON) to 0 (Econonfizer Damper Closed) and Indoor Fan Speed Test (Service Tes---,FANS---,F.SPD) equal to (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MX). Measure the supply to return on a 1 to 5V signal from the Speed CFM (Configuration---,ECON---,IDF.C) where the corrected static pressure and RPM The supply Maximum on the fan table cross. fan speed range is configured by Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X) the Supply and Supply Fan Minimum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MN). These configuration values are in units of % speed referenced Fan the to a 2 to 10VDC signal to the VFD AI1 input with 2VDC representing 0% speed and 10VDC representing 100% speed or 0 to 60HZ VFD frequency output to the motor. The Supply Fan Minimum Speed ComfortLink Auxiliary Board (AUXI) and converts this into a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal to the solenoid valve. The pulse width modulated signal is an on and off signal that repeats every 15 seconds with the off time portion of the 15 seconds (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MN) can be user configured between 10 and 70%. The Supply Fan Minimum Speed default value is 70%, this provides the greatest energy efficiency rating for representing The The the % loading Compressor of the compressor. Capacity monitored on the ComfortLink Compressor Capacity value (Outputs--+COOL--+CAPC) can Integral, Derivative (PID) algorithm that controls the Supply Temperature (Temperatures--+AIR.T--+SAT) to the Supply Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP). The be Scrolling Marquee Display. The is detemfined by a Proportional, Compressor Minimum Air Air Capacity (Configuration---,COOL---,MIN.C) is configured at the factory to 70%. This is the minimum compressor capacity that gives the highest SEER rating for a 48 series unit with the highest gas heat option and no economizer per AHRI standard 210/240. Since the AHRI rating standard does not account for energy savings that can be realized extending temperature by displacement ventilation air distribution economizer cooling operation at higher set points, a complete energy analysis system and supply air should be conducted before changing the Compressor Minimum Capacity (Configuration---,COOL---,MIN.C) setting to detemfine the energy savings at a lower (Configuration--,COOL--,MIN.C) Indoor Compressor setting. Minimum Capacity fan is controlled by the Indoor Fan VFD Power Relay control, On the Relay (Outputs---,FANS---,IDF) is always on so that power is supplied to the VFD electronic boards. This prevents the formation of condensation on the VFD electronic boards and provides power to VFD display so that error codes can be verified. and VFD configuration The 48/50PD unit controls require an accurate supply duct CFM at the unit design point where the indoor fan will run at the Supply Fan Maxinmm Speed (Configuration-_UNIT--,FS_X). Supply Fan Maximum Speed (Configuration--_UNIT--_FS_X) is used for operation of the economizer and power exhaust. supply CFM The The duct CFM is configured by the Indoor Fan Max Speed (Configuration-_ECON-_IDF.C). Default values for (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.MX) and 100%. The Supply Fan (Configuration---_UNIT---_FS_X) application requirements, (Configuration---,ECON---,IDF.C). deternfine Fan (Configuration---,ECON---,IDF.C) supplied in this book to Speed CFM When Max using the fan tables to Speed CFM set Economizer Position Test The to fine tune the CFM Supply Fan Maxinmm to the Speed The indoor fan may operate during cooling with compressors mode, free cooling with outdoor air mode, heating mode, or for ventilation with outdoor air mode, The indoor fan operation • Fan On When • IAQ Analog can be affected When supply by the following: Occupied (Configuration--+UNIT--+OC.FN) Fan Config (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+IA.FN) (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+ILFN) (Configuration---,UNIT---,FN.SW) the unit is in occupied or unoccupied fan will modulate to maintain the space cooling mode the temperature sensor set point between the configured Supply Fan Maximum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X) and the Supply Fan Minimum Speed (Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MN). When the 40PD or 50 PD unit heating mode (gas heat or electric operate at the Supply (Configuration--_UNIT--_FS_X) For 48PD monitored is in occupied modifications of fan delays functions of the IGC control. or other operation When the PD unit is in free cooling mode modulate to maintain The Occupied (S etpoints---, fan will Speed due to safety the indoor fan will Cool Set Point the Unoccupied Cool Set Occupied Heat Set or the Unoccupied Heat Set Point Point Point UHSP) . the PD unit is in ventilation mode Occupied (Configuration---,UNIT---,OC.FN) operate at the Vent Mode (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.VM). Vent (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS.VM) factory be user configured between 40 and 100%. 14 or unoccupied heat mode) the indoor Fan Maximum setting. gas heating units, the IGC control fan output is also by the MBB control. This can result in additional When then use the fan tables Fan Max Speed (Configuration---_UNIT--_FS_X) RPM nmst now produce supply CFM that is not lower that the nfinimum CFM allowed in the product data for heating and cooling, from an air balance report to configure CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+IDF.C). is not available deternfine Maximum can be configured between 80 Maximum Speed default value is not lower than the minimum CFM allowed in the product data. If the exact CFM can not be set by the half turn pulley settings then adjust the Supply Fan Maximum Speed (Setpoints-,OCSP), (Setpoints---,UCSP), (Setpoints---,OHSP), Speed report air type duct application. 100%. Set the indoor fan pulley to the application design point CFM for heating and cooling at 100% fan speed so that the CFM is Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (Configuration-_ECON-_IDF.C) are at 400 CFM per ton or 1600 CFM for the 05 size and 2000 CFM for the 06 size. It is preferred to use the supply duct CFM the Indoor Fan Max If an air balance in a mixed Fan • Fan Status Switch (Outputs_FANS_IDF) on the MBB (main base board) which then operates the indoor fan contactor (IFC). 48/50PD units the Indoor Fan VFD Power the remote parameters an economizer Supply • IAQ Switch Fan Config Fan Operation The indoor a unit without and Fan On When the indoor fan will Fan Speed Mode Fan Speed default is 50% and can Outdoor When Fan Operation The 48/50 PD units use a multi-speed outdoor fan motor to control the head pressure within an acceptable range at low outdoor ambient temperatures. On the 48 and 50 PD-05 and 06 size units the outdoor compressor The outdoor fan contactor is powered on the load side of the contactor so the outdoor fans will run only when the compressor contactor is contactor is not energized energized. the outdoor FAN LEVEL When the outdoor fan fan runs at high speed. FAN SPEED CONDITIONS fan speed 1. Compressor inputs Table 6 -- an TO NEXT is Fan Level installed, then Econonfizer (Outputs-+ from the parameter econonfizer Econo actuator Actual Actuator econonfizer Multi-Function ComfortLink Installed is output on Position Communication actuator used with Technology (MFT) system to communicate the 48/50PD units is a actuator. This allows the with the actuator through a feedback signal. The configuration Econonfizer Control Type (Configuration-+ECON-+E.CTL) deternfines the conmmnication method, either digital or analog, used to communicate between Economizer Control Board and the economizer actuator. the The power to the unit must be cycled after the Economizer Control Type (Configuration --+ECON--+E.CTL) configuration parameter is changed. E.CTL = 1 or 2 (Digital/Position When or Digital/Command) Econonfizer Control (Configuration-+ECON-+E.CTL) Control Board will communicate Control Board and actuator Type is set to 1, the Econonfizer with the economizer actuator using the digital protocol, from Econonfizer Control J7-1 to actuator pin 5. The commanded position and actual position are communicated back and forth actuator and the Economizer Control Board. When the first initiate communication, Board plug the actuators between the Economizer a Control Angle Econonfizer Control Type (Operating Modes'---, ECON--+C_4NG) is provided to the Econonfizer Control Board and defines the actuator's range of motion. The control angle must be greater than the Min Actuator Ctrl Angle (Configuration-+ECON-+M_4NG). During this digital control, the Economizer Control represent the actuator's Board actual three of fan levels the three levels and are deternfined by TO TRANSITION HIGHER LEVEL TO NEXT 1. Outside Air Temperature Control -- Fan Lev2 On Temperature 55 F or above (Configuration--,COO L--,O FC--,2.ON > =55F)* 2. Condenser Pressure A Override -- Fan Levl Max Pressure 450 psig or above (Configuration--,COOL--,OFC--,1 .MXP> = 450 psig)* Control of Outdoor N/A Fan The default to be checked position configurations or manually have been configured.\ E.CTL = 2. Because when qualified over a wide the wiring has a built-in 500-ohm resistor, the 4 to 20mA signal is converted to a 2 to 10VDC signal that is accessible via a field connected ternfinal board TB-8 and TB-9. However, before this signal can be read E CON-+ E C _4P) . Economizer The back fan runs 1. Compressor Contactor is ON (on initial start up outdoor fan runs at Level 2 for 10 seconds before moving to correct level based on outside air temperature or Condenser Pressure A) commanded (Configuration--_UNIT--_EC.EN) should be set to YES. The economizer is controlled by the Econo Commanded Position (Outputs-,ECON-,EC.CP) on the Economizer Control Board (ECB). Feed configuration by a system Table 6 shows The fan levels CONDITIONS Contactor is OFF Operation econonfizer the outdoor to the Main Base Board. *Configuration parameters 1.MXE 2.MNE 2.ON and 2.OFF factory default configuration should not be changed. range of conditions and are provided in case a field replacement of the control board occurs and the settings need If is controlled 1. Outside Air Temperature Control -- Fan Lev2 Off Temperature 45 F or below (Configuration--,COOL--,OFC--,2.OFF < =45F)* 2. Condenser Pressure A Override -- Fan Lev2 Min Pressure 200 psig or below (Configuration--,COOL--,OFC--,2.MNP< = 200 psig)* HIGH Economizer is energized Outdoor Air Temperature (Temperatures-,AIR.T-,OAT) but can be overridden by Condenser Pressure A (Pressures-+SCP,4) N/A LOW fan contactor set up in the control software. fan speeds for each level. TO TRANSITION LOWER LEVEL OFF the outdoor at low speed. remotely, connection the violet wire that connects the actuator to field ternfinal board TB-J10-8 must be removed or cut. E.CTL = 3 (Analog Control) When E.CTL is set to 3, the Econonfizer Control Board will NOT conmmnicate with the economizer actuator directly with 20mA analog signal wired to TB-8 and TB-9 along 500-ohm resistor producing a 2 to 10VDC signal for the While in this mode, the actuator's built-in 2 to 10VDC signal s accessible via TB-9 used by the Econonfizer Free Cooling The econonfizer will and TB-10 Control be any time because the 4 to with the actuator. feedback it is not Board. allowed to help with cooling if the Outdoor Air Temperature (Temperatures--,AIR.T--,OAT) is less than the configured Econo Cool Hi Temp Linfit (Configuration-+ECON-+EH.LO) and greater than the configured Econo (Configuration-+ECON-+EL.LO). Cool If Lo an Temp enthalpy installed, the outdoor temperature must be below Hi Temp Linfit (Configuration--+ECON--+EHJ_O) Outdoor LOW. Enthalpy Switch (Inputs-+GENd-+ENTH) Unoccupied Free Cooling The unoccupied building space free cooling algorithm attempts half way between the Occupied Linfit sensor is the Econo Cool and the must be to maintain the Cool Set Point (Setpoints-,OCSP) and Occupied Heat Set Point (Setpoints-,OHSP) using only the econonfizer when the conditions in the building and the outdoors are suitable., during UNoccupied are suitable. periods if the air in the building and the outdoor Three different configurations define this algorithm: 1. Unoccupied (Configuration-+ECON-+ analog 4 to 20 mA output will position when E.CTL = 1 or 15 Free UEFC) air Cooling a.(Configuration--,ECON--,UEFC = O) - Disabled (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.MX) unoccupied Cooling occupied setpoints. space temperature nmst be higher then the nfid-point between the occupied cooling and heating set points. only occur when the time until the next occupied period is less than the Free Cool PreOcc nfinutes. in 2. Free Cool Time (FC.TM) PreOcc Time (C onfiguratio n--_ E CON--_ F C. TM) FC.TM is the configuration that determines minutes before occupancy set for Preoccupancy that free cooling (UEFC many can occur when = 2). 3. l.Free Cool Low (Configuration---,ECON---,FC.LO) Unoccupied Temperature FCJLO. how Temp free cooling cannot occur (Temperature---, AIR.T--, Linfit if the Outdoor Air OAT) is less than exhaust (Configuration--_ECON--_PE_N) and 06 size units both power set Power Exhaust Installed to YES. On the 48/50PD-05 exhaust fans are wired together and are controlled by the configuration (Configuration-_ECON-_PE1.C). Power When Exhaust Stagel CFM the Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (Configuration-_ECON-_IDF.C) supply control CFM (either by fan tables or air balance report) calculate the outside air CFM based on outside damper position (Outputs-,FANS-,F.SPD) and is set to the correct Commanded Fan to turn on the power exhaust the air Speed when the calculated outside air CFM reaches Power Exhaust Stage1 CFM (Configuration--,ECON--,PE1.C). The power exhaust will turn off when the calculated outside air CFM falls below Power Exhaust Stagel CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+PE1.C). Power Exhaust Stage2 CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+PE2.C) not currently Indoor Air used on the 48/50PD-05 Quality demand outdoor quality The is and 06 units. (IAQ) The ComfortLink TM control methods of demand ventilation typically measured using a CO2 displayed measured has the capability for several control. Indoor air quality is sensor whose measurements are in parts per million (ppm). with a CO2 sensor for Outdoor air quality may be indoor-outdoor differential ventilation control, or with other sensor types for the air lockout function. The factory-installed indoor air CO2 sensor is mounted in the return section. A field-installed indoor air quality CO2 sensor may be mounted in the return or directly in the occupied space, per job requirements. The indoor air quality modes of operation can be affected by the IAQ Analog Input Config (Configuration---, AIR.Q---, IA.CF), IAQ Switch Input Config (Configuration---, OAQ Analog Input Config (Configuration---, and other related fan and limit configurations IAQ (Analog = 1 (DCV) When IA.CF = 1 the IAQ AIR.Q---, AIR.Q---, as described IA.CF), OA.CF) below. Input) The ComfortLink TM control is configured for indoor sensors which provide 4 to 20 mA signal for 0 to 2000 algorithm below when the space is is set for Demand air quality ppm CO2. Control between between the Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) and the Outdoor Air Quality (OAQ). The lower of these two positions is referred to as the Econo Min IAQ Position (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQ.MN) while the higher is referred to as the Econ Min at Max (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X). The Econo Position (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQ.MN) should economizer contaminates Fan Speed Min IAQ be set to an position that brings in enough fresh air to remove and CO2 generated by sources other than people. The Econ Min (Configuration--+ECON---,MP.MX) at Max should Fan be Speed to an set economizer position that brings in fresh air to remove contaminates and CO2 generated by all sources including people when the indoor fan is operating at the Supply Fan Maximum Speed (Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MX). Speed (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) The ComfortLink power duct will IA.CF value for n_axinmm Exhaust enable Mode with Economizer section and the indoor fan is on. Ventilation (DCV). During DCV, the damper modulates two user configurations depending upon the relationship c. (Configuration--_ECON--_UEFC = 2) - Preoccupancy When UEFC is set to 2, unoccupied free cooling can To Fan Maximum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X) and the damper position will vary at other fan speeds as described in the b. (Configuration--_ECON--_UEFC = 1) - Unoccupied When UEFC is set to 1, unoccupied free cooling can occur throughout the entire unoccupied period. The Power when the fan is at Supply When UEFC = 0, unoccupied free cooling is disabled. Cooling will only occur if the space exceeds the The Econ Min at Max Fan value is the design occupancy. TM control will begin to open the damper the Econo Min IAQ Position (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,AQd_N) position when the IAQ level begins to exceed the Outdoor Quality referred (OAQ) level by a configuraMe to as AQ Air amount. This amount is Differential Low (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQD_L). When between IAQ and OAQ (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQDJI), from the differential reaches AQ Differential High the economizer position will be at the Econ Min (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) at when at Supply Fan (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X). differential is between Maximum Speed When the IAQ/OAQ AQ Differential Low (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+A (Con figuration--+AIR.Q--+A Max Fan Speed the indoor fan speed is QD.L) and AQ Differential High QD JI) , the control will modulate the damper between Econ Min at Max Fan Speed and Econo Min IAQ Position (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.MX) (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+A Q.MN) in a linear manner as shown in Figure 3. At other fan speeds operate in the shaded area between curves but at the actual fan speed Speed (Outputs-,FANS-,F.SPD). IA.CF = 2 (Override the econonfizer damper will the two econonfizer position as indicated by Commanded Fan IAQ) When IA.CF = 2, the IAQ algorithm maintains the damper Min at Max Fan Speed (Configuration--,ECON--,MP.MX) the indoor fan speed is (Configuration--,UNIT--,FS.MX) 3 when the indoor fan (Outputs-,FANS-,F.SPD) at at Econ when Supply Fan Maximum Speed or in the shaded area of Figure speed is at the Commanded Fan Speed until the override condition triggers. The override triggers when than AQ Differential High The IAQ Override Position the IAQ/OAQ differential is greater (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQD.H). (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+OVRaP). The economizer damper will return to the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) or MP.MX curve at other fan speeds when the IAQ/OAQ differential is less than the AQ Differential Low (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+AQD.L). If the sensor being used has a different range, the ppm display range must be reconfigured by entering new values for the IAQ The override algorithm will operate whenever the building is occupied and the indoor fan is operating or whenever the IAQ algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate. The IAQ Analog Sensor Value at 4mA (Configuration--_AIR.Q--_L4M) Sensor Value at 20mA (Configuration--_AIR.Q--_L2OM). Fan Config (Configuration--+AIR.Q--+IA.FN) determines or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. IA.CF = 0 (No IAQ) IA.CF = 0 signifies damper will operate that there is no IAQ sensor at the Econ Min and IAQ installed. at Max Fan The Speed whether If the indoor fan is not operating, the economizer position will be zero. If the override is not active and the building is unoccupied, the economizer 16 position will be zero. The damper position may exceed Econ Min at Max (Configuration--_ECON--_MP_X) (Configuration--,AIR.Q--,OVRdP) Fan Speed or IAQ Override Position to provide econonfizer Fan cooling. IA.CF = 3 (Control Minimum Position) When IA.CF = 3, an external 4 to 20 mA source is used to set the minimum position. The 4mA signal corresponds to 0% and the 20 mA signal corresponds to 100%. In this mode, configuration such as Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (Configuration--,ECON--,MP.MX), Econo Min IAQ Position (Configuration--,AIR.Q--,AQ.MN) position and DCV minimum used. If the indoor nfininmm 3 are not the econonfizer position may exceed econonfizer cooling. position the econonfizer will be minimum Linfit Enable (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,OAQ_L) (Analog IAQ is 600 ppm Sensor) The DCV algorithm will operate whenever the building is occupied and the indoor fan is operating or whenever the IAQ algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate. The IAQ Analog Fan Config (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,IA.FN) deternfines whether or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. If the indoor fan is not operating, The damper position may the econonfizer position will be zero. exceed Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) position curve to provide econonfizer IA.FN fan is not operating, zero. The damper position to provide IAQ (Switch and the econonfizer position curves in figure Lockout CO2. and corresponding cooling. damper = 0 (Never) When IA.FN IA.FN =0, the IAQ algorithm can never turn on the fan. = 1 (Occupied) When IA.FN =1, the IAQ algorithm will turn on the indoor fan whenever the building is occupied and IAQ/OAQ differential is Input) Indoor air quality can also be measured using a switch input. For the purpose of specifying the type of switch input, low CO2 levels are considered normal. The IAQ switch input is defined by the IAQ Switch Input Config (Configuration-,AIR.Q-,ILCF). Enthalpy and IAQ are controlled by the same switch input and greater than the Fan (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,DF.ON). when the IAQ/OAQ differential Differential On AQ Differential The indoor fan will turn off is less than the Fan Off AQ (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,DF.OF). II.CF = 0 (NO IAQ) IA.FN = 2 (Always) The indoor fan operation for IA.FN =2, is the same as the operation when IA.FN =1, except the algorithm is not linfited to The II.CF = 0, configuration signifies that there is no IAQ switch input. The damper will operate at the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed the occupied periods only. The fan can be triggered space is occupied or unoccupied. (Configuration_ECON_MP.MX) position curve based on indoor Fan therefore occupied II.CF cannot be used simultaneously. and the indoor fan and corresponding speed when the damper space is fan is on. = 1 (DCV Normally Open) fan is operating at (Configuration-*UNIT-*FS.MX). Supply economizer minimum position (Configuration--*ECON--*MP_X) operating at Supply (Configuration--_ position Fan If is Econo Min when the indoor Maximum Speed IAQ is high, the is Econ Min at Max Fan Speed when the indoor fan is Fan Maximum Speed UNIT--_FS_X). II.CF = 3 (Override Normally Open) positioning of the economizer damper for ventilation purposes. The override is active when IAQ is high and inactive when IAQ is low. The override position is configured by the IAQ Override Position Outdoor Air Quality VR dP). (Analog range nmst be reconfigured OAQ Sensor (Configuration--,AIR.Q--,O.4M) and 20mA (Configuration--,AIR.Q--,O.2OM). OA.CF by entering new values Value at 4mA OAQ Sensor Value at that there II.FN When = 0 (Never) II.FN =0, the IAQ algorithm II.FN When = 1 (Occupied) II.FN =1, the IAQ II.FN = 2 (Always) The indoor fan operation is no outdoor sensor OA.CF = 2 (OAQ Lockout) The outdoor air quality analog analog input air sensor installed. The input is the value of OAQ. is only used to lock out the outdoor ventilation. The econonfizer commanded position is set to 0% when the CO2 ppm exceeds the OAQ lockout value configured for the (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,AQJL). and corresponding cooling. can never turn on the fan. algorithm OAQ The Lockout default value Limit for OAQ for II.FN damper will turn on the indoor fan The indoor =2, is the same as the operation when IA.FN =1, except the algorithm is not linfited to the occupied periods only. The fan can be triggered on when the space is occupied or unoccupied. Modes Cooling T56, Mode T58 In cooling Using Space Temperature Sensor T55, or T59 mode the PD control will maintain the Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoint--_OCSP) or the Unoccupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints---,UCSP) by modulating the indoor fan speed to supply more or less airflow to the conditioned space at the Supply Air Cooling default value of OAQ is 400 ppm CO2. OA.CF = 1 (DCV) The outdoor air quality (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) position curve to provide econonfizer Temperature = 0 (NO OAQ) This signifies Input) or not the IAQ algorithm can turn on the indoor fan. If the indoor fan is not operating, the econonfizer position will be zero. The damper position may exceed Econ Min at Max Fan Speed Cooling Input) The ComfortLink TM control is configured for outdoor air quality sensors which provide a 4 to 20 mA signal corresponding to 0 to 2000 ppm CO2. If a field supplied sensor has a different range, the ppm display for the Switch whenever the building is occupied and IAQ is high. fan will turn off when the IAQ returns to normal. II.CF = 4 (Override Normally Closed) The damper override function permits absolute (Con figuration---,AIR.Q---,O (Analog The DCV algorithm will operate whenever the building is occupied and the indoor fan is operating or whenever the IAQ algorithm has caused the indoor fan to operate. The IAQ Switch Fan Config (Configuration---,AIR.Q---,II.FN) deternfines whether II.CF = 2 (DCV Normally Closed) The Demand Control Ventilation (DCV) allows the econonfizer minimum position to be decreased when there is no IAQ problem. If IAQ is low, the econonfizer minimum IAQ Position (Configuration--_AIR.Q--_AQ_N) Enable on when the The Cool configured maintain (Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT). Supply Air Set Point Supply between a Air 45F Set (Temperatures--+AIR.T--+SAT)at (S etpoint---, SA SP) . Cooling Speed Demand Point and 75F. Supply (Setpoint---,SASP)can The compressor Air the Cool Supply be modulates to Temperature Air Set Point Window When the temperature in the conditioned space is higher than the Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints---,OCSP) plus the Fan Speed Control 17 Demand (Configuration---,COOL?FS.CD) configuration variable orUnoccupied CoolSetPoint(Setpoints--->UCSP) the Fan Speed (Configuration--->COOL--->FS.CD) Control configuration plus Demand variable the indoor fan will run at 100%. When the temperature in the conditioned space is between the Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints--->OCSP) and Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints--->OCSP) plus the (Configuration--->COOL--->FS.CD) indoor fan modulates (Setpoints-,OCSP) (Setpoints-,UCSP). space falls to (Setpoints-,OCSP) Speed Control Demand configuration variable the to satisfy the Occupied Cool Set or Unoccupied Cool Set Point Point When the temperature in the conditioned below the Occupied Cool Set Point or Unoccupied Cool Set Point 0.5F (Setpoints-,UCSP) ventilation mode. Fan for 5 nfinutes the controls See ventilation mode sequence will run unit of operation in can be set to -10 and the (Setpoint--,SASP) In normal Maxinmm Reset Up configuration variable of Cool Supply Air Set Point reset of +0 and -10 F. operation when the Space Temperature is within the speed demand window the unit control will modulate the indoor fan speed and supply air temperature along a defined curve to bring the Space Temperature to Occupied or Unoccupied Cool Set Point. Since this curve is independent of the conditioned space load the control scheme will adapt to any load present in the conditioned space move by adjusting the fan speed and supply air temperature and the space temperature along the defined time temperature curve to Occupied When the space or Unoccupied temperature the speed Maximum configured Cool Set Point. rises Point (Setpoints-,OCSP) + (Configuration--->COOL--->FS.CD) Tern )e ra_ure SASP (Configuration--_COOL--_SAT--_SA_U) can be set to 0 giving the range above the Occupied Cool Set Fan Speed Control Demand for over 2 nfinutes or is outside demand window and there is some amount of SASP Reset Down (Configuration--->COOL?SAT--->SA.MD) the indoor fan will be locked at 100% and the unit controls will subtract a calculated amount of temperature reset to the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP). The indoor fan ocsp + FSCD X C_oling _peed D el_ Window - ]nit Space Temperature a on 9,_ (OO SP) Supply OCSP ocsP Fan ._pe ed M o_utate_ to 1'_ OVe e_ned Curce o the O_cup ed Cool eet Polnt "I"-,, _ -- m , - 05 F • Time C09143 Fig. 6 - Cooling Cooling Supply Speed Air Set Point Demand Window The Air will continue to cunmlatively reset Set for reset of the Cool This is needed for applications where a high Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP) is required or where dramatic load changes occur over short time periods. In these situations a high supply air Point (Setpoint--->SASP) + SASP (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_D). Set Point (Setpoints---,OCSP) or the Unoccupied (Setpoints---,UCSP) over a reasonable time period. or econonfizer conditioned space controls Status--->COOL--->SA.CP). Maxinmm When Reset Down the reset is no Point (Setpoint--->SASP). The indoor fan will then modulate lower than 100% to move the Space Temperature (Temperatures--->SPT) along Point operation Cool the defined time temperature curve to Cool Supply Air Set (Setpoint--->SASP) or Unoccupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints--->UCSP). may not provide enough cooling to reduce the Space (Temperatures--->AIR.T--->SPT) to the Occupied Cool The compressor subtract a calculated amount of temperature to a value equal to the Supply Air Temperature longer needed the control will remove Down Reset until all reset is removed and the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status--->COOL--->SA.CP) is back to the original Supply Air Set Reset The PD unit can be configured to allow Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP). temperature Temperature speed will be locked at 100% as long as reset is applied. Supply Air Temperature will now adjust to this new Supply Control Point (Run Status--->COOL--->SA.CP). The controls Supply Set Point See Fig. 6 and 7. Air Temperature iiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii_ b,iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii iiiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!iiii! iii!iiiiiii iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii supplying cooling to the Supply Air Control The Supply Air Control to the Point Point (Run (Run SAS Status--->COOL--->SA.CP) which is a calculated value that is equal to the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP) plus the calculated amount of reset required up to the values set by configuration variables SASP Maxinmm Reset Down (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SA.MD) and SASP Maximum Time C09144 Reset Up (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_U). Reset of linfited Down Maximum The the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP) by the configuration variables SASP (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SA.MD) Reset Up SASP Maxinmm and is Reset SASP (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_U). Maximum Reset Down (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SA.MD) configuration variable can be set from -20 to 0 F and will allow the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP) to be reset to as nmch as 20 F below the Cool Supply Air Maximum Reset Set Up Point (Setpoint--->SASP). The SASP (Configuration--->COOL?SAT--->SAJ_U) configuration variable can be set from 0 to 20 F and will allow the Supply Air Temperature to be Reset to as nmch as 20 F above the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--->SASP). The SASP Maximum and Reset Down SASP (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT--->SAJ_D) Maximum Reset Up (Configuration--_COOL--_SAT--_SA_U) configuration variables can be set independently and do not need to be equal values above Fig. 7 - Cool Supply Cooling Mode with Economizer Temperature Sensor T55, T56, If an economizer is installed, configuration (Configuration--_ECON--_ YES. The econonfizer is controlled Air Set Point Using Space T58 the or T59 Economizer Installed EC.EN) should be set to by the Econo Commanded Position (Outputs'--,ECON--, EC.CP) on the Econonfizer Control Board. If the indoor fan is off or the building is unoccupied, the econonfizer position is zero. When the space temperature is above the Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints-,OCSP) and the econonfizer is installed, configured and working correctly the unit controls will always try to meet space cooling demand using the econonfizer before turning on the compressor. The econonfizer will provide following outside air conditions are true. and below the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP). For example, the SASP Maximum Reset Down (Configuration--->COOL--->SAT---> ?SA J_D) configuration variable 18 free cooling when the Forall units with Economizers: pressure 1. 1.The outdoor temperature is below the Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit (Configuration--_ECON--_EH_LO) and above the Econo Cool Lo Temp Linfit (C onfiguration--+ readings to deternfine the actual Indoor Fan Max Speed CFM (Configuration--+ECON--+IDF.C). Economizer Position % E CON--+ EL_LO) . MAX P For units with Enthalpy 2. 1.The outdoor is below Control enthalpy is low and the outdoor temperature the Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit (Configuration--+ECON--+EH.LO) and above the Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit (Configuration--+ECON--+EL.LO). If the conditions cooling above are true and the economizer the economizer outside air and return is available air dampers for will modulate to allow proportions of outside air and return air to mix and produce a temperature equal to the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP). If reset is applied to the Supply Air 4PMX ;v AQ/dl'j Temperature Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP) the dampers will control to the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP). 20 25 50 I_ 100 75 for DqYsj Fan Speed % Minimum Configurable Fan Speed is 20% If the conditions above are true but the economizer dampers are not able to satisfy the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP) with Reset (if applied), the compressor will turn on and modulate to provide additional cooling to satisfy the Cool Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP) If the conditions with Reset if applied. ECON above are not true, the economizer user Configurable Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) where the nfinimum economizer damper position is based on the Supply Fan Maximum MIN AT MAX will move to a FANSPEED POSITION (MmNPMAX) Speed (Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MX). This is done to maintain a constant airflow through the economizer by opening the dampers dampers more as the indoor fan speed is reduced more as the indoor fan speed increases. or closing the MINIMUM The shape of the Economizer Minimum Position vs. Fan Speed curve is determined by the configuration parameters: Econ Min at 25% Fan speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.25), Econ Min at 50% Fan speed 75% Fan speed at Max Fan speed The Econ (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.50), (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.75) IAQ DAMPER POSITION (AO. MN) Econ Min at and Econ Min (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X). Min at 25% Fan 100 speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.25), Econ Min at 50% Fan speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.50) and Econ Min at 75% Fan speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.75) damper positions are calculated based on the (Configuration---,ECON---,MP_X) Econ Min and / at Max Fan Speed Supply Fan Maximum Econ Min at 25% Econ Min and Econ Fan economizer programmed at Max Fan Speed Outside air CFM through the outside air dampers. into the PD controls economizer at 400 CFM/TON Supply in H20 pressure in the return duct. The default is based on calculations a side shot Air flow with negative 0.25 Econ Min at Max fan Speed (Configuration--+UNIT--+FS.MN) is set by user based on minimum required outside air ventilation CFM required for the application. This procedure would be the same as if this were a CV unit with the unit running at the design point CFM. This determines the minimum position amount of outside speed. air CFM required when Configure the Indoor (Configuration--+ECON--+IDF.C) AQ DIFFERENTIAL DIFFERENTIAL LOW (AQD.L) HIGH (AQD.H) the fan is running Fan either Max to the Minimum Position speed at 50% Fan speed Min at 75% Fan speed (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.75) damper position are user configurable and can be determined by setting the fan speed at 25, 50 and 75% and determining the damper position required to maintain the Econ Min (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.MX) DIFFERENTIAL AQ Fig. 8 - Economizer (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.25), (Configuration--+ECON--+MP.50) INSIDE/OUTSIDE CO2 C09145 Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X). The 700 If the indoor fan is not operating, the econonfizer will be fully closed, 0% open. Ventilation Mode If the space temperature falls 0.5F below the Occupied Cool Set Point (Setpoints-+OCSP) the compressor will turn off, the indoor fan speed will be set to the Vent Mode Fan Speed (Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM) and the econonfizer will open to the position that will supply nfinimum ventilation air at the configured Vent Mode Fan Speed (Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM). Default Vent Mode Fan Speed (Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM) is 50%. Configuring the Vent Mode Fan Speed (Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.VM) lower will provide additional energy savings in vent mode but may not supply the required ventilation air to the conditioned space at lower fan speeds. Demand Control Ventilation at maximum Speed supply CFM CFM deternfined from the fan performance tables or air balance reports. If using fan performance tables make corrections for all installed accessory pressure loss and use measured RPM, power and static The 48PD units can also be equipped with optional CO2 sensors for additional indoor air quality control. When unit is equipped with a return duct CO2 sensor or return duct CO2 sensor and outside air CO2 sensor the Econonfizer nfinimum position vs. fan speed curve will be recalculated based on the CO2 level of the return and/or outside air as shown in Fig. 8. See the Indoor Air 19 Quality (IAQ) section of the Econonfizer Operation section above for more details on Demand Control Ventilation (DCV). Economizer Operation for Units Equipped with Return Air COy Sensor Only When the CO 2 sensor detects a CO 2 level or IAQ Level (Inputs--+AIR.O--+IAO) below the AQ Differential Low (Configuration--,AIR.O--,AOD.L) value the MP.25, MP.50, MP.75 and MP.MX points will be recalculated to new values for MP.25, MP.50, MP.75 based on the Econ Min IAQ Position (Configuration--,AIR.O--,AO.MN). The econonfizer outside air damper will close and reduce the amount of outside air CFM to the conditioned space based on the lower IAQ sensor readings and indoor fan speed. The econonfizer outside air damper will continue to close and reduce the amount of outside air CFM to the conditioned space until the damper reaches user configurable Econ Min IAQ Position (Configuration--,AIR.Q--,AQ_N). This will happen when the Commanded Fan Speed (Outputs-+FANS-+F.SPD) is at the Supply Fan Maxinmm Speed (Configuration--,UNIT--,FS_X). When the Commanded Fan Speed (Outputs-+FANS-+F.SPD) is between Supply Fan Maximum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_X) and the Supply Fan Minimum Speed (Configuration---,UNIT---,FS_N) the damper will operate in the shaded area of Figure 8 based on the IAQ Level (Inputs-+AIR.Q-+IAQ). Economizer Operation for Units Equipped COy Sensor and outside air COy Sensor with Return Air The Econonfizer will operate sinfilar to Econonfizer Operation for Units Equipped with Return Air CO2 Sensor Only but the IAQ Level (Inputs-+AIR.Q-+IAQ) will be deternfined by actual outside air CO2 measurements instead of the 400 ppm CO2 default value for OAQ. Cooling Mode Using Space Temperature Sensor T55, T56, T58 or T59 and Humidistat (HL38MG029 or TSTATCCPLH01-B) Enhanced dehunfidifying will be provided when a hunfidistat (HL38MG029 or TSTATCCPLH01-B) is connected the PD unit ternfinal strip across the R and W2 ternfinals (since the PD unit does not support the use of conventional thermostat inputs the W2 ternfinal is reconfigured for hunfidity input) and Space Hunfidity Switch (Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.SW) configuration variable is set to 1 (Normally Open-no call to dehunfidify). Relative hunfidity set point is set by adjusting the dial on the HL38MG029 or TSTATCCPLH01-B device. When the hunfidistat contacts close and provide 24VAC to the W2 ternfinal the PD unit will reset the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status---,COOL---,SA.CP) by one degree F lower than the Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint-+SASP) or the current control point if the Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint-+SASP) has already been modified. After 5 minutes if the humidistat contacts are still closed and 24 VAC is being supplied to the W2 ternfinal the PD unit will reset the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP) lower by one more degree F. This reset cycle will continue to lower the supply air temperature every 5 nfinutes until the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status-+COOL-+SA.CP) is equal to the Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP) + SASP Maximum Reset Down (Configuration--+COOL-+SAT-+SA.MD). The unit will continue to operate at this reduced supply air temperature control point until the hunfidistat contacts open and 24VAC is no longer supplied to the W2 ternfinal. When 24VAC is no longer supplied to the W2 ternfinal the supply air control point will be reset higher by one degree F. After 3 nfinutes if the hunfidistat contacts are still open and 24VAC is not being supplied to the W2 ternfinal PD unit will reset the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status---,COOL---,SA.CP) higher by one more degree F. This reset cycle will continue to raise the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status---,COOL---,SA.CP) every 3 nfinutes until the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status--,COOL--,SA.CP) is equal to the Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint-+SASP) or the supply air control point if reset was being that reset the Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint-+SASP). Whenever Relative Hunfidity applied the space temperature is controlled by modulating applied due to cooling Reset is the fan speed reset. requirements even if the fan was locked at 100% due to (Setpoint-+SASP) Cooling Mode Using Space Temperature Sensor T55, T56, or T58 and Humidity Sensor (HL39ZZ007 or 33ZCSENRH-01) Enhanced dehumidifying will be provided when a humidly sensor (HL39ZZ007 or 33ZCSENRH-01) 4 to 20 ma control is connected the PD unit terminal strip across the TB1-J10 pin 3 and 4, power to hunfidity sensor is connected to R and C, the RH Sensor on OAQ Input (Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.S) is set to YES and Space (Configuration--,UNIT--,RH.SW) Hunfidity configuration variable Switch is set to 0. Relative hunfidity set point is set by changing the value of Space RH Set point (Setpoint--,RH.SP). When the relative hunfidity in the space is above the Space RH Set point (Setpoint--,RH.SP) the PD unit controls will reset the supply air temperature by one degree F lower than the Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP) or the current control Set Point (Setpoint--,SASP) has already point if the Supply Air been modified. After 5 nfinutes the PD unit will reset the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status-+COOL-+SA.CP) lower by one more degree F. This reset cycle will continue to lower the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status-+COOL-+SA.CP) Control Point (Run Supply Down relative every 5 nfinutes Status-+COOL-+SA.CP) until the Supply Air is equal to the Air Set Point (Setpoint--+SASP) + SASP Maximum Reset (Configuration--+COOL--+ SAT-+SA.MD). When the hunfidity in the space goes below the Space RH Set Point (Setpoint-+RH.SP) (Setpoint--_RH.DB) the the Space supply air control RH Deadband point will be reset higher by one degree F. After 3 nfinutes if the hunfidity sensor reading is still below the Space RH Set Point (Setpoint-+RH.SP) the Space RH Deadband reset the Supply Status--+COOL--+SA.CP) (Setpoint--+RHJ)B), the PD unit will Air Control Point (Run higher by one more degree F. This reset cycle will continue to raise the Supply Air Control Point (Run Status--+COOL--+SA.CP) every 3 nfinutes until the supply air temperature control point is equal to the Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint--_SASP) or the supply air control point if reset was being applied due to cooling requirements that reset the Supply Air Set Point (Setpoint-+SASP). Heating Gas Modes Heating T55, T56, Mode or T58 Using Space For gas units, the (Configuration---,HEAT---,HT.TY) 1. Heat will not operate value configured if the outdoor temperature is greater than the for the Heating Lockout Temperature Heat Mininmm and Heat Minimum (Configuration--+HEAT--,MOT.H). stages of heating. Factory defaults OFF. The of 1 nfinute On Time Off Time Timeguards apply to both values are 2 nfinute s ON and 2 Integrated Gas Controller (IGC) minimum will be followed even if Heat Minimum On Time (Configuration---,HEAT---,MRTJt) Service Test. If the indoor Sensor Type of Heat Installed will be factory set to a value of (Configuration---,HEAT---,HT_LO), (Configuration---,HEAT---,MRTJt) nfinutes on-time Temperature (48PD Units Only) fan control is is configured lower to cycle and during with the heating demand by setting Fan ON When Time (Configuration--,UNIT--,OC.FN) Occupied Heat Minimum On to NO, the fan will stop after a delay configured (Configuration-+HEAT-+FOD.G). Fan-off The Fan-off seconds. nfinutes 2O by Delay, factory Gas default Heat for Delay, Gas Heat (Configuration--+HEAT--+FOD.G) is 45 If the IGC temperature limit switch opens within 10 of the end of the gas heat cycle, the next fan off delay will beextended by 15seconds. Then_axinmm delayis 3 Once modified by the IGC, to the configured minutes. the fan off delay will not change Fan-off Delay, Gas (Configuration--,HEAT--,FOD.G) control. unless power is reset back Heat to the A light emitting diode (LED) is provided on the IGC to indicate status. During normal operation the LED is continuously on. See the Troubleshooting section if the LED is off or flashing. The IGC is located behind the gas section access panel door. See Figure 8 or 9 for location. The 48/50PD unit cooling and heating unnecessary (Operating cooling The unit control will switch automatically between to maintain space temperature. To nfininfize changes there is a 10 nfinute Mode Select Timeguard Modes'--,HEAT--,MS.TG) after the last stage of turns off and before the heating tries to maintain the space is allowed. temperature at the Occupied Heat Setpoint (Setpoint--,OHSP) or the Unoccupied Heat Setpoint (Setpoint--,UHSP). See the Occupancy Deternfination section for factors that affect the Currently Status--,VIEW--,OCC) parameter. Heating Modes'--,HEAT--,SPT--,DMDJt) is equal unoccupied set point nfinus Modes'--,HEAT--,SPT--,SPT) Occupied (Run Demand (Operating to the occupied or the Space Temperature (Operating [DMDJt = Setpoint - SPT]. Two methods are used to add and remove stages of heating for 48PD units. The first method causes the unit to operate around its steady state number of stages. For example, if the correct number of stages is between 0 and 1, this method will cause the first stage to cycle. If the correct number of stages is between 1 and 2, this method will cause the second stage to cycle. causes the unit to find the steady-state number these methods The control are provided The second method of stages. Details of below. uses two methods to add a stage of heating. The first method will add a stage of heating when the Heating Demand (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt) plus the change in Spacetemp Trend (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,TRND) times the Heat Thermal Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,H.LAG) Demand [DMD.H Lag Factor (Operating is greater than the SPT Heat method will add a stage of heating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt) SPT Heat Demand Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HT.PD) (+) plus 0.5 HT.PD + 0.5] and the heat demand than 0.3 degrees F per nfinute. The control uses two methods when Heat Demand is greater that the Level degrees is changing to remove (Operating F [DMD.H > at a rate greater a stage of heating. first method will remove a stage of heating when Demand (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt) change in Spacetemp Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,TRND) Trend the Heat times The the Heating plus the (Operating Thermal Lag Factor (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,H.LAG) is less than the SPT Heat Demand (-) Level (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HT_D) [DMDdt + change TRND * H_LAG The < HT_D]. second Demand method (Operating will remove a stage of heating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,DMDdt) when Heat is less that the SPT Heat Demand (-) Level (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HT.ND) nfinus 0.5 degrees F [DMDdt < HT.PD - 0.5] and the heat demand is changing at a rate greater than 0.3 degrees F per nfinute. Temperature Sensor (SAT) Mode Sensing affects the Supply Air value displayed. This configuration is accessible via the Scrolling Marquee Heat Mode Sensing (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATJt). When the SAT (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATJt) Heat on the SAT Mode Sensing =DSBL, the Supply Air Temperature (Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT) value on the Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables will be forced to zero when heat outputs come ON and for 5 nfinutes after. Air Temperature (Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT) fan inlet, upstream of the heat section. When the SAT Heat (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SATdt) Temperature displayed at heating mode. downstream temperature The default Supply location is at the Mode Sensing =ENBL, the Supply Air (Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT) sensor reading is the Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables during This setting should sensor wires are removed replaced by an accessory only be used if the original SAT from the Main Base Board (MBB) and SAT sensor located in the supply duct of the heat section. There are then two supply air limits that become active, the Maximum SAT Lower Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM_L) the Maximum SAT Upper Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM.U). Any time the supply air temperature rises above the Maximum SAT Lower heat staging additional below Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM_L) will be linfited to what is currently on stages can be added until the supply the Maximum SAT (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM.L). temperature rises above the Maximum (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM.U), reduced again by removing until a heat stage. That the Supply and the no air temperature falls Lower Level If the supply air SAT Upper Level then heating will be stage can not be added Air Temperature (Temperatures---,AIR.T---,SAT) falls below the Maximum SAT Lower Level (Configuration---,HEAT---,SAT---,SAM_L). If the supply air temperature stays above the Maximum SAT Upper Level stage (+) Level (Operating Modes---,HEAT---,SPT---,HTaUD) + change TRND * H.LAG > HT.PD]. The second (Operating Supply-Air The SAT Heat (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATJt) Temperature (Temperatures'--,AIR.T--,SAT) (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SAM.U), will be removed after the Heat Stage then another Decrease Time (Configuration---,HEAT---,H_DEC). In heating mode the PD control will maintain the Occupied Heat Set Point (Setpoint--_OHSP) or the Unoccupied Heat Set Point (Setpoint---,UHSP) by turning on or off the Stage I and Stage 2 Gas Heat at the Supply (Configuration---, UNIT---,FS_N). When below Fan Minimum Speed the space temperature sensor detects the space temperature the Occupied Heat Set Point (Setpoint---,OHSP) or Unoccupied Heat Set Point (Setpoint---,UHSP) and power is sent to the Integrated Gas Unit Controller (IGC) board. The heat staging is deternfined as described above and the Integrated Gas Controller (IGC) initiates the gas heat module start-up. Gas Heat Start-Up An LED (light-enfitting diode) on the IGC board will be on during normal operation. A check is made to ensure that the rollout switch and linfit switch are closed and the induced-draft motor is running. The induced-draft motor is then energized, and when speed is proven with the Hall Effect sensor on the motor, the ignition activation period begins. The burners will ignite within 5 seconds. If the burners do not light, there is a 22-second delay before another 5-second attempt. If the burners still do not light, this Configurable delays also apply when adding stages per Heat Stage Increase Time (Configuration---,HEAT---,HdNC) or removing sequence elapsed, stages per Heat (Configuration---,HEAT---,H_DEC). When ignition occurs the IGC board will continue to monitor the condition of the rollout and linfit switches, the Hall Effect sensor, as well as the flame sensor. If for some reason the over temperature (Configuration---,HEAT---,MRTdt) (Configuration---,HEAT---,MOTdt) Stage Heat Decrease Mininmm and Heat Minimum also apply. On Time Time Off Time is repeated for 15 nfinutes. After the 15 nfinutes have if the burners still have not lit, heating is locked out. linfit opens prior to the start of the indoor fan blower, on the next attempt, the 45-second delay will be shortened to 5 seconds less than the time from initiation 21 of heat to when the linfit tripped. Gas willnotbeinterrupted totheburners andheating willcontinue. Oncemodified, thefanondelaywill notchange backto 45 seconds unless power isreset tothecontrol. When theindoor fan turns onafter the40or45second delay theindoor fanwillrunat 100% fanspeed. Supply-Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) The SAT Heat (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATart) Temperature (Temperatures-,AIR.T-,SAT) Mode Sensing affects the Supply Air value displayed. This Gas Heat Staging configuration is accessible via the Scrolling Marquee Heat Mode Sensing (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATart). When additional heat is required, power is supplied to the second stage of the main gas valve. When the space temperature is 0.5F When the SAT (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SATart) above the Unoccupied Temperature (Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT) value on the Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables will be forced to zero when Occupied Heat Set Point (Setpoint-+OHSP) or Heat Set Point (Setpoint-+UHSP) power is removed Heat Mode Sensing =DSBL, the Supply Air from the second stage of the main gas valve and to the IGC Wl terminal. Both stage 1 and stage 2 of the gas valve closes, interrupting the flow of gas to the main burners. heat outputs come ON and for 5 nfinutes after. Air Temperature (Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT) fan inlet, upstream of the heat section. Gas Heat Shut When the SAT Heat (Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SATatI) Down If power to the IGC Wl terminal lasted less than 1 minute, the heating cycle will not ternfinate until 1 nfinute after power is applied to temperature the Wl ternfinal of the IGC board. If the over linfit opens after the indoor motor is stopped within 10 heating mode. This setting sensor wires are removed replaced by an accessory Once modified, the fan off delay will not change back to 45 seconds unless power is reset to the control. A LED indicator is provided on the IGC to monitor operation. The IGC is located in downstream temperature Gas Heat with Economizer When there is a call for heat as described operate at the Supply (Configuration--_UNIT--_FS_X) above the indoor Fan Maximum configuration setting fan will Speed and the econonfizer outdoor air damper will move to the Econ Min at Max Fan Speed (Configuration--_ECON--_MP_X) position. The econonfizer outdoor air damper is closed when the indoor fan is not operating. Mode ENBL, = Sensing Supply the should only be used if the original SAT from the Main Base Board (MBB) and SAT sensor located in the supply duct of the heat section. There are then two supply air limits that become active, the Maximum SAT Lower Level (Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SAM_L) the Maximum SAT Upper Level (Configuration-+HEAT-+SAT-+SAM.U). Any time the supply air temperature rises above the Maximum SAT Lower heat staging on. The default Supply location is at the Air Temperature (Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT) sensor reading is displayed at the Scrolling Marquee and the CCN tables during nfinutes of Wl beconfing inactive, on the next cycle the time will be extended by 15 seconds. The maximum delay is 3 nfinutes. the gas burner section and can be accessed by opening the gas access door. During normal operation, the LED is continuously on the SAT additional below Level (Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SAM_L) will be linfited to what is currently on stages can be added until the supply the Maximum SAT (Configuration-+HEAT-+SAT-+SAM.L). temperature rises above the Maximum (Configuration-+HEAT-+SAT-+SAM.U), reduced again by removing until and the no air temperature falls Lower Level If the supply air SAT Upper Level then heating will be a heat stage. That the Supply stage can not be added Air Temperature (Temperatures-+AIR.T-+SAT) falls below the Maximum SAT Lower Level (Configuration--+HEAT--+SAT--+SAM_L). If the supply air temperature stays above the Maximum SAT Upper Electric Heating Mode Using Space Temperature Sensor T55, T56, or T58 (50PD Units Only) For electric heat units with factory installed electric heat, the Type of Heat Installed (Configuration--,HEAT--,HT.T¥) will be factory set to a value of 2 and the Number of Heat Stages (Configuration--,HEAT--,N.HTR) will be factory set to match the installed heater. If electric heat is installed in the field the value for Number of Heat Stages (Configuration-+HEAT-+N.HTR) be changed to match the number of heat stages installed. must Level stage (Configuration--,HEAT--,SAT--,SAM.U), will be removed after the Heat Stage then another Decrease Time (Configuration--+HEAT--+H39EC). Temperature Compensated Start This logic is used when the unit is in the unoccupied state. The control will calculate early Start Bias time based on Space Temperature deviation from the occupied cooling and heating set Heat will not operate if the outdoor temperature is greater that the value configured for the Heating Lockout Temperature (Configuration-+HEAT-+HT_LO), Heat Minimum On Time points. This will allow the control to start the unit so that the space is at conditioned levels when the occupied period starts. This is (Configuration-+HEAT-+MRTJt) (Configuration-+HEAT-+MOT.H). Setting Up the System stages of heating. nfinutes OFF. Factory and Heat Minimum Off Time Timeguards apply to both defaults values are 2 minute s ON and 2 required Fan-off Delay, 30 seconds. Elect Heat by Fan-off The Delay, factory Elect default for temperature compensated local display under ITEM Heat for (Configuration--+HEAT--+FOD_E) is 90.1 compliance. The settings If the indoor fan control is configured to cycle with the heating demand by setting Fan ON When Occupied Heat Minimum On Time (Configuration-+UNIT--.OC.FN) to NO, the fan will stop after a delay configured (Configuration-+HEAT-+FOD.E). for ASHRAE start can be found in the Configuration-+UNIT. EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN POINT TCS.C Temp.Cmp.Strt.Cool Factr 0 - 60 min TCSTCOOL TCS.H Temp.Cmp.Strt.Heat Factr 0 - 60 min TCSTHEAT Temp Comp Strt Cool Factr (TCS.C) This is the factor for the start time bias equation for cooling. The electronic control uses information from the space sensor deternfine the number of heat stages required. Once the number stages needed for heating (Outputs-+HEAT--,HT.1), (Outputs-+HEAT-+HT.1) is deternfined, either Heat Stage or Heat Stage 1 and Heat Stage 2 (Outputs-+HEAT-+HT.2) Heating Mode Using information. outputs will be turned on. Space Temperature Sensor to of 1 Relay Relay Relay Temp Comp Strt Heat Factr (TCS.H) This is the factor for the start time bias equation for heating. IMPORTANT: Temperature compensated start is disabled when these factors are set to 0. See Gas for more 22 Temperature Compensated Start Logic The following conditions • Unit is in unoccupied • Next occupied • Current CCN Broadcast nmst be met for the algorithm state. time is valid. Schedule time of day is valid. • Valid space temperature reading is available (sensor Acknowledger (BROD-->B.ACK) If this configuration is set to ON, then when any broadcasting is done on the bus, this device will respond to and acknowledge. Only one device per bus can be configured for this option. to run: Number (SCH.O-->SCH.N) This configuration determines follow. or CCN what schedule the control may network). The algorithm will calculate following equations: If (space temperature Start Bias Time point)* TCS.C If (space > occupied -- (space temperature Start Bias temperature)* a Start Bias time in nfinutes The control is ahvays occupied. SCH.N = 1 The control follows its internal time schedules. The user may enter any number between 1 and 64 but it will - occupied heating (occupied SCH.N = 0 set point) temperature < occupied Time = TCS Jt cooling using the cooling set be overwritten to "1" by the control as it only has one internal schedule. set point) heating set SCH.N point - = 65-99 The control is either set up to receive to a broadcasted time schedule set to this number or the space control is set up to broadcast its internal time schedule (B.GS) to the network and this is the global schedule number it is broadcasting. If this is the case, then the control still follows its internal time schedules. When the Start Bias Time is greater than zero the algorithm will subtract it from the next occupied time to calculate the new start time. When Compensated the new start time is reached, the Temperature Start mode is set, the fan is started and the unit controlled as in an occupied state. Once set, Temperature Compensated mode will stay on until the unit goes into the Occupied mode. The Start Bias Time will be written into the CCN Linkage Equipment Table if the unit is controlled in DAV mode. If the Unoccupied Economizer Free Cool mode is active when temperature compensated mode will be stopped. IMPORTANT: start begins, The maximum Carrier Comfort Configuration It is possible minutes Network to configure the Unoccupied Free Cool Start Bias can be is 180. (CCN)® the ComfortLink T,_control to participate as an element of the Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) system directly from the local display. This section will deal with explaining the various programmable options which are found under the CCN sub-menu in the Configuration The maior configurations local displays CCN at Configuration---,CCN. Address is the CCN address Address Baud the rooftop A. is assigned. Rate (BAUD) Time/Date Broadcast (BROD-->B.TIM) device is on a CCN network then it will be important to make sure that only one device on the bus has this configuration more than one time broadcaster is present, problems will occur. set to ON. If with the time daylight alone, Only savings the user daylight/savings CCN OAT may want Global If this can perform Even if the rooftop to set this is stand to ON to accomplish the traction. Broadcast If this configuration broadcast nfinutes. the time and date broadcaster time adjustments. (BROD-->B.OAT) is set to ON, its outside-air Schedule configuration temperature Broadcast is set the control will periodically at a rate of once every 30 ON and the (SCH.N) is between 65 and 99, then the control internal time schedule once every 2 nfinutes. Time Limit (SCH.O--,OV.TL) This configuration allows occurs when it is initiated. the user to decide how long an override The override may be configured from 1 to 4 hours. If the time become disabled. is set to 0, the Timed Override removing SPT Override function will Hours (SCH.O-->OV.EX) This displays the current number of hours possible to cancel an override in progress thereby override the override Enabled? left in an override. It is by writing "0" to this time left. (SCH.O---'OV.SP) If a space sensor is present, unoccupied T56 sensor. period by pushing the override button on the T55 or This option allows the user to disable this flmction by this configuration then it is possible to override an to NO. Limit Linfit Control may override the cooling algorithm to linfit control the amount of power that a machine will use. This can save the owner money by linfiting peaks in the power supply. Demand linfit control is intended to interface with an external network system. This is through to network points. a CCN Loadshed POC Device To linfit stages through network writes, the points ---,COOL---,MAX.C and Run Status---,HEAT---,MAXJI on the network through MAXHSTGS respectively. or writing Run Status are forced CCN points MAX_CAPC and Force these to the desired maximum cooling/dehumidification capacity and the maximum heating stages, respectively. When there is no force on these points, they automatically reset to allow fltll cooling/dehumidification capacity and all heating power-on/reset stages to be used. These points are reset at (POR). When using the Loadshed POC to do Demand Limiting, the cool capacity and heat stage limits under both Redline and Loadshed (BROD--,B.GS) to to from the broadcast or reduce cooling capacity during run time. The term Demand Linfit Control refers to the restriction of machine capacity to rate. If this configuration is set to ON, the control will periodically send the time and date out onto the CCN bus once a minute. If this IMPORTANT: Override Demand is the CCN baud the time on the bus, it is possible message. Demand is assigned. is broadcasting (SCH.O-->HOL.G) accept the time yet not accept the global holiday setting is the CCN bus the rooftop This configuration CCN in the (CCN.B) This configuration CCN See Appendix If a device variable, are located (CCN.A) This configuration CCN mode. for CCN programming Accept Global Holidays? schedule number will broadcast the conditions can be set individually the active stages are greater with configuration decisions. If then the loadshed or redline configurations when a loadshed or redline command unit will reduce capacity or remove stages. The points can be found in Configuration---,CCN---,LDS. 23 is given, the configuration Loadshed Group Number before (S.GRP) This corresponds to the loadshed supervisory devices that reside elsewhere on the CCN network and broadcast loadshed and redline commands to its associated equipment parts. This variable will default to zero which is an invalid group number. This allows the loadshed flmction to be disabled until configured. Redline Max Capacity This configuration cooling/dehunfidification loadshed condition. Redline Max Heat Stages the active Max Heat Stages maximum during a (R.MXH) This configuration tells the unit the maximum allowed to be on during a redline condition. Loadshed heating stages (R.MXH This configuration tells the unit the maximum heating stages allowed to be on during a loadshed condition. The two Demand Linfiting methods can be active simultaneously. The lowest cool capacity and heat stage linfits imposed by either method are applied, and these "effective linfits" are shown in the points CAPLIMIT (Run Status--+COOL--+LMT.C) and HSTGLIMT (Run Status--+HEAT--+LMTJt), respectively. In normal running mode, these limits will prevent capacity/stages from being added, or capacity/stages to be removed, as applicable. In test mode, these limits are ignored, and the user may continue to operate at full load. The point MODEDMDL (Run Status--+MODE--+DJ, MT) is used to show if any Demand Limiting is in effect that prevents the unit from operating either cooling or heating at full-capacity. IMPORTANT: MODEDMDL may reflect that staging is NOT limited even though Loadshed is active or the network points are being forced, if the capacity/stage limits in effect are not less than the capacity/stages present in the unit. If a more drastic mode of Demand Limiting is required, the network point HVACDOWN (Run Status--+MODE--+HV.DN) can be used to prohibit the unit from selecting any HVAC mode, thus preventing the operation of the supply fan, compressors, condenser fans, and heat stages. This point must also be forced, and is reset automatically when not forced, and at POR. Alarm CCN Alarm The response of the control system to various alerts and alarms depends on the seriousness of the particular alert or alarm. In the mildest case, an alert does not affect the operation of the unit in any manner. An alert can also cause a "strike." A "striking" alert will cause the circuit to shut down for 15 minutes. This feature reduces the likelihood of false alarms causing a properly working system to be shut down incorrectly. If three strikes occur before the circuit has an opportunity to show that it can flmction properly, the circuit will strike out, causing the shutdown alarm for that particular circuit. Once activated, the shutdown alarm can only be cleared via an alarm reset. However, circuits with strikes will be given an opportunity to reset their strike counter to zero. As discussed above, a strike typically causes the circuit to shut down. Fifteen nfinutes later, that circuit will once again be allowed to run. If the circuit is able to run for 1 nfinute, its replacement circuit will be allowed to shut down (if not required to run to satisfy requested stages). However, the "troubled" circuit must run continuously for a user defined time (Configuration-+COOL-+RST.C) with no detectable problems will be reset to zero. Default value is 5 Broadcast Strike (Configuration--+COOL--+ALM.N ALM_NOW on CCN) to YES to broadcast Set Alert Each Strike to NO to broadcast Alert Each Strike configuration is ignored all alerts are broadcast. on display, each circuit strike alert. only circuit shut down. during Service Test and Alarm Relay Output The alarm relay output is a normally open 24 vac output between field connection terminal board terminals C and X. Selection of which may alerts and alarms will result in closing of the alarm relay be set in the Alarm Relay Configuration (Configuration--,ALM.O). result in the alarm output Setting a configuration to YES will relay, ALRM, status of ON and 24 vac between C and X when that particular condition is in an alarm state. Setting a configuration to NO will result in no action by the alarm output relay for that particular condition. IMPORTANT: An accessory the alarm relay output filter switch can be used along with function to indicate See the Troubleshooting section diagnosing, alerts and alarms. and clearing dirty filter service for more information need. on viewing, TROUBLESHOOTING The Scrolling Marquee display shows the actual operating conditions of the unit while it is running. If there are alarms or there have been alarms, they will be displayed in either the current alarm list or the history alarm list. (See Table 8.) The Service Test mode allows proper operation of the compressors, fans, and other components to be checked while the unit is not operating. See Service Test. Complete Unit Stoppage There are several conditions heating or cooling: that can cause the unit not to provide • If an alarm is active which causes the unit to shut down, diagnose Handling There are a variety of different alerts and alarms in the system. Alerts are indicated by TXXX (where XXX is the alert number) on the display and generally signify that the improperly functioning circuit can restart without human interaction. If an alarm occurs, indicated by AXXX (where XXX is the alarm number), the damaged circuit will generally not restart without an alarm reset via the Scrolling Marquee display or CCN. counter Operators of CCN networks nfight not want to be notified of "striking" alerts for refrigerant circuits until the circuit has been shut down due to 3 strikes. Set the cooling configuration of Alert Each (R.MXC) tells the unit capacity allowed the strike nfinutes. the problem and Alerts section • Cooling and heating • Programmed using the information provided loads are satisfied. occupancy schedule. • General power failure. • Tripped CB1 or CB2 (24-volt transformer circuit breakers). • Unit is turned off through the CCN network. • If outdoor-air is less than the Compressor temperature Temperature (CA.LO) • If outdoor-air Restart configuration temperature Temperature in Alarms below. (HT_LO) value, is greater than the Heating configuration value, Lockout unit cannot cool. Lockout unit cannot heat. Procedure Before attempting to restart the machine, check the alarm list to determine the cause of the shut down. If the shutdown alarm for a particular control function has occurred, deternfine and correct the cause before allowing the unit to run under its own control again. When there is problem, Test mode. The alarms can operate Control the unit should be diagnosed in Service nmst be reset before the control function in either Normal Module mode or Service Test mode. Communication Red LED Proper operation of the MBB, ECB and AUX1 control boards can be visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs. When operating correctly, the red status LEDs should blink in unison at a rate 24 of once every 2 seconds. If the red LED on the ECB and AUXIis notblinking, checktheDIPswitch positions onthe board, If theredLEDsarenotblinkingin unison, verifythat correct power is beingsupplied toallmodules, A blinking red LEDattherateofoncepersecond means thatsoftware is not loaded ontheboard, Also,besure thattheboard issupplied with thecurrent software, If necessary, reload current software, Aboard LEDthatislit continuously should bereplaced, Green LED The MBB, Equipment whenever power is on, If LEN LED is not blinking, check LEN connections for potential communication errors (MBB J3, J4, and communication directly to the Scrolling Marquee Table Device Starting 4702N Prior to 0803N ECB Presence Marquee The J5 and CCN Pins 2 to 3 Pins 5 to 7 Pins 5 to 6 Pins 6 to 7 15K C_ J5 18.9K Q J5 7.5K Q J5 7.5K C_ J5 9.9K Q J5 - - J2 7.5K C_ J3, J4, & J5 9.9K Q J3, J4, & J5 5K 0 J2 18.9K Q J2 9.9K Q J2 9.9K 0 J2 29K 0 J9 16K Q J9 13.5K Q J9 values should J3, J4, & J5 9.9K £-2 J3, J4, & J5 5.2K £-._ be read when the board Unit Alarms menu locations All Current Alarm unit (Currently Active read correctly before power off off (Alarm Use the ENTER key, then scroll through any alarm numbers which of the nine codes are present. this time. using alerts AI Safety When the DSC's to Power cycle will alarm clears, this clear. Trip that Current Sensing The unit does not support Change (DSC) LED diagnostic the CS.A1 AI (CS.AI) has been the use of a current sensor to disable at and this alert will clear and not return. • Compressor in enabled. this time. -+CS.41) AI Current This Alert indicates The description for an alarm can be viewed on the Scrolling Marquee display by pressing ESCAPE and ENTER keys sinmltaneously while displaying the alarm code number. Be sure to for each code, because in some cases there are descriptions and causes for the same code Refer to the DSC's LED code. (Configuration-+COOL are displayed Scroll Controller determine enabled. History) alarms are three test mode Board Alarm its alarm relay. • Compressor Use the ENTER key, then scroll through any alarm numbers using the up and down arrow keys. Alarms are displayed in numerical order. expand description different possible number. Control This Alert indicates Alarms-->HIST There have corresponding energizes clear the DSC's unit power Causes troubleshooting. • Digital Compressor Alarms) the up and down arrow keys. Up to 20 order of occurrence, with time and date. Possible texts for this alert code. alerts, two of which alert will automatically Turning and This alert occurs when the Digital will not reset the alarm history. Alarms-->CURR Codes out. indicated with "Service Test" in the expanded text. Pressing enter and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T051 alert will show you one of the below alerts. Make sure the expanded text is History) to YES to reset the alarm history. Alarm - T051 are 5 different different Alarms) Change to YES to reset all active alarms. Turning will also reset all current alarms. Change There are used for the local display: (Reset 9.9K £-2 J5 off and the unit is locked Alert Code Alarm Output terminals. Each alarm may also be broadcast on the CCN network. Active alarms and past alarm history can be reviewed and cleared via the local display or a CCN device. The (Reset is powered Diagnostic of active alarms will be indicated on the Scrolling display by the Alarm Status light turning on and by the Alarms-->R.HIST (CCN) Resistance between Pins/ Connector 7.5K _2 and Alerts Alarms-->R.CURR Resistances Pins 1 to 2 number of active alarms being displayed in the automatic View of Run Status. Presence of active alarms may also be signaled on the following Communication 15K C_ J3, J4, & J5 18.9K Q J3, J4, & J5 5.9K 0 J2 AUX1 Viewing and Clearing Failures Pins 1 to 3 Starting 0803N Alarms LEN Communication Connector MBB The resistive 71 The MBB has one yellow LED which is used to indicate CCN communication activity. The Carrier Comfort Network@ (CCN) LED will blink during times of network communication. (LEN) Resistance between Pins/ Board Serial Number Prior to 4702N IMPORTANT: by a 3-wire to module, power and display, a LEN interface at the field If the Scrolling Marquee or Navigator display Conmmnication Failure or the green or yellow LED's do not flash on the boards then the problem could be the communication chip on one of the control boards (MBB, ECB or AUX1). Use an ohm meter to measure the resistance on the communication pins of the boards to determine if the board is bad. If the reading is less than half the value indicated in Table 7, then the board needs to be replaced. ECB and AUX1 each have one green LED, The Local Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking J5), Communication between modules is accomplished sensor bus, These 3 wires run in parallel from module The J4 connector on the MBB also provides both connector on the MBB provides connection ternfinal (TB). Yellow LED Detected that Current After Turnoff Sensing The unit does not support Change the CS.AI A1 (CS.A1) the use of a current to disable has been sensor at and this alert will clear and not return. (Con figuration--,COOL--,CS.41) Alert Code Temperature T064 This alert occurs 240°F 25 - Circuit Thermistor A Saturated Condensing Failure when the temperature is outside (-40 ° to 116°C). When this occurs, the range -40 ° to the control will use only the outdoor temperature to control the outdoor fans. If both the SCT and OAT fail, then circuit shutdown alarm will occur also. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Code T066 - Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature Thermistor Failure This alert occurs when the unit's suction transducers are turned off internally. Cooling will not operate. This is usually due to a network force on a non exposed CCN point. Reload factory defaults or reinstall software on the MBB. Consult the network manager if alert continues. Alert Code T073 - Outdoor Failure Air Temperature Thermistor this time. Change not return. the CS.A1 to disable and this alert will clear and (Con figuration--+COOL--+CS_41) Alert Code Tll0 - Circuit This alert has "Service A Loss of Charge Test" text that will be displayed if the alert occurred during service test. This alert occurs when the compressor is OFF and the suction pressure is less than 5 psig and OAT is greater than -5°F for I continuous minute. Use the Scrolling Marquee to reset the alert. The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant pressure or a faulty suction pressure. This alert only occurs when the compressor is OFF because the low refrigerant pressure alarms (alert T133) handle this situation when the compressor is operating. This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to 240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). For all units, all ambient temperature lockout linfits for cooling and heating are ignored. For all units, if both SCT and OAT fail, then circuit shutdown alarm will also occur. For econonfizer equipped units, the econonfizer will not operate to provide cooling. The econonfizer will still operate for ventilation. The control will use condenser temperatures for outdoor fan control. For units with CCH crankcase heat relay control, the crankcase heat relay will be turned on if any compressor is off. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Alert Code T074 - Space Temperature (converted from the suction pressure) is less than configured suction control levels, Configuration-+COOL-+SST-+SST.1 Thermistor Failure This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to 240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). Cooling and heating will not operate. For econonfizer equipped units, the econonfizer will still operate for ventilation. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thernfistor in the T-55, T-56, or T-58 device, a shorted or open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Code T075 - Supply Air Temperature Failure Thermistor This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to 240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). Econonfizer cooling and compressor operation cannot occur while this alert is active. The unit will not be allowed to enter cooling mode. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Code T076 - Return Air Thermistor Failure This alert occurs when the temperature is outside the range -40 ° to 240°F (-40 ° to 116°C). Differential dry bulb crossover control can not occur. Free cooling can only be controlled by the OAT and enthalpy. This alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thernfistor, a shorted or open thernfistor caused by a wiring error, or a loose connection. Alert Code T077 - Space Relative Humidity Sensor Failure Code T126 - Circuit A High Discharge Pressure This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert occurred during service test. This alert occurs when alert T051 is active while the appropriate condensing 150°F. This alert reset automatically. temperature The cause is greater than of the alert is usually an overcharged system, high outdoor ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure Alert Code switch. T133 See Alert T051 - Circuit This alert has "Service occurred during compressor is for diagnostic A Low Refrigerant procedure. Pressure Test" text that will be displayed service operating test. and This the if the alert alert occurs when the evaporating temperature low (Low Suction - Level 1) or SST.2 (Low Suction - Level 2) or SST.3 (Low Suction Level 3). The circuit SST value must be less than SST.I (for 5 nfinutes), SST.2 (for 4 nfinutes), or SST.3 (for 3 minutes when using the economizer and 1.5 minutes when not using the econonfizer) for the alert to occur. When the outdoor temperature is less than 40°F, the above values are reduced I°F for every 2°F the OAT is below 40°F. An alert will also occur if the circuit SST value is less than SST.3 -5°F for 20 seconds and the outdoor temperature is above 40°F. All the above timers will reset if the suction temperature rises above SST.O for I nfinute. This alert causes a strike for the respective circuit. This alert will activate when the coil becomes frosted. However, during the 15-nfinute reset period, the coils will thaw and strike should clear and restart if there is nothing else wrong with the circuit. The alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan operating backwards, loose or broken belt, plugged filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient temperature is low. Alert Code T143 - Circuit A Failure to Pressurize This alert has "Service Test" text that will be displayed if the alert occurred during service test. This alert occurs when the compressor turns on and the difference between suction and This alert occurs when the input is less than 3.5 mA and the sensor is configured as installed. If a hunfidistat is not installed, then dehunfidification will not be functional. Check sensor and wiring. This alert clears automatically. discharge IMPORTANT: An ECB must be installed to use the space relative hunfidity sensor. Alert Code T092 - Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure strike for the respective circuit. The alert resets automatically. The cause of the alert is usually compressor wiring causing reverse rotation or a faulty compressor. This alert occurs when the transducer voltage. A circuit Use the Scrolling Marquee to is usually a faulty transducer, connection. board does not properly read the cannot run when this alert is active. reset the alarm. The cause of the alert faulty 5-v power supply, or a loose Alert Code T102 - Compressor A1 Current Sensor Failure This Alert indicates that Current Sensing A1 (CS.A1) has been enabled. The unit does not support the use of a current sensor at pressure is less then the Ckt A Minimum Pressure (Configuration-+COOL-+SST-+PSIJ)). The pressure difference must be greater then PSI.D (default is 20 psi) after 60 seconds and stay above it while running the compressor. This alert causes a Alert Code T153 This alert occurs - Real Time when Clock the RTC Hardware clock Failure chip on the MBB is not responding. Time and date functions will not operate, such as local occupancy schedules. The unit will default to 24/7 unoccupied mode. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the control and reconfiguring and date should be tried before board replacement. Alarm Code A154 - Serial EEPROM Hardware the time Failure The unit will completely shut down. The serial EEPROM chip on the MBB, which stores the unit's configuration, is not responding. 26 Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling the power to the control should be tried before board replacement. found Alarm Code T155 - Serial EEPROM Alert Code Storage Failure Error at variable Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.SW. Verify that the configuration is set correct, verify the wiring This alarm resets automatically. T408 and auxiliary device. - Dirty Air Filter Configuration data in the serial EEPROM chip can not be verified. The unit will run to last know good values or defaults, and therefore operating errors may occur. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the control and reconfiguring the control points should be tried before board replacement. This alert occurs when the Filter Status switch senses a plugged filter for 120 continuous seconds after the indoor fan has been Alarm Code A156 - Critical Serial EEPROM Error configuration is set correct and verify the wiring and filter status switch. The hose should be connected to the low side of the switch. Storage Fail The unit will completely shut down. Critical configuration data in the serial EEPROM chip can not be verified. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the control and reconfiguring the critical control points should be tried before board replacement. There are no critical configurations in the 48/50PD. Alert Code A157 - A/D Hardware Failure running for 10 seconds. Because the Dirty Air Filter switch can be configured normally opened or closed, the switch might be open or closed. The configuration for this switch variable Configuration-+UNIT--,FL.SW. This alert resets Alert Code you one of the below alerts. Make correctly before troubleshooting. • Fan Status Switch sure the expanded On, Fan Contactor Off indoor fan has been on for 10 seconds feedback has determined Because or closed, configuration be off. normally the switch might be open or closed. and fan status switch. The hose to the high side of the switch. If the IDF is to shut down the unit when this alarm occurs (Configuration-+UNIT-+IDF.F only be reset manually not configured = YES), then this alarm can and the unit is shut down. If the IDF is to shut the unit down when this alarm occurs (IDF.F = NO), then this alarm resets automatically specific control Off, Fan Contactor On This alert occurs when the fan status switch indoor fan has been off for 10 seconds feedback has determined that the indoor the Fan Status switch opened or closed, configuration has sensed that the and the indoor fan should can be configured Verify the wiring Alarm Code A200 - Linkage Timeout - Comm Failure This alarm occurs when the MBB fails to communicate with a Linkage device. This only occurs when the MBB has previously conmmnicated with a Linkage device since last power cycle. If a back up sensor was not installed the T074 alert will occur shortly after this one. Reset power to the unit and verify Linkage is communicating. Alarm Code A404 - Fire Shutdown (IDF.F = NO), then this alert resets automatically be connected and fan status switch. The hose to the high side of the switch. If the IDF is to shut down the unit down when this alert occurs (Configuration-+UNIT-+IDF.F only be reset manually not configured Alert The Verify that the configuration This alert occurs when the ECB cannot conmmnicate with the Belimo Actuator. If the analog signal is connected properly, the economizer will still be controlled through it. This is usually caused by a wiring problem, actuator failure, or the wrong actuator. Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, make sure the actuator is a MFT conmmnication actuator, and verify the feedback signal from the actuator is correct. control normally for this switch input can be found at is set correctly. configured fan be on. the switch might be open or closed. Configuration-+UNIT-+FN.SW. should and no action is taken. • Fan Status Switch Because The Verify that the configuration Verify the wiring be connected configured that the fan for this switch input can be found at is set correctly. should fan should can be configured Configuration-+UNIT-+FN.SW. This alert occurs when the MBB cannot conmmnicate with the AUX1 board. Unit operation will be disabled. This is usually caused by a wiring problem. Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, check that the AUX1 address is correct, and verify the resistance between pins on the LEN connections. Alert Code T179 - Loss of Communication with the Economizer Control Board and the indoor that the indoor the Fan Status switch opened with the Capacity This alarm occurs when the shutdown input is either open or closed depending upon its configuration. This alarm is usually caused by an auxiliary device that is trying to shut down the unit, e.g., smoke detector. The configuration for this switch input can be text is read This alarm occurs when the fan status switch has sensed This alarm occurs when a circuit has 3 strikes. Use the Scrolling Marquee display to reset the alarm. Investigate the alarm that caused the strikes to occur. This alert occurs when the MBB cannot conmmnicate with the ECB. Economizer operation will be disabled. This is usually caused by a wiring problem. If a relative humidity sensor is installed and configured but there is not an ECB installed on the unit, this alert will be generated (the ECB is required for RH sensor operation). Investigate using the Low Voltage Schematic, check that the ECB address is correct, and verify the resistance between pins on the LEN connections. Alert Code T180 - Loss of Communication with the Economizer Actuator automatically. T409 There are 2 different texts for this alert code. Pressing enter and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T409 alert will show The unit will completely shut down. The analog to digital conversion chip on the MBB has failed. Recovery is automatic but MBB board replacement may be necessary. Cycling power to the control should be tried before board replacement. Alert Code A163 - Circuit A Down due to Failure Alert Code T178 - Loss of Communication Control Board input can be found at Verify that the = YES), then this alarm can and the unit is shut down. If the IDF is to shut the unit down when this alert occurs and no specific action is taken. Code T414 There are 6 different alerts under this one alert code. Pressing enter and esc on the marquee or navigator to expand the T414 alert will show you one of the below alerts. All these alerts are generated by the Belimo actuator and reported to the ECB. These occur if the ECB is controlling the actuator digitally • Economizer Damper Actuator Out of Calibration This alert occurs when the economizer 27 alerts can only through MFT. actuator reports angle (Operating Modes-+ECON-+C_4NG) minimum angle (Configuration-+ECON-+M_4NG). control a control less than the Initiate economizer using the Service calibration (Service Test--,INDP--, Test menu. The economizer procedure will try to find new maximum positions. If the alert does not clear automatically calibration procedure economizer rotation. is complete, clamp. clamp, open and closed investigate return the damper), and while pushing • Economizer the damper changing after the Damper Actuator longer the • Economizer to determine what is increasing actuator is the correct Load Limit load is too high. damper load and verify This alert resets damper that the position is powered with no signal for (may have to wait If the alert continues, determine if the is bad. This alert resets automatically. Damper move. Investigate Investigate size for the unit. Excessively The stop jog ration must be less than 21% than a few hours). ECB or actuator the closed tighten too rapidly. Stuck or Jammed This alarm occurs when the actuator Torque Above This alert occurs when the actuator Hunting a few hours to allow the ratio to decrease but This alert resets automatically. Economizer Actuator to clear this alert. Leave the actuator what is limiting loosen Damper This alert occurs when the commanded After that step, run another calibration, first power off unit (spring actuator E.CAL) calibration what is stopping senses it can no longer the rotation of the actuator and fix. This alert resets automatically. • Economizer Damper Actuator Mechanical This alert occurs when the actuator automatically. Investigate actuator Failure senses a catastrophic and replace if necessary. failure. This alert resets automatically. • Economizer Damper Actuator Direction Switch Wrong Position direction switch This alert occurs when the economizer damper is in the wrong switch should clockwise position. position The direction and the actuator the CW face of the actuator should be mounted is accessible. Correct be in the so that if necessary. This alert clears automatically. Alert Code T415 - IAQ Input Out of Range This alert occurs when the IAQ input (on ECB) is less than 3.5 mA and the sensor is configured as installed. IAQ operation will be disabled. Alert Code Check sensor and wiring. T416 - OAQ Input This alert clears automatically. Out of Range This alert occurs when the OAQ input (on ECB) is less than 3.5 mA and the sensor is configured as installed. OAQ operation will be disabled. Check sensor and wiring. This alert clears automatically, 28 Table 8 -ALARM OR ALERT NUMBER DESCRIPTION Digital Compressor Compressor T051 A1 Safety Trip Service Test - Compressor A1 Safety Trip T066 Circuit A Saturated Condensing Temp Thermistor Failure Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature Thermistor Failure T073 Outdoor Air Temperature T074 Space Temperature T075 Supply Air Temperature T076 Return Air Thermistor T077 Space Relative Humidity Sensor Failure T092 Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure Thermistor Thermistor Thermistor Failure Failure T102 Compressor Tl10 Circuit A Loss of Charge Service Test - Circuit A Loss of Charge A1 Current Sensor Failure Codes RESET METHOD No action Automatic Add Strike for Circuit A Automatic Add Strike for Circuit A Automatic Turn off all compressors Turn off all Automatic Automatic compressors Use OAT to control Outdoor fans See the DSC's LEDs for troubleshooting Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and should be off Current should Current should Current should Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and be off Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and be off Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and be off Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor error or loose connection. caused by wiring Automatic Suction transducers Automatic Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor error or loose connection. caused by wiring No heating or cooling Automatic caused by wiring No cooling mode Automatic Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor error or loose connection. Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor error or loose connection. Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor error or loose connection. No Cooling No differential DB crossover If RH.S = Yes, then no indoor humidity control Shutdown Circuit A Automatic Automatic Manual If CS.A1 = Enable, then no T051 current alarm Shutdown Circuit A Shutdown Circuit A Automatic Manual Manual internally forced inactive caused by wiring caused by wiring Faulty, shorted, or open sensor caused by wiring error or loose connection. Faulty transducer, faulty 5-V power supply, or loose connection Current Sensing turned on (CS.A1 = Enable) and should be off Add Strike for Circuit A Automatic Service Test - Circuit A Low Refrigerant Pressure Add Strike for Circuit A Automatic Circuit Add Strike for Circuit A Automatic Low refrigerant or faulty suction pressure transducer Low refrigerant or faulty suction pressure transducer An overcharged system, high outdoor ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure switch. An overcharged system, high outdoor ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil, plugged filter drier, or a faulty high-pressure switch. Low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan turning backwards, loose or broken fan belt, plugged filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient temperature is low. Low refrigerant charge, dirty filters, evaporator fan turning backwards, loose or broken fan belt, plugged filter drier, faulty transducer, excessively cold return air, or stuck open economizer when the ambient temperature is low. Wiring causing reverse rotation or faulty compressor Add Strike for Circuit A Automatic Wiring causing Circuit A High Discharge Pressure Service Test - Circuit A High Discharge Pressure Circuit A Low Refrigerant Shutdown Circuit A Automatic Shutdown Circuit A Automatic Pressure T133 A Failure Service Test - To Pressurize Circuit A Failure To Pressurize T153 Real Timeclock Hardware Failure A154 T155 A156 A157 Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure Serial EEPRQM Storage Critical Serial A/D Hardware Circuit A163 CAUSE Automatic T126 T143 PROBABLE No cooling with economizer Failure Failure T_,Alarm ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL Control Board Alarm Compressor A1 Current Detected After Turnoff Service Test - Compressor A1 Current Detected After Turnoff T064 ComfortLink Service EEPRQM Failure A Down Test - Failure Storage No time A Down date Automatic schedule operation Unit Shutdown Error Fail Error Due to Failure Circuit and Due to Unit Automatic operation errors Unit Shutdown Unit Shutdown Shutdown Circuit A Shutdown Circuit A Failure See Legend on next page 29 Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Manual reverse rotation or faulty compressor No time/date configured, software failure, or MBB failure Software failure or MBB failure Software failure or MBB failure Software failure or MBB failure Software failure or MBB failure Circuit has 3 strikes or has been locked out by another alarm Circuit has 1 strike or has been locked out by another alarm Table 8 -ALARM OR ALERT NUMBER DESCRIPTION ComfortLink T_Alarm Codes ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL RESET METHOD (cont) PROBABLE CAUSE T178 Loss of Communication Control Board with the Capacity Unit shutdown -HVAC disable Automatic Communication wiring problem with AUX1 or faulty MBB, ECB, or AUXl T179 with the Economizer Communication wiring problem with ECB or faulty MBB, ECB, or AUXl Automatic A200 A404 T408 Linkage Timeout Fire Shutdown Dirty Filter No economizer operation No economizer operation No Linkage Operation fall back to local SPT Unit Shutdown Alert Generated Automatic T180 Loss of communication Control Board Loss of communication Actuator Communication wiring problem with actuator. Received a table write from Linkage before, now not receiving any linked commands Smoke detected by smoke detector Dirty Filter If IDF.F = Yes, then Unit Shutdown YES, then Manual, otherwise with the Economizer Error - Comm Failure Fan Status Switch ON, Fan Contactor OFF T409 Economizer Calibration Economizer Load Limit Damper Actuator Out of incorrect. Economizer Excessively Damper Actuator Hunting If IDF.F = Yes, then Unit Shutdown Alert Generated YES,Manual,then Tripped Circuit Breaker. Broken otherwise motor. Configuration incorrect. automatic Calibrate economizer (E.CAL). Automatic then determine what is limiting belt. Bad indoor fan Bad fan status switch. Alert Generated Automatic Actuator Alert Generated Automatic Damper position changing Alert Generated Automatic No economizer and actuator. motion. Alert Generated Automatic Check actuator and replace if necessary. Actuator direction control switch (CCW, CW) wrong. Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly. Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly. If problem still exist economizer rotation. Damper Actuator Torque Above Economizer Damper Stuck or Jammed Economizer Failure Damper Actuator Mechanical Economizer Damper Actuator Direction Switch Wrong Alert Generated Automatic T415 IAQ Input Out of Range No IAQ Operations Automatic T416 OAQ Input Out of Range No OAQ Operations Automatic LEGEND ECB - Economizer IGC MBB - Integrated Gas Controller Main Base Board OAT - Outdoor-Air Cooling Bad Fan Status Switch. Configuration automatic If IDF.F = Fan Status Switch OFF, Fan Contactor ON T414 Automatic Automatic Automatic If IDF.F = ControlBoard Thermistor Troubleshooting Use the Scrolling Marquee display or a CCN device to view the cooling status display and the cooling diagnostic display (see Appendix A) for information on the cooling operation. Check the current alarms and alarm history for any cooling alarm codes and correct any causes. (See Table 9.) Verify any unique control configurations per installed site requirements or accessories. If alarms conditions are corrected and cleared, operation of the compressors and fans may be verified by using the Service Test mode. (See Table 5.) See Table 9 for general cooling service analysis. 30 load too high. Check damper load. too quickly. Check damper blades, gears, Table 9-- Cooling Service PROBLEM Compressor Analysis CAUSE REMEDY Power failure. and Fan Will Not Start Fuse blown CB2. or circuit Disconnect off. Compressor breaker tripped. Check CB1 and set point or supply Outdoor too low. temperature Check time guards using ComfortLink_' Marquee also the DSC has a 2 minute set point not Check cooling Marquee. Insufficient line voltage. Active alarm. Compressor Continuously. Unit undersized for load. charge. Recover 2.Replace Recover and refrigerant. and secure tightly and 1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction line and insulate. 2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed. Check belt tension. Check for other restrictions. Insufficient evaporator airflow. Indoor Fan Running to slow or off while compressor is Check VFD display is illuminated and shows Auto mode. Power supplied to VFD. Check O-lOvdc signal present at AUXl board. Reset thermostat or occupancy schedule. on too low in conditioned temperature). to suction TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed. excess refrigerant. Replace air filters. Check pressure, locate leak, repair, evacuate, recharge. charge. Faulty TXV. Temperature return-air excess 1.Check TXV bulb mounting line and insulate. overcharged. Dirty air filters. Low refrigerant Scrolling Fuse blown or plug at motor loose. Check for sources and eliminate High heat load. Faulty TXV. Too Low. if needed. 1.Check TXV bulb mounting and secure tightly to suction line and insulate. 2.Replace TXV (and filter drier) if stuck open or closed. Determine cause and correct. Remove restriction. Condenser air restricted or air short cycling. Restriction in liquid tube. No Power to contactors. Refrigerant Pressure Scrolling Tighten thermistors. Clean coil. Faulty TXV. Suction Check active alarms using ComfortLink Marquee and DSC alert flash codes Decrease load or increase size of unit. Check pressure, locate leak, repair, evacuate, recharge. Clean coil or remove restriction. Dirty condenser coil. Refrigerant overcharge. Condenser Fans Not Operating, Excessive Suction Pressure, Scrolling Check cooling demand using ComfortLink Marquee and DSC alert flash codes. Replace filters. stuck on Condenser coil dirty or restricted. Loose condenser thermistors. Pressures, Check active alarms using ComfortLink Marquee and DSC alert flash codes Determine cause and correct. Compressor contactor time Scrolling using Check and adjust set points Low refrigerant Condenser using ComfortLink Occupancy schedule set point or supply set point too low. Compressor running at lowest capacity Dirty air filters. Excessive demand Scrolling anti-short Check Compressor Lockout Temperature ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee. alarm. Compressor Cycles (other than normally satisfying demand). Operates breaker. Power disconnect. time guard to prevent short cycling. Occupancy schedule calling for Cooling. Active Call power company. Replace fuse or reset circuit area (low LEGEND CB - Circuit Breaker DSC - Digital Scroll Controller TXV - Thermostatic Expansion VFD - X?ariable Frequency Digital Scroll Controller The 48/50PD The compressor units unloader is on desired with a solenoid unloader verses off This direct control have control the power a digital (DSC). This second window. capacity. within means of to the codes and correct LED flash codes. (DSC) Troubleshooting are equipped has digital scroll controller and off within a 20 not 'Calve Drive the 20 the seconds compressor, DSC and but the by unloader of time depends ComfortLink on control it does signal for DSC green, has yellow, unloaded for shutdown to time The When T051 guard DSC this alert. three and a half prevent is applied has LED lights red The a second reverse by an alarm MBB input Check the to DSC on switch LED start rotation. the DSC relay help output during POWER on the 24VAC power terminal. When the 2 minute is active, the green LED will flash. the does however run the up and one A after two that shutting minute second LED (green) -- indicates LED (red) -through a unique on anti-short voltage is present anti-short conmmnicates flash code. All LEDs Flashing at the Same is too low for operation. compressor the compressor is connected the DSC's Red at the cycle timer UNLOADED LED (yellow) -- indicates the unloader solenoid status. The LED is on when the unloader solenoid is energized. ALERT condition commanded troubleshooting; will 10 shows the capacity. The Table compressor. is controlled DSC turns the The amount that that scroll that any problems. All LEDs Controller On Solid failure. at the Same Flash Code 1 -- Reserved Flash Code 2 -- High Rate -- Time -- for future an abnormal indicates 24VAC indicates Digital system supply Scroll use off. to the MBB. is closed, the MBB activates the status on the DSC for flash alarm This occurs 31 Discharge when the discharge Temperature temperature thermistor (DTT) has measured atemperature above 268F(131C)orthethermistor has the system controller providing the signal may not be powered. short circuited (jumpered out). The DSC will de-energize the compressor contactor and unloader TheDSCwillde-energize thecompressor contactor andunloader solenoid and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051 solenoid, andthealarm relaycontacts will close causing aT051 alert on the ComfortLink Control. Once the system controller demand signal input has risen above 0.5VDC, the ALERT code alertontheComfortLink Control. Thecompressor will be allowed torestart after30minute delayandaftertheDTTreads and alarm relay output will reset. If the demand signal is above 1.44VDC and the anti-short cycle timer has timed out, the below 250F(120C).Theflashcode andalarm relay contacts will compressor will restart. bereset afterthecompressor hasrunfor60minutes without any otherALERTs.If five discharge temperature ALERTs have Flash Code 6 -- Discharge Thermistor Fault occurred withinfourhours, theDSCwilllockoutthecompressor. This occurs when the DSC is not receiving a signal from the Thelockout canonlybereset bycycling the24VAC power offand discharge temperature thermistor (DTT). The thermistor may be on. missing, Flash Code 3 -- Compressor Protector Trip This occurs when the demand signal from the system will close and the DSC will not increase the capacity of the compressor beyond 50% loading. This ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset by reconnecting the DTT. controller greater than 1.44VDC and there is no compressor current This could be due to the compressor's internal overload is detected. protector being open, fuse or breaker open, power disconnected to compressor contactor, compressor power wiring not run through DSC current transformer port or a compressor contactor failure. The DSC will de-energize the compressor contactor and unloader solenoid and the alarm relay contacts will close causing a T051 alert on the ComfortLink Control. The DSC will wait for the two minute anti-short controller demand compressor the restart, cycle timer to time out and if the system signal is still greater than 1.44VDC, energize the contactor again. If compressor current the ALERT code and alarm relay output is detected on will reset. The DSC will attempt to restart compressor as long as the controller demand is above 1.44VDC. There is no lockout for this ALERT. Flash Code 4 -- Locked system feature Rotor Flash disconnected Code 7 --Reserved alarm relay ComfortLink contacts will close causing Control. The unloader the 24VAC 5 -- power Demand off and on. Signal the a T051 solenoid alert will on the remain solenoid will de-energize causing the compressor to run loaded. The ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset when current is Flash detected Code 9 -- while system Low 24VAC controller demand signal is below Supply the supply The DSC voltage to the DSC has dropped will de-energize the compressor contactor and unloader solenoid. The alarm relay contacts may close if the voltage is high enough for the alarm relay to pull in. Loss This occurs when the demand signal input has dropped below 0.5VDC. The demand input signal wire may be disconnected or Table LED Flash Code when energized causing the compressor to run unloaded as long as the system controller demand signal is less than 1.44VDC. If the system controller demand is greater than 1.44VDC, the unloader This occurs when below 18.5VDC. Flash Code for future use in this condition since the DSC cannot open the compressor contactor. The DSC will energize the compressor contactor and the contacts Control. cycling relay contacts system controller demand signal is below 1.44VDC. The compressor contactor may have welded contacts or the contacts may be mechanically jammed. The compressor will continue to run no longer 1.44VDC. causing a T051 alert on the ComfortLink results in a lockout and can only be reset by The alarm Flash Code 8 -- Compressor Contactor Fault This occurs when the compressor current is detected A locked rotor condition in the compressor is sensed by the DSC on four consecutive start ups. The DSC will de-energize the compressor contactor and unloader solenoid and the alarm relay will close This code or a wire broken. Description The ALERT code and alarm relay output are reset when the supply voltage to the DSC rises above 19.5VAC. 10 -- DSC Red LED Flash Codes Action Taken by Control Reset Method Probable Cause N/A N/A N/A 1 Flash Reserved for Future Use 2 Flash High Discharge Temperature Compressor shutdown Automatic Compressor discharge temperature degrees F or the DTT is shorted. 3 Flash Compressor Compressor shutdown Automatic Compressor's internal overload protector being open, fuse or breaker open, power disconnected to compressor contactor, compressor power wiring not run through DSC current transformer port or a compressor contactor failure. 4 Flash Locked Rotor Compressor lockout Manual 5 Flash Demand Signal Loss Compressor shutdown Automatic Signal wire may be disconnected or the system controller providing the signal may not be powered 6 Flash Discharge Thermistor Capacity Limited Automatic DTT may be missing, disconnected 7 Flash Reserved for Future Use 8 Flash Compressor 9 Flash Low 24VAC Supply Protector Trip Fault Contactor Fault N/A N/A Four consecutive is greater then 268 start ups with locked rotor. or a wire broken N/A Keep capacity at 15% Automatic Compressor contactor may have welded contacts or the contacts may be mechanically jammed Compressor shutdown Automatic Bad connection 32 or transformer. Economizer Use the unit the economizer display Scrolling Verify codes cleared, operation Service Test of and steps Scrolling Marquee correct how display, Test to See (See Table installed section test the 11 and 11.) site using the Table 5). The using the general using the Serviee 2. Enter needed TEST and turn ON test mode, A in order to turn ON the Service password 3. Return Test main menu on the economizer password The may be default level of Serviee digital the calibration opens Test, complete, M.ANG, 6. Return (Configuration is being implemented 11 -- Economizer PROBLEM Service (as long as 5 the degree of rotation should be greater causing the T414 alert to clear. If the T414 to Serviee the economizer Test-+TEST damper and turn This will cause the unit to return to normal OFF than alert for other test mode, operation, Analysis POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY Indoor Fan is off. Damper Does Not Move. be is the calibration procedure the actuator will then open fully. After the calibration is does not clear, check mechanical problems. Table for and closes. conmmnications procedure minutes). During close fully and is 1111. to the main value positions. To implement the calibration procedure, change E.CAL from OFF to ON. E.CAL will remain ON as long as display. Test, an initial --,ECON--,E.CTL = 1 or 2). The economizer calibration procedure (Serviee Test-,IND.P-,E.CAL) will reconfigure the actuator to the new fully closed and fully open analysis. 1. Enter enter Damper Actuator Out of Calibration" alert will generated. This alert can only occur if the economizer and by economizer for and 5. Because of a mechanical problem with the economizer, the actuator might acquire a new degree of rotation which is less than M.ANG. If this occurs, a "T414 Economizer any are corrected be verified Table for submenu make sure the economizer economizer per conditions may Service specify causes, to view history the INDP ECON. This will drive the economizer damper to the specified position. Continue to adjust the ECON value to diagnostic the alarm configurations If alarms (see on and any device economizer information the economizer mode following the alarms control or accessories. or a CCN and for current unique requirements service A) the alarm any display display Appendix Check economizer Marquee status (see operation, 4. Enter Troubleshooting Check for proper VFD connections. Check that VFD is illuminated and in Auto mode. Unit is not configured for continuous fan operation and there are no cooling or heating demands. Unit is in Unoccupied heating or cooling. mode and there is no call for Tripped circuit breaker. No power to the unit. Unit is off via CCN command. Actuator is unplugged Unit is not configured Outdoor-air temperature high temperature lockout. is above economizer Outdoor-air temperature is below temperature lockout. Communication Damper Economizer to Minimum Operation Position. is Limited at motor or at economizer for economizer. loss to economizer Outdoor-air thermistor Low suction pressure IAQ is controlling Damper Loss. Does Not Return Position. Does Not Close on Power Outdoor Damper Does Not Fully Close at 0% or Fully Open at 100%. Economizer is not a configured minimum position LEGEND CCN Carrier Comfort Network IAQ VFD Indoor Air Quality Variable Frequency Drive board. economizer with a compressor. damper per the Adjust the low temperature lockout setting if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating correctly. Check wiring connections. Identify the obstruction and safely is faulty. problem minimum Unit is in Unoccupied Economizer to Minimum low Minimum position is set incorrectly. Outdoor-air temperature is above economizer high temperature lockout. is below Check wiring connections. Configure unit for economizer instructions. Adjust the high temperature lockout setting if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating correctly. is jammed. Outdoor-air temperature low temperature lockout. Economizer Position is Less Than Minimum Position. economizer board. position. Economizer compressor Adjust the otherwise, Adjust unit otherwise, mode. remove. Adjust minimum position setting. Adjust the high temperature lockout setting if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating correctly. Adjust the low temperature lockout setting if it is incorrect, otherwise, economizer is operating correctly. Replace outdoor-air thermistor. is operating problem. correctly, identify IAQ settings if incorrect, the economizer is operating correctly. occupied schedule if incorrect, economizer is operating correctly. Damper is jammed. Unit is operating under free cooling. Identify the obstruction and safely Economizer is operating correctly. Damper Identify the obstruction and safely remove. Remove actuator, flip it over and re-install. Enter Service Test mode and run the Calibrate Economizer (E.CAL) procedure. is jammed Economizer actuator Unit is operating or spring return is backwards. is out of calibration. under free cooling. Unit fan speed is offsetting the economizer position to maintain proper ventilation. 33 minimum Economizer is operating correctly. Economizer is operating correctly. remove. Heating Use the the unit heating Scrolling status Appendix A) Marquee display for display and the information current alarms correct any causes. configurations per alarms Phase Troubleshooting and conditions on alarm history (See Table installed are corrected stages and indoor mode. (See Table fan may be heating for any heating Verify the codes and control accessories. operation using (see Check unique or and cleared, by alarm any to view display operation. requirements verified device diagnostic the 12.) site or a CCN heating of the If the heat Service Test 5.) Phase Gas Heat (48PD Units Only) See Table service 12 for general analysis the IGC board (See Table of the for any gas heating IGC board flashing service logic. alarm analysis. Check codes the See Fig. status and correct on any causes. 13.) Table 14 for Variable electric heating Frequency service analysis. Drive (VFD) Troubleshooting The VFD must be in "Auto" mode and when commanding it to 100% the voltage signal should be 10vdc across AI1 and AIGND. Verify all parameters are correct to factory defaults. See Appendix B for parameters and additional troubleshooting. Loss Protection LED STATUS On Continuously Phase Loss Protection Blinking The phase loss protection option will monitor the three-phase electrical system to provide phase reversal and phase loss protection. Table PROBLEM Burners Will Not Ignite, Off 12 -- Gas Heating Service Unit is not configured Check heating Marquee. configurations using ComfortLink Active alarm. Check active alarms using ComfortLink_' the IGC alert flash codes. No power to unit. Check power No power to IGC. Heaters off due to time guard to prevent cycling, Check fuses and plugs. Check active alarms using ComfortLink_' the IGC alert flash codes. schedule short set point not calling for supply, fuses, wiring, Check using ComfortLink Scrolling and circuit _' Scrolling _' Scrolling Marquee and breakers. Scrolling Marquee and Marquee. Check gas line for air and purge as necessary. After purging gas line of air, allow gas to dissipate for at least 5 minutes before attempting to re-light unit. Drain water and install drip. Water in gas line. Dirty air filters. Gas input too low. Replace air filters. Check gas pressure the Service section. Occupancy schedule set point set too low. Unit undersized for load. Check setpoints and adjust if necessary. Decrease load or increase of size of unit. Restricted or low airflow. Remove restriction, verify proper fan speed SAT compared to the SAT heating limits. Too much outdoor Check economizer position and configuration. Adjust minimum position if needed using ComfortLink Scrolling Marquee. Verify proper fan speed operation. Check rotation of blower and temperature rise of unit. Adjust as needed. Limit switch Poor Flame Characteristics, Analysis REMEDY for heat. No gas at main burners. Heating, FUNCTION Relay contact closed (normal operation). Relay contact open (phase loss or phase reversal has occurred) - No power will be supplied to the control system. 24 vac control power not present (off). CAUSE Occupancy Heating. Inadequate Protection If the reverse rotation board senses any one of the three phase inputs has no AC voltage, the relay will be de-energized (opening its contact). This protection is always active as long as 24-vac control voltage is applied, and is not affected by the self by-pass flmction of the phase sequence monitoring flmction. However, in the event of phase loss, the relay will be re-energized only if all three phases are restored and the three phases are in the correct sequence. A red LED is provided to indicate the flmction of the board. See the table below. 9 for LED Electric Heat (50PD Units Only) See Reversal If the control senses an incorrect phase relationship, the relay (KI) will be de-energized (opening its contact). If the phase relationship is correct, the relay will be energized. The control has a self-bypass flmction after a pre-set time. If the control determines that the three phases stay in a correct relationship for 10 consecutive minutes, the relay will stay energized regardless of the phase sequence of three inputs as long as 24-vac control voltage is applied. This self-bypass flmction will be reset if all three phases are restored in a phase loss event. cycles air. main burners. Incomplete combustion (lack of combustion air) results in: Aldehyde odors, CO, sooting flame, or floating flame. at manifold. Check all screws around Tighten as necessary. Cracked heat exchanger, Unit is over-fired, reduce pressure. Check vent for restriction. Refer to gas valve adjustment flue outlets operation, and burner and check compartment. replace. input. Adjust Clean as necessary. gas line or manifold Check orifice to burner alignment. Burners Will Not Turn Off, Unit is in Minimum on-time. Check using ComfortLink_' flash codes. Unit running in Service Test mode. Main gas valve stuck. Marquee and the IGC alert Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee. Turn off gas supply and unit power. Replace gas valve. LEGEND IGC SAT Scrolling Integrated Gas Controller Supply Air Temperature 34 in I FLASH _O_FED - INDOOR (HEATING) FAN [_ELAY 2 _S - OF_-NN SW_rCH 3 _ - _ iNE_J_TES FLAME CLOSED GAS OF UME ] FF- SFJV_OR WffH VALVE 4 FL_..S - L_IT SWITCH CYCLED 4 _MES ON CALL FK)R HEAT t-HEATING .{ I 5 _ (No _nJ_n- E_rK3N ',_ t5 L(_r2,KOLrF mW"_tses) _ 'Wf IGC ON FROM - 1 MINUTE BASE CONTROL LOCK-ON BOARD ENERGIZES 'W' ± MOTOR FAULT _nat f_rn _"te I_I _ t I COMBUSTION RELAY ON IGC 18 ENERGIZED Effect 1 t J 7 FLASHES ROLLObq" - OF_F&NG _TCH OF _ _ CORRECT _ TO TE'RM_,L 'Jl' ON 8_-_ FAULT I i 9 FLASHES LOCKOUT - SOFTWARE I [ IGC H_.4HVOLTAGE TRAt,L_F.R CREATES A 'lO,(X_O VO£T SPARK FOR 5 8ECONOS OFF C4.8 VALVE AND SPARK IGC SAFETY LOGIC WILL 8_JT VALVE FOR 5 8_X_ r VHo@ Yes EXCHANGER H_8 8E8_ REDUG_E) DUE TO L_ TRIPS) E_C WILL _ BLOWER 8V_TCH RELAY SUBTRACT 5 _ (C_ ANC/FHER 5 _) FROM FAN ON TIME DELAY Yes (5 N.AS__S OF LED) No .½ LEGEND IDM -- Induced-Draft iGC -- Integrated NOTE: Thermostat "AUTO" position. Motor t Gas Unit Controller Fan Switch _ STOP& SAFETY LOG_ S_ OFF GAS V_ t ] in the (DFJ.AYEXTENDED BY 5 Sa_CON{3_3FOR EACH LIMIT8-'Wff{_._I TRIP 45 SECOND B_OWER IMP'LAY MAXIMUM DELAY: 8H_ 3 MINUTES) (07014 Fig. 9 - IGC Service Analysis 35 Logic Table LED FLASH CODE ACTION TAKEN CONTROL DESCRIPTION On Normal Off Hardware 1 Flash 13 -- Operation IGC Board BY LED RESET Codes METHOD __ Failure Alarm PROBABLE __ No gas heating. __ -- Loss of power to the IGC. Check 5 amp fuse on IGC, power to unit, 24V circuit breaker, transformer, and wiring to the IGC. High temperature limit switch opens during heat exchanger warm-up period before fan-on delay expires. High temperature limit switch opens within 10 minutes of heat call (W) Off. See Limit Switch Fault. Indoor Fan On/Off Delay Modified 5 seconds subtracted from On delay, 5 seconds added to Off delay (3 min max). Power reset. 2 Flashes Limit Switch Gas valve and igniter Off. Indoor fan and inducer On. Limit switch closed, heat call (W) Off. 3 Flashes Flame Sense Fault Indoor fan and inducer On. Flame sense normal. Power reset for LED reset, 4 Flashes Four Consecutive Fault No gas heating. Heat call (W) Off. Power reset for LED reset, 5 Flashes Ignition No gas heating. Heat call (W) Off. Power reset for LED reset. 6 Flashes Induced If heat off: no gas heating. If heat on: gas valve Off and inducer On. Inducer sense normal, heat call (W) Off. 7 Flashes Rol!out Switch Gas valve and igniter Off. Indoor fan and inducer On. Power reset. 8 Flashes Internal No gas heating. Power reset. 9 Flashes Temporary No gas heating. 1 hour auto reset, or 3ower reset, Fault Limit Switch Fault Draft Motor Fault Lockout Control Lockout Software Lockout CAUSE or or High temperature limit switch is open. Check the operation of the indoor (evaporator) fan motor. Ensure that the supply-air temperature rise is within the range on the unit nameplate. Check wiring and limit switch operation. The IGC sensed a flame when the gas valve should be c!osed. Check wiring, flame sensor, and gas valve operation. 4 consecutive limit switch faults within a single call for heat. See Limit Switch Fault. Unit unsuccessfully attempted ignition for 15 minutes. Check igniter and flame sensor electrode spacing, gaps, etc. Check flame sense and igniter wiring. Check gas valve operation and gas supply. Inducer sense On when heat call Off, or inducer sense Off when heat call On. Check wiring, voltage, and operation of IGC motor. Check speed sensor wiring to IGC. Rollout switch has opened. Check gas valve operation. Check induced-draft blower whee! is properly secured to motor shaft. IGC has sensed internal hardware or software error. If fault is not cleared by resetting 24 v power, replace the IGC. Electrical interference is disrupting the IGC software. LEGEND IGC - Integrated LED - Light-Emitting Gas [7nit Control Diode NOTES: 1. There 2. is a 3-second If more 3. Alarm than codes pause one alarm on the IGC between code exists, alarm code displays. all applicable will be lost if power alarm to the unit codes will Table PROBLEM Heat Will Not Turn On. be displayed in numerical 14 -- Electric Heat CAUSE Unit is not configured for heat. Check power supply, fuses, wiring, and circuit breakers. Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee. or minimum Check using ComfortLink Service Test mode off. No 24 vac at heater contactor. Heating. on heater. Check setpoints and adjust if necessary. Decrease load or increase size of heater. outdoor cycles Unit is in minimum Power off unit and remove high voltage resistance of element, replace if open. wires. Check Remove restriction, verify proper fan speed operation, check SAT compared to the SAT heating limits. air. Check economizer position and configuration. minimum position if needed using ComfortLink Marquee. Verify proper fan speed operation. heaters. Check rotation of blower, temperature minimum airflow. Adjust as needed. heat on-time. Check using ComfortLink Check using ComfortLink schedule Turn Check transformer, circuit breaker, auto-reset limit switches on heater, and manual-reset limit switches (LS) on indoor fan housing. Check minimum airflow. Check limit switch when it is cool, replace if not. Occupancy schedule set point set too low. Heat undersized for load. Restricted or low airflow. Occupancy Heating. set point still calling for Unit running in Service Test mode. Heater contactor failed. _' Scrolling _' Scrolling Supply Air Temperature 36 and Adjust _' Scrolling rise of unit, and Marquee. Marquee. Check using ComfortLink _' Scrolling Marquee. Power off unit. Check contactor and replace if closed. LEGEND SAT Marquee. Replace air filters. Limit switch Not Turn Off, _' Scrolling Dirty air filters. Bad heater elements. Too much Heat Will limit switch Analysis REMEDY No power to unit. Unit is in minimum heat off-time, cool- heat changeover time. Heat forced off in Service Test. Open temperature Service Check heating configurations using ComfortLink _ Scrolling Marquee. Check active alarms using ComfortLink T,, Scrolling Marquee. Active alarm. Inadequate sequence. is interrupted. Thermistor Troubleshooting The electronic control uses thermistors to sense temperatures used to control operation of the unit. Resistances at various temperatures are listed in Table 15-17. Thermistor pin connection points are shown in the Maior System Components section. The general locations of the thermistors are shown the Maior System Components section. Air Temperatures Air temperatures are measured with 10 kilo-ohm thermistors. This includes supply-air temperature (SAT), outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature sensors (T55, T56, T58), and return air temperature (RAT). The supply air temperature (SAT), return air temperature (RAT) and outdoor air temperature (OAT) thermistors use a snap-mount to attach through the unit sheet metal panels. The snap-mount tabs must be flattened on the tip end of the sensor to release for removal from the panel. (See Fig. 10.) To reinstall, make sure the snap-mount tabs extend out. (07016 Fig. 11 - Saturated ,, ",,, ! Thermistor/Temperature Condensing Temperature Location Sensor Thermistor Check A high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this check. /\ I ix), Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate thermistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main Base Board (see Maior System Components section). Using the voltage reading obtained, read the sensor temperature from Table 15-17. % ', ','_ \ _d,',,/ \ '-\\ %,, "%'7"g \ ", ",-',',""L/"',, \ \ % \ X JX \ \ \\ X _ \x._=j \_X\\ %%%% \\ \\ (07015 Fig. 10 - SAT, RAT and OAT Thermistor Mounting Refrigerant Temperatures Condenser thermistors. coil temperatures These measurements are measured with 5 kilo-ohm provide an approximate saturated condensing temperature for each circuit (SCT.A). Fig. 11 shows the factory locations for the SCT thermistors on 48/50PD units. Ensure that thermistors are placed at the correct location and are snapped between securely over the return bend the thermistor and the tube. so that contact is made To check thermistor accuracy, measure temperature at probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type temperature-measuring instrument. Insulate thermocouple to avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading. Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature determined from thermistor voltage reading should be close, within 5°F, if care was taken in applying thermocouple and taking readings. If a more accurate check is required, unit must be shut down and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature (freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal, or by determining the resistance with unit shut down and thermistor disconnected from J8. Compare the values determined with the value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the Scrolling Marquee display. 37 Sensor Trim Corrective offsets can be applied to the space temperature and the supply air temperature sensor readings. These corrections are set in the Configuration--,TRIM menu for the display, or in the Maintenance--,TRIM section for available table for CCN. See the Indoor Air Quality adjustments to IAQ and OAQ sensor readings. The space temperature calibration temperature may value be corrected by entering either a in SPT.C, or an offset temperature value in SPT.T. The supply-air temperature may be corrected by entering either a calibration temperature value in SAT.C, or an offset temperature value in SAT.T. The return-air temperature may be corrected by entering either a calibration temperature value in RAT.C or an offset temperature value in RAT.T. Temperature corrections should only be made if sensor readings are compared an accurate reference temperature measurement device. to Troubleshooting Transducer The electronic control uses suction pressure transducers to measure the suction pressure of the refrigerant circuits. The pressure/voltage characteristics of these transducers are in shown in Table 18, the 5vdc power is applied to legs A and B of the transducer and legs B to C represent the voltage drop shown in the table. The accuracy of these transducers can be verified by connecting an accurate pressure gauge to the second refrigerant port in the suction line. Forcing Inputs and Outputs Many variables may have directly at the local display. their value forced This can be useful through CCN or during diagnostic testing and also during operation, typically as part of an advanced third party control scheme. Input and output points that may be forced are indicated as 'forcible' in the write status column of the display and CCN tables. If the user needs to force a variable, follow the same process as when editing a configuration parameter. A forced variable will be displayed on the Scrolling Marquee with a blinking period "." following indicated its value. A forced with a blinking "f'. value on Navigator accessory A forced value on CCN devices TM is is indicated with "Control" if forced at the unit display, or "Supervisor" if forced via CCN. To remove a local force with the Scrolling Marquee, press the up-arrow IMPORTANT: select the point with the ENTER key and then and down-arrow keys simultaneously. In the case of a control effect at the time of power power reset, any force in reset will be cleared. 38 Table 15 -- Temperature RAT, TEMP (F) -25 -24 -23 -22 -21 -20 -19 -18 -17 -16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -I 0 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 I0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 5O 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 6O VOLTAGE DROP (V) 4.758 4.750 4.741 4.733 4.724 4.715 4.705 4.696 4.686 4.676 4.665 4.655 4.644 4.633 4.621 4.609 4.597 4.585 4.572 4.560 4.546 4.533 4.519 4.505 4.490 4.476 4.461 4.445 4.429 4.413 4.397 4.380 4.363 4.346 4.328 4.310 4.292 4.273 4.254 4.235 4.215 4.195 4.174 4.153 4.132 4.111 4.089 4.067 4.044 4.021 3.998 3.975 3.951 3.927 3.903 3.878 3.853 3.828 3.802 3.776 3.750 3.723 3.697 3.670 3.654 3.615 3.587 3.559 3.531 3.503 3.474 3.445 3.416 3.387 3.357 3.328 3.298 3.268 3.238 3.208 3.178 3.147 3.117 3.086 3.056 3.025 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 196,453 189,692 183,300 177,000 171,079 165,238 159,717 154,344 149,194 144,250 139,443 134,891 130,402 126,183 122,018 118,076 114,236 110,549 107,006 103,558 100,287 97,060 94,020 91,019 88,171 85,396 82,729 80,162 77,662 75,286 72,940 70,727 68,542 66,465 64,439 62,491 60,612 58,781 57,039 55,319 53,693 52,086 50,557 49,065 47,627 46,240 44,888 43,598 42,324 41,118 39,926 38,790 37,681 36,610 35,577 34,569 33,606 32,654 31,752 30,860 30,009 29,177 28,373 27,597 26,838 26,113 25,396 24,715 24,042 23,399 22,770 22,161 21,573 20,998 20,447 19,903 19,386 18,874 18,384 17,904 17,441 16,991 16,552 16,131 15,714 15,317 (°F) vs Resistance/Voltage OAT, SAT, and SPT Thermistors TEMP (F) 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 7O 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 8O 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 9O 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 IO0 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 2.994 2.963 2.932 2.901 2.870 2.839 2.808 2.777 2.746 2.715 2.684 2.653 2.622 2.592 2.561 2.530 2.500 2.470 2.439 2.409 2.379 2.349 2.319 2.290 2.260 2.231 2.202 2.173 2.144 2.115 2.087 2.059 2.030 2.003 1.975 1.948 1.921 1.894 1.867 1.841 1.815 1.789 1.763 1.738 1.713 1.688 1.663 1.639 1.615 1.591 1.567 1.544 1.521 1.498 1.475 1.453 1.431 1.409 1.387 1.366 1.345 1.324 1.304 1.284 1.264 1.244 1.225 1.206 1.187 1.168 1.150 1.132 1.114 1.096 1.079 1.062 1.045 1.028 1.012 0.996 0.980 0.965 0.949 0.934 0.919 0.905 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 14,925 14,549 14,180 13,824 13,478 13,139 12,814 12,493 12,187 11,884 11,593 11,308 11,031 10,764 10,501 10,249 10,000 9,762 9,526 9,300 9,078 8,862 8,653 8,448 8,251 8,056 7,869 7,685 7,507 7,333 7,165 6,999 6,838 6,683 6,530 6,383 6,238 6,098 5,961 5,827 5,698 5,571 5,449 5,327 5,210 5,095 4,984 4,876 4,769 4,666 4,564 4,467 4,370 4,277 4.185 4,096 4,008 3,923 3,840 3,759 3,681 3,603 3,529 3,455 3,383 3,313 3,244 3,178 3,112 3,049 2,986 2,926 2,866 2,809 2,752 2,697 2,643 2,590 2,539 2,488 2,439 2,391 2,343 2,297 2,253 2,209 39 Drop Values (10K at 25°C for Resistors) TEMP (F) 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.890 0.876 0.862 0.848 0.835 0.821 0.808 0.795 0.782 0.770 0.758 0.745 0.733 0.722 0.710 0.699 0.687 0.676 0.666 0.655 0.645 0.634 0.624 0.614 0.604 0.595 0.585 0.576 0.567 0.558 0.549 0.540 0.532 0.523 0.515 0.507 0.499 0.491 0.483 0.476 0.468 0.461 0.454 0.447 0.440 0.433 0.426 0.419 0.413 0.407 0.400 0.394 0.388 0.382 0.376 0.370 0.365 0.359 0.354 0.349 0.343 0.338 0.333 0.328 0.323 0.318 0.314 0.309 0.305 0.300 0.296 0.292 0.288 0.284 0.279 0.275 0.272 0.268 0.264 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 2,166 2,124 2,083 2,043 2,003 1,966 1,928 1,891 1,855 1,820 1,786 1,752 1,719 1,687 1,656 1,625 1,594 1,565 1,536 1,508 1,480 1,453 1,426 1,400 1,375 1,350 1,326 1,302 1,278 1,255 1,233 1,211 1,190 1,169 1,148 1,128 1,108 1,089 1,070 1,052 1,033 1,016 998 981 964 947 931 915 900 885 870 855 841 827 814 800 787 774 762 749 737 725 714 702 691 680 670 659 649 639 629 620 610 601 592 583 574 566 557 TEMP (F) -25 -24 -23 -22 -21 -20 -19 -18 -17 -16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Table 16 -- Temperature VOLTAGE DROP (V) 3.699 3.689 3.679 3.668 3.658 3.647 3.636 3.624 3.613 3.601 3.588 3.576 3.563 3.550 3.536 3.523 3.509 3.494 3.480 3.465 3.450 3.434 3.418 3.402 3.386 3.369 3.352 3.335 3.317 3.299 3.281 3.262 3.243 3.224 3.205 3.185 3.165 3.145 3.124 3.103 3.082 3.060 3.038 3.016 2.994 2.972 2.949 2.926 2.903 2.879 2.856 2.832 2.808 2.784 2.759 2.735 2.710 2.685 2.660 2.634 2.609 2.583 2.558 2.532 2.506 2.480 2.454 2.428 2.402 2.376 2.349 2.323 2.296 2.270 2.244 2.217 2.191 2.165 2.138 2.112 2.086 2.060 2.034 2.008 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 98,010 94,707 91,522 88,449 85,486 82,627 79,871 77,212 74,648 72,175 69,790 67,490 65,272 63,133 61,070 59,081 57,162 55,311 53,526 51,804 50,143 48,541 46,996 45,505 44,066 42,679 41,339 40,047 38,800 37,596 36,435 35,313 34,231 33,185 32,176 31,202 30,260 29,351 28,473 27,624 26,804 26,011 25,245 24,505 23,789 23,096 22,427 21,779 21,153 20,547 19,960 19,393 18,843 18,311 17,796 17,297 16,814 16,346 15,892 15,453 15,027 14,614 14,214 13,826 13,449 13,084 12,730 12,387 12,053 11,730 11,416 11,112 10,816 10,529 10,250 9,979 9,717 9,461 9,213 8,973 8,739 8,511 8,291 8,076 (°F) vs. Resistance/Voltage TEMP (F) 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 Drop Values VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.982 1.956 1.930 1.905 1.879 1.854 1.829 1.804 1.779 1.754 1.729 1.705 1.681 1.656 1.632 1.609 1.585 1.562 1.538 1.516 1.493 1.470 1.448 1.426 1.404 1.382 1.361 1.340 1.319 1.298 1.278 1.257 1.237 1.217 1.198 1.179 1.160 1.141 1.122 1.104 1.086 1.068 1.051 1.033 1.016 0.999 0.983 0.966 0.950 0.934 0.918 0.903 0.888 0.873 0.858 0.843 0.829 0.815 0.801 0.787 0.774 0.761 0.748 0.735 0.723 0.710 0.698 0.686 0.674 0.663 0.651 0.640 0.629 0.618 0.608 0.597 0.587 0.577 0.567 0.557 0.548 0.538 0.529 0.520 for SCT RESISTANCE (Ohms) 7,866 7,665 7,468 7,277 7,091 6,911 6,735 6,564 6,399 6,238 6,081 5,929 5,781 5,637 5,497 5,361 5,229 5,101 4,976 4,855 4,737 4,622 4,511 4,403 4,298 4,196 4,096 4,000 3,906 3,814 3,726 3,640 3,556 3,474 3,395 3,318 3,243 3,170 3,099 3,031 2,964 2,898 2,835 2,773 2,713 2,655 2,597 2,542 2,488 2,436 2,385 2,335 2,286 2,239 2,192 2,147 2,103 2,060 2,018 1,977 1,937 1,898 1,860 1,822 1,786 1,750 1,715 1,680 1,647 1,614 1,582 1,550 1,519 1,489 1,459 1,430 1,401 1,373 1,345 1,318 1,291 1,265 1,240 1,214 40 Sensors (5K at 25°C TEMP (F) 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 Resistors) VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.511 0.502 0.494 0.485 0.477 0.469 0.461 0.453 0.445 0.438 0.430 0.423 0.416 0.408 0.402 0.395 0.388 0.381 0.375 0.369 0.362 0.356 0.350 0.344 0.339 0.333 0.327 0.322 0.317 0.311 0.306 0.301 0.296 0.291 0.286 0.282 0.277 0.272 0.268 0.264 0.259 0.255 0.251 0.247 0.243 0.239 0.235 0.231 0.228 0.224 0.220 0.217 0.213 0.210 0.206 0.203 0.200 0.197 0.194 0.191 0.188 0.185 0.182 0.179 0.176 0.173 0.171 0.168 0.165 0.163 0.160 0.158 0.155 0.153 0.151 0.148 0.146 0.144 0.142 0.140 0.138 0.135 0.133 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 1,190 1,165 1,141 1,118 1,095 1,072 1,050 1,029 1,007 986 965 945 925 906 887 868 850 832 815 798 782 765 750 734 719 705 690 677 663 650 638 626 614 602 591 581 570 561 551 542 533 524 516 508 501 494 487 480 473 467 461 456 450 445 439 434 429 424 419 415 410 405 401 396 391 386 382 377 372 367 361 356 350 344 338 332 325 318 311 304 297 289 282 Table 17 -- Temperature vs Resistance Values for the DTT Thermistor (86K at 25 °C Resistors) Degree C Degree F Resistance (k Ohms) - 40 - 40 2889.60 - 65 - 61 2087.22 - 30 -25 - 20 - 15 - 22 -16 - 4 5 23 363.99 10 15 20 25 50 59 68 77 55 60 65 161 140 149 10.79 85 185 9.20 90 194 7.87 95 206 6.77 1 O0 212 5.85 105 221 5.09 110 260 4.45 115 269 3.87 120 248 3.65 125 257 2.92 130 266 2.58 165 275 2.28 140 284 2.02 145 296 1.80 150 602 1.59 155 311 1.39 160 620 1.25 165 329 1.12 170 368 1.01 175 647 0.92 180 356 0.86 86.00 56.16 122 176 107.44 95 50 12.76 80 165.14 35 116 15.07 167 171.17 69.28 45 158 75 218.41 86 104 (k Ohms) 70 280.82 30 40 Resistance 627.28 - 5 41 F 864.72 475.74 5 Degree 1121.44 14 62 C 1522.20 - 10 0 Degree 45.81 37.58 60.99 25.68 21.40 17.91 41 Table PRESSURE (psig) 0 2 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.465 18 -- Pressure (psig) vs. Voltage PRESSURE (psig) 68 Drop Values for Suction Pressure Transducers VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.135 PRESSURE (psig) 136 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.804 PRESSURE 204 2.474 1.824 206 2.493 208 2.513 210 2.533 (psig) VOLTAGE DROP 4 0.485 0.505 70 72 1.154 1.174 138 140 6 0.524 74 1.194 142 1.844 1.863 8 0.544 0.564 76 78 1.214 1.233 144 146 1.883 1.903 212 2.553 214 2.572 80 82 1.253 1.273 148 150 1.922 216 2.592 14 0.583 0.603 218 2.612 16 0.623 84 1.292 152 1.942 1.962 220 2.631 18 0.642 0.662 86 88 1.312 1.332 154 156 1.982 2.001 222 2.651 224 2.671 90 92 1.351 1.371 158 160 2.021 226 2.690 24 0.682 0.702 228 2.710 26 0.721 94 1.391 162 2.041 2.060 230 2.730 28 0.741 0.761 96 98 1.410 1.430 164 166 2.080 2.100 232 2.749 234 2.769 100 102 1.450 1.470 168 170 2.119 236 2.789 34 0.780 0.800 238 2.809 36 0.820 104 1.489 172 2.139 2.159 240 2.828 38 0.839 0.859 106 108 1.509 1.529 174 176 2.178 2.198 242 2.848 244 2.868 110 112 1.548 1.568 178 180 2.218 246 2.887 44 0.879 0.898 248 2.907 46 0.918 114 1.588 182 2.237 2.257 250 2.927 48 0.938 0.958 116 118 1.607 1.627 184 186 2.277 2.297 252 2.946 254 2.966 120 122 1.647 1.666 188 190 2.316 256 2.986 54 0.977 0.997 258 3.005 56 1.017 124 1.686 192 2.336 2.356 260 3.025 58 1.036 1.056 126 128 1.706 1.726 194 196 2.375 2.395 262 3.045 264 3.065 130 132 1.745 1.765 198 200 2.415 266 3.084 64 1.076 1.095 268 3.104 66 1.115 134 1.785 202 2.434 2.454 270 3.124 10 12 2O 22 30 32 40 42 50 52 60 62 MAJOR General SYSTEM COMPONENTS The 48/50PD single package rooftop units contain ComfortLink .... electronic control system that monitors operations of the rooftop. The control system is composed several options See Fig. 48/50PD. thermistor main control components and available or field-installed accessories as listed in 12-14 for the control and power Fig. 15 shows the layout of the control and transducer locations for the 48/50PD. the all of factory-installed sections below. schematics box, unit, for and 42 (V) R C (ECB) J2 J1 T_AN2 01 J [ 48HG503976 I 4.0 C08582 Fig. 12 - 48PD Control Wiring 43 Schematic 1 POWER EXHAUST J FlOP/ACCESSORY TBI Jll 4 LSa TRA_I 81 Jll 2 B J10 19} _k<_ I_ _ r..................................... _i:;_-, .Fi.L.; 111........ _-, _ 2'"_,'?_ '_'_ ÷ I ........................................................ RED ) T TO MBf_J7 9 v ................ ............ GRY BL_..... BL}{ ............... L_RN-- -G>> CO.TRO. ................. YEL L _ SWITCHES 4. 5 AND 70_ GRNI _ QUIP [ G_D 4.8HG503977 4.0 C08583 Fig. 13 - 50PD Control Wiring 44 Schematic 1 : NACR ] D SCON ECTI S[D _ ,SEE ncn. / v i " BLNI _ / " I_ _y KE2_YE[ : :FLOP _PHASE L_S ]_OTECTI_ U., ...................... ..... ............................... / I ',i _K _ D_K " / ........... I . _f3U I / ; / Y[!I ; I CCHR t / _ {_) ......................... I1 .................................................................................................................................................... B U IFC _ ..--J _ \I RANI vLVL}Kl ...................... YEL_i O; C 460V OILY] / L_( 460V ] >_i [{ Y Y( 5> _ ONL Y _</_<_ R/} DLK 7J / fIR M _-_ L ........................................ [ / CAP1 . _ ................. /; 0 /1s0_A_OR ' ...................... _I'K _] ............ DRN Z:I ) ORM DLK ......................... Y .......... YEL_ II I I I '"' T + -024v / SCHEMATC _52 AMPS) BK ................................. TRAN2 ........ ..... w._.._,._._ .............. :B'' A_DLK_7_ _--" I _' [_ b ................. i UL _/ LU y /_:_ I/Q_ L/_ _Fx£/ .... _ / / _- _DLK m[/,,_ "_" L J-_ I{_tI_BLK P:MI / _ .... B KT(_ YELl <RSl I _vr_l P_H _ I_BLU_ / >MI _BIK \ ..... ]) _-_ I _ YELl I P:MH CAPS _ FlOP/ACCESSORY _ ONI Y (32 \ _S @<_<_,_ ib;_========================== I .............................. /rocB @ P_C2 460V OT ON ,¢-J 20D/230, Yf L = ONLY AMPS) LEGEND IERMINAI {MARKED> TERMINAL (UNMARKED) TERMINALBLOCK FACTORY WIRING FIELD CONTROL WIRING .........................FIELD POWEBWIRING ACCESSORY OR OPTIONAL WIRING TO INDICAIE COMMON POTENI_A! ONLY: NOI TO REPRESENT WIRING A AUXI C CAP CB CON CCNR CCN COMP CS BS¢ BTT ED EBB fS RU GND GN NPS I IAQ IBM i_C /fM IGC INV [EN IS LSM MBB OAO OAT _ _BLKH YFI I .... _ i i iU_TNV_I ...................... I/]_- .......................................... 'll {_} o _ BLK -- K CONVERIENCE' _BK / ....................... J ].................................................................................................................................. A/vw7 / CCB AT _l _ BL_ OUTLETI L?, I I 208/230,460-3-60 ............................................. ................................. LK ::::: 01_I_DLK C05,C06 I ................ 115V BOX DOOR fIELD .................. _ " " PP Y ............. K SU L _l'm ROP--_ • _J _ NOfW_OWERED, _ ::: _:: ; PD YI L . _Nu _ I £1_# LA EL ............ L GND J EQUIP / 81U WIll :RV, L:CIRI¢ FAT _OP/ _ ACCY OALY _ : ........ .....................i'i _> 48/50 NK -- ,= _ :_Loo ] _- SCHEMATIC COMFORTL : ................. IUPP L POWER C¥ :> CIRCUIT A WODULATION DOARD COMPRESSOR CONTACT@ CAPACITOR CIRCUIT BREAKER CRANKCASE HEATER CRANKCASE HEATER RELAY CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK COMPRESSOR {DIGITAL} CURRRNT SENSOR DIGITAL SCROLL CONTROLLER DISCHARGE [EMPERATURE THERMISTER ENTNALPY CONTROL ECONOMIZER CONTROL BOARD ELAME SENSOR fDSE GROUND GAS VALVE NIGH PRESSURE SWITCH IGNI{OR INDOOR AIR QUALITY INDUCED DRAFT MOTOR INDOOR fAN CONTACTOR INDOOR fAN MOIOR INTEGRATED GAS CONTROIL_R ADJUSTABLE SPFFD AC MOTOR DRIVE LOCAL EOUIPMENI NETWORK L!MI[ SW!{CN lIMIT SWITCH MANUAl RESET MAIN BASE BOARD OUIDOOR AIR OUAL[TY OUIDOOR AER /{MPERAIUR! Ol:C OFM PEC PEN PF P[ OT RAT RS SAT SCT SSP TB TRAN UC NOTES: I If ANY Of TBE ORIGINAL WIRE FURNISHED MUST DE REPLACED, IT MUST BE REPLACED WITH TYPE 90°C OR [{S EOUWAIENT 2 THREE PHASE MOTORS ARE PROTECTED UNDER PRIMARY SINGLE _KASING CONDITIONS 5 USE COPPER CONDUCTORSONLY 4 RED JUMPER WIRE MDSI DE ADDED BETWEEN R AND W] ROB SPACE TENPFRATURE MODE AND TFMPORAR]LY DURING SERVICE-TES! MODE WHEN IHE HEATERS NEED TO OP#RATE 5 THAN1 AND 2 ARE WIRED FOR 23BY ON 2081230v UNITS IF UNIT IS TO BE BUN WITH 2OBV POWER SUPPLY, DISCONNECT BLK WERE FROM 25or TERMINAl. AND CONNEC[ TO 2OOV TERMIRA! SFE CONTROL SCNFMATIC BC 48 OUTDOOR PAN CONTACTON OUTDOOR FAN MO[OR POWER EXHAUST CONTACIOR POWER EXHAUST MOTOR PLUGGED FILTER PLUG QUADRUPLE TERMINAl RETURN AIR TEMPRHATUNE ROLLOUT SWIT¢I! SUPPLY AIR TEMPERAIURE SATURATED CONDENSING IEMP SATURATED SUCTION PRESSURE TERMINAL BOARD TRANSFORMER UNLOADER COlE THERMOSTAT/IOC MARKINGS BM BLOWER NO/OR C CONNON CW COMBUSTION MOTOR G FAR iFO INDOOR FAN ON LI LENE I R THERMOSTAT POWER RT POWER SUPPLY SS SPEED SENSOR SERES ONLY GAS SECTION ONIY (48 SERES> W Wl THER4OSTAT Isl SIAGE OF HEA AING r wR x Y1 Y2 2n_ STAGE OF /_EAHNG ALARM OUTPUT 1st SIAGE OF COOLENG 2nd SIAGE OF COOL NG _CONVEN : OUI ....POWRD _ [£{:] E ] NCI _ _: C C I...... I 48HG504029I&O..... (:08584 Fig. 14 - 48/50PD Power Wiring Schematic 45 and Legend D]:T AND UC LOCAIION RAT UNIT CONTROL BOX TRAN 1 i ...... : _ // TRAN 2 _"i¸ Z{: CO MPRESSOR [ 7 -_ CONTACTO ECB ...... CURRENT SENSOR AUXI DSC (:08657 Fig. 15 - Typical Unit Component 46 Arrangement Main Base Board (MBB) See Fig. 16 and Table 19. The MBB is the center of the ComfortLink control system. It contains the maior portion of the operating software and controls the operation of the unit. The MBB continuously monitors input/output channel information received from its inputs and from the Economizer Control Board (ECB). The MBB The MBB and other receives also receives discrete or inputs from thermistors the Current digital Sensor inputs inputs. RED LED - STATUS The temperature (SPT) from either a T-55, T-56 or T-58 device and space temperature offset (SPTO) from a T-56 device. See Field-Installed Accessories section. The MBB controls 9 relays. IMPORTANT: The Main instance that is factory Base Board (MBB) set to '1.' has a 3-position Do not change this setting. and transducers. for compressors MBB reads space YELLOW LED CCN (CARRIER COMFORT GREEN LED - _ jumper LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) INSTANCE JUMPER NETWORK) (SET TO 1) CEPL130346-01 L_ STATUS J10 © J7 I I I J9 C 07026 Fig. 16 - Main Base Board 47 (MBB) Table 19-- MBBConnections DISPLAY NAME POINT DESCRIPTION SENSOR LOCATION TYPE OF I/O CONNECTION PIN NUMBER INPUTS Input power from TRAN1 control box 24 VAC J1, 1-3 IGC Fan Request gas section switch input J6, 4 switch input J6, 6 switch input switch input J7, 4 J7, 6 FDWN Fire shutdown switch HUM Space Humidity switch Digital Scroll Unloader C.ALM Scroll Compressor CMRA Compressor Alarm switch input J7, 8 switch input J7, 10 FIL.S Filter status switch Compressor A1 Current Sensor Space temperature (T55/56) SPTO Space temperature SAT SCT.A RAT FAN.S space A Feedback CS.A1 SPT OAT supply/return/space offset (T56) indoor fan section switch input J9, 2-3 control box space 0-5vdc digital input 1Ok thermistor J9, 10-12 J8, 1-2 space 1Ok thermistor J8, 2-3 Outdoor air temperature outdoor coil support 1Ok thermistor J8, 5-6 Supply air temperature indoor fan housing, or supply duct 1Ok thermistor J8, 7-8 Saturated condenser temperature, outdoor coil, circuit A 5k thermistor J8, 9-10 Return air temperature circuit A Return air Section 1Ok thermistor J8, 13-14 Fan status switch indoor fan section switch input J8, 15-16 0-5 VDC pressure transducer J8, 18-20 SSRA Suction pressure, circuit A compressor A suction CTLR Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr relay J10, 11 CCH OFC.1 Crankcase heat relay Outdoor fan 1 relay relay relay J10, 13 J10, 19 OUTPUTS IDF Indoor fan VFD pwr relay relay J10, 21 Alarm relay relay J10, 23 HT.1 Heat Stage 2 relay relay J10, 25 HT.2 Heat Stage 1 relay relay J10, 27 Local Equipment Network (LEN) communication J5, 1-3 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) communication ALRM COMMUNICATION Network device power 24 VAC J5, 5-7 J5, 9-10 Scrolling Marquee Display (LEN) Scrolling Marquee Display power communication 24 VAC J4, 1-3 J4, 5-6 Modulation Board (AUXl) LEN communication J3, 1-3 Optional ECB power 24 VAC 48 J2, 1-2 Economizer The ECB controls Control Board the economizer By (ECB) actuator. (See Fig. 17 and Table 20.) The control signal from the ECB uses either the MFT (Multi-Function Technology) digital communication protocol or a 4 to 20 mA output signal as defined by the configuration Configuration--_ECON--_E.CTL. The ECB has inputs for Indoor Air Quality (IAQ), Outdoor Air Quality (OAQ), enthalpy and RH sensor. It also controls two power exhaust outputs. digitally communicating with the ECB, the actuator is able to provide the damper position information to the ComfortLink controller. economizer and diagnostic The damper position is displayed at Outputs-->ECON-->EC.4P. Diagnostic information is displayed via Alert T414. More information about these alarms is contained in the Alarms and Alerts section. IMPORTANT: 4-position The Economizer Control Board (ECB) has a DIP switch that is factory set to '0' (ON, towards the center of the board). RED LED STATUS Do not change this setting. GREEN LED-LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) +0+0 C 07027 Fig. 17 - Economizer Control 49 Board (ECB) Table 20 -DISPLAY NAME ECB Connections POINT DESCRIPTION SENSOR LOCATION TYPE OF I/O CONNECTION PIN NUMBER INPUTS Input power from MBB control box 24 VAC J1, 1-2 field installed switch input J4, 2 economizer, or return/space switch input J4, 4 Indoor air quality sensor return/space 0-20 mA J5, 2 Outdoor air quality sensor, or Relative humidity sensor field installed 0-20 mA J5, 5 Ground Ground J5, 3 J7, 3 Output power to enthalpy switch 24 VAC J4, 3 Output power for loop power sensors Output power to economizer actuator 24 VDC 24 VAC J5, 1 J7, 2 RM.OC Remote occupancy switch ENTH or IAQ.S Outdoor enthalpy switch, or Indoor air quality switch IAQ OAQ or SRRH Sensor Common Actuator Common OUTPUTS PE.1 Power exhaust 1 relay relay J8, 3 PE.2 Power exhaust 2 relay relay J8, 6 EC.CP Commanded 0-20 mA J9, 1 Economizer position COMMUNICATION Local Equipment EC.CP & EC.AP Network (LEN) communication J2, 1-3 Carrier Comfort Network (CON) communication J3 Economizer actuator position (digital control) MFT communication J7, 1 5O Modulation The AUXI Board board controls for the ECB, communicate. (AUX1) the compressor capacity and the indoor fan speed (See Fig. 18 and Table 21.) It outputs a l-5vdc and a 2-10vdc signal to the DSC and VFD for capacity and fan speed, respectively. This board is also used as the LEN connection therefore IMPORTANT: (SI) The AUXI that is factory be in the off position buss must be board operational has an 8-position set for its LEN address. except 4, 5 and 7 which the center of the board). for the Do not change ECB to DIP switch All the switches must are on (off is towards this setting. DIP SWITCH TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR(_ TR7 TR8 (:08658 Fig. 18 - Modulation Table DISPLAY NAME 21 -- AUX1 Board (AUX1) Connections TYPE OF I/O CONNECTION PIN NUMBER Input power from TRAN1 24 VAC J1, 11-12 CAPC Compressor 1-5vdc CH9 RSPD Commanded 2-10vdc CH10 Local Equipment Network (LEN) communication J9, 1-3 Local Equipment Network (LEN) communication J9, 1-3 POINT DESCRIPTION OUTPUTS Capacity Fan Speed COMMUNICATION 51 Digital Scroll Control The DSC board controls and Table 22.) It receives determined by the cooling Board The (DSC) the compressor's capacity. a l-5vdc algorithm. from the AUX1 signal (See DSC solenoid Fig. 19 has direct unloader control of the R a specific and pulses capacity. D4 D2 T6 T4 T2 P6 P4 P2 C4 C2 24 24 D3D1 T5T3T1 P5P3Pl C3C1 VACCOM .,i {]_ See the troubleshooting Power LED (Green) .... CC TI C Unloader LED T2 Alert LED (Red) (08659 Fig. 19 - Digital Table DISPLAY NAME Scroll Controller (DSC) 22 -- DSC Connections SENSOR LOCATION TYPE OF I/O CONNECTION PIN NUMBER 24 VAC 24VAC/24COM Discharge line 86k thermistor T1/T2 1- 5vdc 19-250VA0 C1/O2 L1/L2 POINT DESCRIPTION INPUTS CTLR Digital Scroll Ctrl Pwr Compressor Discharge Temperature (DTT) CAPC Compressor Capacity Load Control Power* C.ALM Scroll Compressor Alarm Relay A1/A2 CMRA Compressor A Feedback Relay M1/M2 Relay U1/U2 OUTPUTS Digital Scroll Unloader Voltage used for contacts M1 & M2, U1 & U2, and VI & V2 (24 VAC Compressor section used). 52 a The discharge temperature thermistor (DTT) is monitored by the DSC for compressor safety. The DSC is equipped with an LED board (light-emitting diode) for diagnostics, section for more details. T3 compressor on and off to provide Variable Frequency The VFD varies Drive (VFD) the frequency of the AC voltage supplied to the indoor fan. (See Fig. 20 and Table 23.) This causes the variance in the speed of the fan. The commanded fan speed is received by the VFD from the AUXI board as a 2-10vdc .... signal. The AII DIP switch must be in the off (or towards "U") position to properly read the analog signal. There are three jumper wires that must remain installed for proper operation. The VFD is mounted behind the fan housing on the fan sled and the remote mounted on the front of the fan housing for easy access. is factory keypad is The VFD set to the auto mode for unit operation. _i2V]iii i.......... C09146 Fig. 20 - Variable Table DISPLAY NAME 23 -- Frequency Drive (VFD) VFD Connections POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE OF I/O TERMINAL NUMBER TERMINAL NAME LOW VOLTAGE INPUTS Shielded Cable Ground ESPD Shield 1 2-10vdc 2 All * Analog Input 1 Common Low Voltage Power (jumped to DI1 & DI4) Ground 24v 3 10 AGND 24v Low Voltage Common Ground 11 GND Ground 12 DCOM Discrete Input 1 (jumped from 24v) Switch Input 13 DI1 Discrete Input 4 (jumped from 24v) Switch Input 16 DI4 Commanded Fan Speed (jumped to DCOM) Discrete Inputs Common (jumped from GND) SCR HIGH VOLTAGE Requires the All dip switch Voltage Leg from IFC-21 Voltage Input U1 MAINS Voltage Leg from IFC-22 Voltage Input V1 MAINS Voltage Leg from IFC-23 Voltage Input Wl MAINS Voltage Leg to IFM-3 Voltage Leg to IFM-2 Voltage Output Voltage Output U2 V2 MOTOR MOTOR Voltage Leg to IFM-1 Voltage Output W2 MOTOR to be in in the Off (or towards "U") position. 53 Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board The IGC is equipped with an LED (light-emitting diode) for diagnostics. See the Troubleshooting section for more information. The IGC is provided on gas heat units. (See Fig. 21 and Table 24.) The IGC controls the direct spark ignition system and monitors the rollout switch, limit switch, and induced-draft motor Hall Effect switch. RED LED-STATUS LH33WPOO2A II 1068-12 II II ( 07028 Fig. 21 - Integrated Table TERMINAL LABEL POINT DESCRIPTION Gas Control 24 -- (IGC) Board IGC Connections SENSOR LOCATION TYPE OF I/O CONNECTION PIN NUMBER J1, 1-3 INPUTS RT, C SS Input power from TRAN 1 Speed sensor control box gas section 24 VAC analog input FS, T1 Flame sensor gas section switch input W Heat stage 1 MBB 24 VAC RS Rollout switch gas section switch input J2, 5-6 LS CS Limit switch Centrifugal switch (not used) gas section switch input switch input J2, 7-8 J2, 9-10 L1, CM Induced draft combustion gas section line VAC IFO Indoor fan request control box relay J2, 1 GV (W1) GV (W2) Gas valve (heat stage 1) Gas Valve (heat stage 2, from MBB) gas section gas section relay J2, 12 J2, 2 OUTPUTS motor 54 Not on IGC Low Voltage Terminal Strip Fig. 22 and Table 25.) The circuit breakers for the low voltage control transformers, interface connection for the Carrier Comfort (TB1) This circuit board control boards provides a connection and a majority point between of the field-installed 17 I accessories. (See I4 J10 Network@ (CCN) communication, Local Equipment Network (LEN) on the low voltage terminal strip. the major I and interface connection for the communications are also located I J11 RUN TEST SEPARATION OFCIRCUITSTO EACH24V TRANSFORMER MUSTBEMAiNTAiNED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 R Y1 Y2 W1 W2 G C X (08660 Fig. 22 - Low-Voltage Terminal Table 25 -- Field Connection TERMINAL LABEL DISPLAY NAME 1 2 IAQ 3 POINT DESCRIPTION 24 VDC Sensor Loop power Indoor air quality sensor Board (LVTB) Terminal Strip SENSOR LOCATION TYPE OF I/O return/space 24 VDC output 4-20 mA input JlO, 17 J1O, 16 Ground J1O, 15 Air quality & humidity sensor common 4 OAQ or SP.RH Outdoor air quality sensor or Relative humidity sensor field installed 5 RM.OC Remote occupancy field installed 6 switch Switch power (ENTH, RM.OC, IAQ.S) 7 8* ENTH or IAQ.S Outdoor enthalpy switch, or Indoor air quality switch EC.CP Economizer commanded position actuator (when in digital control) 9 Economizer 10" EC.AP Economizer position feedback in analog control) 24 VAC power NOT USED Y2 NOT USED Wl NOT USED HUM C X FIRE economizer signal common R Y1 W2 G economizer, or return/space (when economizer 4-20 mA input 24 VAC input CONNECTION PIN NUMBER J1O, 14 J1O, 16 24 VAC output JlO, 11-12 24 VAC input J1 O, 9-10 2-10 VDC output J1O, 6-8 Ground J1O, 3-5 communication 2-10 VDC output JlO, 1-2 24 VAC output J11, 11-14 J11,10 Jll, Jll, Space Humidity Switch NOT USED space 24 VAC input 9 7-8 J11,6 Jll, 5 24 VAC common 24 VAC output ALRM Alarm output (normally open) 24 VAC output J11, 1 FDWN Fire shutdown switch 24 VAC output supply/return switch input J12, 7 FDWN Fire shutdown switch input supply/return switch input J12, 6 SPT Space temperatu re (T55/56) space 1Ok thermistor J12, 4- 5 SPTO Space temperatu re offset (T56) space 1Ok thermistor J12, 3- 4 SHUTDOWN 1 J11,2-4 FIRE SHUTDOWN 2 T55 1-2 T55 2-3 FAN STATUS 1-2 NOT USED LEN CCN Refer to Third J12, 1-2 Local Equipment Network (LEN) Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Party Control section for more communication communication information 55 J13, 1-3, 4-5 J13, 6-8, 4-5 Scrolling This Marquee device is the IMPORTANT: Display keypad interface used to access rooftop information, read sensor values, and test the unit. (See Fig. 23.) The Scrolling Marquee display is a 4-key, 4-character, 16-segment LED (light-emitting diode) display. on the display as well as an Alarm Usage section for further Eleven mode LEDs are located Status LED. See Basic Control details. Alarm Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gauge) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of -20°C to 60 °C is required. See Table below for acceptable wiring. MANUFACTURER PART NO. Alpha Belden Carol West Penn 2413 or 5463 8772 C2528 302 when connecting to a CCN communication St alus It is important 80,;2°0 :2 a color-coding the installation. 80:::,: ....... (06320 Fig. 23 - Scrolling bus that scheme be used for the entire network to simplify It is recommended that red be used for the signal positive, black for the signal negative and white for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different colored wires. Marquee At each system element, the shields of its communication bus with cables must be tied together. The shield screw on TBI can be used to tie the cables together. If the communication bus is entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be 48/50PD units. (See Fig. 24.) The Navigator display operates the same way as the Scrolling Marquee device. The Navigator display connected to a ground at one point only. The shield screw on TBI is not acceptable for grounding. If the communication bus cable plugs into the LEN port on either exits from one building and enters another, the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building Accessory The Navigator accessory hand-held TM Display Navigator display can be used TB or the ECB board. where the cable enters or exits the building only). To connect the unit to the network: 1. Turn off power to the control (one point per building box. 2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends (ground), and black (-) conductors. colors for different colored cables.) 3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal to COM terminal, 4. The RJI4 of the red (+), white (Substitute on TBI, 5. Restore CCN connector power routines on TBI can also be used, but is (for example, software). a to unit. A shorted from the white wire and the black wire to the (-) terminal. only intended for temporary connection laptop computer running Carrier network IMPORTANT: appropriate running CCN bus cable and may prevent will prevent the unit from some starting. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the connector. If conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and cable. Run new C06321 Fig. 24 - Accessory Navigator TM Display cable if necessary. problems Field-Installed Carrier Comfort Network (CCN)® A short with all system in one section elements of the bus can cause on the bus. Accessories Interface The units can be connected to the CCN if desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is field supplied and installed. The system elements are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. (See Fig. 25.) The positive pin of each system element communication connector must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on either side of it. This is also required for the negative and signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at TB. (See Fig. 25.) Consult the CCN Contractor's Manual for further information. Space Temperature Sensor (T-55) The T-55 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT55SPT) is a field-installed accessory. The sensor is installed on a building interior wall to measure room air temperature. The T-55 sensor also includes an override button on the front cover to permit occupants to override the Unoccupied Schedule TBI-T55-1 ........ Sensor Input TBI-T55-2 ........ Sensor Common Space Temperature Sensor (if programmed). (T-56) The T-56 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT56SPT) is a field-installed accessory. This sensor includes a sliding scale on the front cover that permits an occupant to adjust the space temperature set point remotely. The T-56 sensor also includes an override button on the front cover to allow occupants to override the unoccupied schedule TB1-T55-1 ........ Sensor Input TB1-T55-2 ........ Sensor Common TB1-T55-3 ........ Setpoint 56 (if programmed). Offset Input Space Temperature Sensor Each T-58 sensor must have a unique address on the CCN. Each T-58 sensor nmst also be configured with the address of the unit control it is communicating to. (T-58) The T-58 space temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCT58SPT) is a field-installed accessory. The T-58 sensor communicates with the ComfortLink controller, providing space temperature, heating Space Temperature TM and cooling Refer set points, to the installing T-58 and mode operation installation and configuring instructions the T-58 information. for information Sensor Averaging See Fig. 26 for space temperature averaging with T-55 sensors only. If the use of one T-56 sensor is required, refer to Fig. 27. on sensor. CCN BUS RO& TTOP ROO OP BUILDING SUPERVISOR NETWORK OPTIONS ROOFTOP €ROOFTOP _ L_ UNIT _ UNIT LEGEND CCN-- CarrierComfort Network ® CL -- ComfortLink'" Controls HEATING/COOLING CCN SITE REMOTE __[ GATEWAY AUTODIAL UNITS DAV-- DigitalAirVolume HVAC-- Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditoning TCU -- Terminal Control Unit i-TO ADDITIONAL MINALS DAV FAN POWERED MIXING BOX HVAC NON EQUIPMENT CARRIER I COMFORT CONTROLLER AIR DISTRIBUTION-DIGITALAIR VOLUME CONTROL (DAV) (07030 Fig. 25 - CCN System 57 Architecture 1 I I T B 1 -T55 RED RED BLK BLK 7 I I I RED ] RED RED 0BLK ] BLK / BLK TO MAIN BASE BOARD SENSOR L 1 SENSOR 2 SENSOR 3 SENSOR SPACETEMPERATURE AVERAGING --4 T-55 SENSOR APPLICATION TB1 -T55 RED vt D BLK ,1_ RED RED BLK BLK tj TO MAIN BASE BOARD I LEGEND TB SENSOR 1 I tj SENSOR 3 SENSOR 2 I -- Terminal Block RED -- Factory Wiring -- Field Wiring RED 41 BLK I la tw SENSOR 4 SENSOR I L BLK RED • 5 SENSOR 6 RED ® BLK I BLK SENSOR 7 I SENSOR 8 SENSOR 9 SPACETEMPERATURE AVERAGING --9 T-55 SENSOR APPLICATION C07032 Fig. 26 - Space TB1-T55 ] ] RED I I I I I I Temperature Sensor RED RED BLK BLK Averaging 7 I RED RED 0BLK BLK VVV- L T-55 SENSOR 1 T-55 SENSOR 2 BLK TO MAIN BASE BOARD I F T T-55 SENSOR 3 TB1-T55 WHT [] TO MAIN BASE BOARD C07033 Fig. 27 - Space Temperature Sensor Averaging with 3 T-55 58 Sensors and One T-56 Sensor IMPORTANT: Carrier Accessory Kits There are specific accessory kits sold accessories. These kits vary based manufacture date, and duct orientation. for various field installed on model, size, voltage, Some of these kits include Economizer, Power Exhaust, and Electric Heat. Refer to the Controls Quick Set-Up section for configuration and more information on these accessories. Two-Position Damper The two-position outdoor air damper accessory usage depends on model size and return duct orientation. This accessory wires directly into the low voltage circuit for the indoor fan control. No other control configuration Indoor Air is needed. Quality The indoor air quality (IAQ) sensor (part no. 33ZCSENCO2) is a field-installed accessory which measures CO2 levels in the air. When installing this sensor, an ECB board must be installed and the unit must be configured for IAQ use by setting Configuration-+AIR.Q-+IA.CF to a value of 1, 2, or 3. See the Indoor Air Quality section for more information. TB1-2 ....... 4-20 TB1-3 ....... Sensor mA Input ...... 24 VAC Output TB1-C ...... Common The outdoor air quality (OAQ) sensor is a field-installed accessory that measures ('02 levels in the air. When installing this sensor, an ECB board must be installed and the unit must be configured for OAQ use by setting Configuration-+AIR.Q-+OA.CF to a value of I or 2. See the Indoor Air Quality section for more information. ....... 4-20 TBI-3 ....... Sensor ...... 24 VAC Output ...... Common detectors can detect smoke CRSMKDET003A00) are field-installed in either or supply accessories. the return and return CRSMKSUP002A00). When installing must be configured for fire Configuration-+UNIT-+FS.SW closed (2). to normally Shutdown-1 .... Dry Contact TB1-Fire Shutdown-2 .... Discrete TB1-C Filter These air air either detector, shutdown by TB1-Fire TB1-R Sensors enthalpy accessories (part no. CRENTSNG002A00 and CRENTDIF002A00) are field-installed accessories. The first accessory (outdoor air only) detemfines when the enthalpy is low relative to a fixed reference. Adding the second accessory (return air) compares the enthalpy between the outdoor and return airstreams. In each case, the enthalpy 4 to 20 mA signals are converted to a switch output which is read by the ECB. When installing this enthalpy-based accessory, the unit control must be by configured for setting Configuration-+ECON-+EN.SW to normally open (1). Normal status is an active switch which tells the control that enthalpy is LOW. The actual switch terminal LOW is normally closed. Refer to the Enthalpy Kit Installation on its installation. Instructions Return/Supply Air Temperature for more information Sensor The temperature sensor (part no. 33ZCSENSAT) is a field-installed accessory which may be installed on the common return air duct section. When installing the supply duct SAT, the unit must be configured by setting Configuration--+UNIT--+SATJI to ENBL. A SAT sensor in the supply duct is the preferred configuration for systems with Carrier variable volume and temperature (VVT®) accessory controls. Humidistat levels. The humidistat terminal board. The (GND) Smoke Detectors The smoke The The Space Humidistat (part no. --HL--38MG-029) mounted device with an adjustable setpoint to control Common TB1-C Enthalpv Space mA Input TB1-R to be is internal to the unit. A supply duct SAT measurement is valid for heating mode display while the factory-standard internal SAT is not valid for heating due to its location upstream of the heating (GND) Outdoor Air Quality TBI-4 on TB1 are NOT and/or the common supply air duct near the unit. The duct supply air temperature (SAT) may be used to replace the SAT sensor that Common TB1-R The Fan Status terminals used. detectors (part (part no. no. the unit setting open (1) or normally Source Input ................ 24 VAC Output ................ Common to Board (GND) Status The filter status accessory (part no. CRSTATUS002B00) is a field-installed accessory. This accessory detects plugged filters. When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for filter status by setting Configuration-+UNIT-+FL.SW to normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the preferred configuration. Filter status wires are pre-run in the unit harness and located near the switch installation location. Refer to the Filter Accessory Installation Instructions for more information. Fan Status input is provided Space Humidity Configuration-_UNIT-_RH.SW, identifies normally closed status of this input at LOW TB1-R TB1-W2 Space ...... ..... Humidity 24 VAC Dry Contact Discrete is a wall humidity on the field connection Switch configuration, the normally humidity. open or Source Input to Board Sensor The space relative humidity sensor (part no. 33ZCSENDRH-01 duct mount or 33ZCSENSRH-01 wall mount) is a field-installed accessory. The space relative humidity (RHS) may be selected for use if the outdoor air quality sensor (OAQ) is not used economizer board is installed. When installing the humidity sensor, the unit must be configured by Configuration -_UNIT-_RH.S to YES. TBI-1 ....... 24 VDC Loop TB1-4 ....... 4-20 mA Input Power Signal SERVICE ELECTRICALSHOCK HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could cause personal iniury or death. The fan status accessory (part no. CRSTATUS003B00) is a field-installed accessory. This accessory detects when the indoor fan is blowing air. When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for fan status by setting Configuration-+UNIT-+FN.SW to normally open (1) or normally closed (2). Normally open (1) is the preferred configuration. Fan status wires are pre-run in the unit harness and located near the switch installation location. Refer to the Fan Accessory Installation Instructions for more information. Before performing service or maintenance operations on unit, turn off main power switch to unit and install lockout tag. Ensure electrical service to rooftop unit agrees with voltage and amperage listed on the unit rating plate. 59 and an relative setting Remove Surface Surface UNITOPERATION ANDSAFETY HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could cause personal iniury, death and/or equipment damage. Puron ® (R-410A) refrigerant systems operate at higher pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equipment. loaded Loaded fibers Fibers or dirt should protected coil) if the tool is applied IMPORTANT: Use of a water against loaded a surface Clean A periodic Water clean HAZARD result in personal 1. Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, or maintenance can cause property damage, personal iniury, or loss of life. Refer to the User's Information Manual provided with this unit for more details. 2. Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. What to do if you smell gas: 1. DO NOT try to light any appliance. 2. DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use any phone in your building. 3. IMMEDIATELY call your gas supplier from a neighbor's phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions. reach your gas supplier, call the fire Routine rinse fin edges. of Round-Tube the manual round-tube copper/copper interior result in personal of each heating season and as operating conditions require. Remove and/or side panels for access to unit interior. Coil Maintenance cleaning as environmentally sound coil life of coils. This cleaner is pre-coated, the Totaline sound coil cleaner as described below. Coil be part of the unit's regularly scheduled Avoid the use of: prior to painting washers water for cleaning insulation. discouraged Totaline agent that will such as electrical coil cleaner and a is non-flammable, USDA accepted not harm the coil or surrounding wiring, painted metal surfaces, or Use of non-recommended coil cleaners is strongly since coil and unit durability could be affected. Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Application Equipment • 21/2 gallon garden sprayer • water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle gas valve(s). at beginning are maintenance procedures to ensure long life of the coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduced durability in the environment. biodegradable components HAZARD could Monthly coils, including standard aluminum, or E-coated coils be cleaned with environmentally cleaning should DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in corrosion and damage to the unit. Cleaning unit for coils that available from Carrier Replacement parts division as part number P902-0301 for a one gallon container, and part number P902-0305 for a 5 gallon container. It is recommended that all []NIT Inspect loaded low velocity • coil brighteners Disconnect gas piping from unit when pressure testing at pressure greater than 0.5 psig. Pressures greater than 0.5 psig will cause gas valve damage resulting in hazardous condition. If gas valve is subjected to pressure greater than 0.5 psig, it must be replaced before use. When pressure testing field-supplied gas piping at pressures of 0.5 psig or less, a unit connected to such piping must be isolated by closing Surface Coil Surfaces Monthly cleaning with Totaline® cleaner is essential to extend the • acid cleaning this warning to using is very beneficial Totaline environmentally sound hypoallergenic, non-bacterial, Failure to follow injury or death. prior hose, and dirt into the Rinse water Cleaning • poor quality EXPLOSION as a garden efforts more difficult. removed stream to avoid damaging the described below is recommended. • high pressure FIRE, such applied in coastal or industrial environments. However, it is very important that the water rinse is made with very low velocity water Failure to follow this warning could injury, death and/or property damage. 4. If you cannot department. a vacuum across the fins. stream, coil will drive the fibers coil. This will make cleaning Periodic EXPLOSION with in the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can be easily damaged (fin edges can be easily bent over and damage to the coating of a fibers must be completely clean water rinse. FIRE, be removed cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft non-metallic bristle brush may be used. In either case, the tool should be applied and cooling Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic cleaners should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor coils of any kind. These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out of the coil and can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube interface where dissimilar materials are in contact. If there is dirt below the surface of the coil, use the Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner as described above. unit top panel and Cleaning Recommendation Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. The following maintenance and cleaning procedures are recommended as part of the routine maintenance activities to extend the life of the coil. 60 UNITRELIABILITY HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in reduced unit performance. High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden hose, or compressed air should never be used to clean a coil. The force of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and increase airside pressure drop. Totaline Environmentally Instructions 1. Proper eye recommended 2. Remove cleaner Sound Coil Cleaner INDUCED ROLLOUT Application MOTOR protection such as safety during nfixing and application. all surface as described loaded fibers glasses and dirt with is -COMBUSTION FAN HOUSING a vacuum above. 3. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a low velocity garden hose, being careful not to bend fins. 4. Mix Totaline environmentally sound 21/2 gallon garden sprayer according included with the temperature is 100 ° F. IMPORTANT: enzymatic cleaner. The optimum water in excess of 130°F, as the will be destroyed. garden cleaner spraying sprayer nozzle close to finned with a vertical, up-and-down in horizontal pattern to nfininfize sound coil finned area, areas and apply motion. potential cleaner 8. Interior cleaned. and thoroughly exterior 9. Finned surfaces for 10 nfinutes. 11. Thoroughly penetrates finned should 10. Ensure surfaces are Reapplying cleaner saturation is achieved. areas remain not as must wet with allowed needed rinse all surfaces deep into be Drain cleaning Filters Clean or replace at start of each heating and cooling season, or more often if operating conditions require. Refer to unit Installation Instructions for type and size. Outdoor-Air Inlet Screens Main Burner (48PD) At the beginning of each heating season, inspect for deterioration or blockage due to corrosion or other causes. Observe the main burner flames. Refer to Main Burners section. to dry before rinsing. to ensure 10-nfinute with low velocity clean water nozzle. Flue Gas Passageways (48PD) The flue collector box and heat exchanger cells may be inspected by opening heat section access door, flue box cover, and main burner assembly. (See Fig. 28.) Refer to Main Burners section for burner removal sequence. If cleaning is required, clean tubes with a wire brush. Use Caution with ceranfic heat exchanger baffles. When installing retaining clip, be sure the center leg of the clip extends inward toward baffle. (See Fig. 29.) Pan To clean the condensate season. In CERAMIC BAFFLE pan: 1. Disconnect condensate drain connection. drain 2. Remove and clean trap. 3. Remove 4 screws securing unit. Save screws system from condensate side CLIP or bottom pan access cover to and panel. pan out from unit and clean. of non-corrosive plastic. Use a nfild heavy deposits of dirt and grime. 5. Replace pan in unit. 6. Replace condensate cleaner Pan is made NOTE: One baffle to remove and clip will 8. Connect pan access and prime condensate condensate be in each cover drainage trap. system. upper tube of the heat exchanger. C07260 Fig. 29 - Removing with 4 screws Baffles saved from Step 3. 7. Re-attach Section finned solution Check and clean each year at the start of the cooling winter, keep drains and traps dry. 4. Slide condensate (07037 Gas Heating Clean screens with steam or hot water and a mild detergent. Do not use throwaway filters in place of screens. See unit installation instructions for quantity and size. thoroughly using downward rinsing motion of water spray Protect fins from damage from the spray nozzle. Condensate / MAINBURNERSECTION Avoid for fin damage. 7. Ensure areas. VALVE solution 5. Thoroughly apply Totaline® environmentally cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including tube sheets and coil headers. 6. Hold HEATEXCHANGER SECTION coil cleaner in a to the instructions Fig. 28 - Typical Do NOT USE activity MAtN GAS t Combustion-Air Blower Heat Exchanger Ceramic and Clips (48PD) Clean periodically to assure proper airflow and heating efficiency. Inspect blower wheel every fall and periodically during heating season. For the first heating season, inspect blower wheel bi-monthly 61 to determine proper cleaning frequency. Toinspect blowerwheel,openheatsection door.Usinga flashlight, lookintotheflueexhaust ducttoinspect. If cleaning is required, remove motorandwheelassembly by removing the screws holding theflueboxcovertothefluebox.Remove the screws holding theinducer housing totheinletplate. Thewheel canthenberemoved fromthemotorshaftandcleaned witha detergent orsolvent. Replace thewheel ontothemotor shaft inthe correct position andreassemble thefluecover ontothefluebox. 4. Disconnect fan the electrical deck (supply installed). 5. Fan wires connected air thermistor and Wires may be damaged deck can now be to the slide-out fan status switch if if not disconnected. slid out to access serviceable components. Lubrication Compressors Each compressor is charged with the correct amount of oil at the factory. UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure unit. to follow this caution DO NOT SLIDE FAN may result DECK OUT in damage PAST to the THE FAN DECK STOP. If further access is required, the fan deck must be supported. Make sure plugs and wiring are not pinched between fan housing and unit sheet metal post. UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to unit 6. To replace fan deck to operating back into the unit. Secure with components. The compressor is in a Puron refrigerant system removed and uses a electrical 8. Close fan section 9. Restore slide fan deck no. 10 screws in Step 3. 7. Re-attach polyolester (POE) oil. This oil is extremely hygroscopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POE oils can absorb 15 times as much water as other oils designed for HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere. position, the two power wires. access door. to unit. VFD MOTOR Polyolester (POE) compressor lubricants are known to cause long term damage to some synthetic roofing materials. Exposure, even if immediately cleaned up, may cause roofing materials to become MOUNTING BASE, brittle (leading to cracking) within a year. When performing any service which may risk exposure of compressor oil to the roof, take appropriate precautions to protect roofing. Procedures which risk oil leakage include leaks, and replacing compressor replacement, repairing refrigerant components. To prepare SCREW (RIDDEN) refrigerant rooftop: FAN DECK STOP FAN PULLEY 1. Cover extended roof work area with an impermeable plastic dropcloth or tarp. Make sure a 10 x 10 ft area around the work area is covered. PULLEY SCREW 2. Cover area in front of the unit service panel with SLIDE_OUT FAN DECK a terry cloth shop towel to absorb lubricant spills and prevent run-offs. Towel will also protect dropcloth from tears caused C08661 by tools or components. 3. Place terry cloth Fig. 30 - Evaporator-Fan shop towel inside components to be serviced bottom of the unit. 4. Perform the required Fan Shaft of any oil contaminated sealed bearings. Economizer Air or Manual If blade adjustment installation instructions, units is Outside required, a slide-out motor, pulleys, in this section, To change fan speeds: No Using belt. field refer permanently unit or accessory tighten and Replacement fan deck for easy 3. Remove of the 6. Replace belt, bearings and VFD. To service perform the following procedure: access two no. 10 screws Save screws. door. at front of slide-out bolts bolts and plate, movable-pulley in the mounting slide flange setscrew. flange setscrew. at nearest (See Appendix each full turn of pulley servicing in Appendix D. supply. on the 4 carriage adjusting shown motor base. and remove (See Fig. 31.) fan speed increases load on motor. Do not exceed speed specified in Appendix D. See Appendix D for air quantity limits. Damper to nuts Adjustment set for speed 4. Screw movable flange toward fixed flange to increase speed and away from fixed flange to decrease speed. Increasing 1. Turn off unit power. 2. Open the fan section are factory 5. Set movable Fan Service feature pulleys 3. Loosen motors have is necessary. indoor-fan components per Fan Performance Fan motor Motor Bearings The condenser-fan and evaporator-fan sealed bearings, so no field lubrication The material Evaporator 1. Shut off unit power and Evaporator-Fan Evaporator the 2. Loosen permanently Adjustment under through Bearings The indoor fan has lubrication is necessary. Condenser directly spills service. 5. Remove an dispose local codes. Indoor the unit to prevent Motor fan deck. (See Fig. 30.) 62 belts. flange.) keyway maximum of pulley D for speed hub and change for 7.Realign fanandmotor pulleys: a.Loosen fanpulley setscrews. b.Slide fanpulley along fanshaft. c.Make angular alignment byloosening motor from mounting plate. 8.Tighten belts. 9.Restore power tounit. (See Fig. 32.) Lift out the bracket clear from the fan sled. 4. With all the wires stilled attached assembly so it is parallel 5. Pull the VFD assembly in a secure flat surface. the pulley to the VFD, wiring Wires turn the VFD to the front of the fan sled and place diagram are marked shows the wiring with VFD terminal wiring to labels and connections. 7. Remove the 4 screws holding and remove the VFD. MOVABLE FLANGE side is with the fan sled. 6. Disconnect the power, ground, RJ45, and control the VFD making sure to note their connections. IMPORTANT: STRAIGHTEDGE OR STRING MUST BE PARALLEL WITH BELT when the VFD to the mount bracket 8. Remove the replacement VFD cover and install jumper wires provided with it as shown on the unit wiring diagram. If jumpers are not remove them from MOTOR AND FAN SHAFTS MUST BE PARALLEL jumpers. SETSCREWS_ 9. Set AII and AI2 DIP switches to the U (oft) direction indicated on the plastic housing near the DIP switch. FIXED FLANGE 10. Replace 12. Connect the wiring the wiring Evaporator Alignment Fan Belt Tension and Adjustment Adjustment 15. Make fan Evaporator 3. Loosen 4. Move motor Motor to mounting mounting adjuster service and Replacement motor as shown section above. in sure the bracket plate to adjust to proper 18. Follow 6-9. belt tension. belts. Adjust if necessary. plate bolts to lock motor in proper VFD, refer to to the back of the fan sled. s pulley and control the Evaporator 19. Power up VFD Appendix B. (See Fig. belt. mounting 17. Secure power plate bolts. for proper belt alignment. 6. Tighten position bolts may be used to tighten 30.) Do not overtighten 5. Check assembly side U bend towards 16. Install the 2 screws in the bracket deck Fan Service motor as it was on the previous fan sled and pull the assembly 1. Turn off unit power. out it to the mounting 14. Turn the VFD assembly lengthwise with the fan housing, making sure the screw side of the bracket lines up with the screw holes on the fan sled. To adjust belt tension: 2. Slide to secure diagram. 13. Move the VFD C06041 as the VFD with the new one. 11. Install the 4 screws in the VFD bracket. SINGLE-GROOVE Fig. 31 - Evaporator-Fan provided with the replacement VFD, the defective one or field supply the of the to secure it to the fan sled. wires with new wire ties. fan service and replacement and set up its parameters IMPORTANT: reinstalled. If fan deck For VFD and maintenance, service is clear the screw side. stops were per Table removed, refer to Appendix Steps 40 in they must be B. position. 7. Return fan deck back into operating 8. Restore power Variable '[*t/qff&' position. to unit. Frequency Drive (VFD) Replacement The 48/50PD units are equipped with a VFD that is mounted behind the blower housing on the fan sled. The VFD's remote display is mounted on the front of the fan housing for easier access. The VFD is mounted to a plate which is mounted to the fan sled. When accessing the VFD or to remove the VFD, follow the Evaporator fan following steps: service and replacement IMPORTANT: If fan deck stop screws access, the front of the fan deck MUST Steps 1-5 are removed and the for further Fig. 32 - VFD Mount 1. Remove the 2 screws holding the VFD's mount bracket to the fan sled. The horizontal cross section of the bottom half of the mount bracket is shown (08662 BE SUPPORTED. on Fig. 32. Condenser-Fan the VFD display/keypad 2. Remove 3. With the VFD still attached, remove the mount bracket 3. Adjust from 4. Tighten the fan sled. To do this requires a slight lift on the screw side then a push towards the pulley side of the fan sled. condenser-fan fan height as shown setscrews 5. Turn on power 63 Section supply. cover, and fan) and loosen at the top of the fan scroll. Cross Adjustment 1. Shut off unit power 2. Cut the wire ties holding the VFD power wires to the fan housing and the two wire ties holding the control wires to Bracket assembly (grille, in Fig. 33. and replace condenser-fan to unit. motor, fan hub setscrews. assembly. motor 3. Connect a nitrogen open until system 4. Close service During this throughout 5. Repeat (08570 Fig. 33 - Condenser-Fan Verify Sensor Verify Performance that thermistor, correctly. Marquee These display transducer, and switch inputs are reading values can be accessed through the Scrolling in the Temperatures, Pressures, and Inputs menus. Some values will depend on configuration choices. Refer to the Control Set Up Checklist completed for the specific unit installation and to the configuration tables in Appendix A. Economizer Operation During Power Failure and regulator the system, to system and is 2 psig. and allow dry system nitrogen to stand will absorbing be for 1 hr. able to diffuse moisture. System of contanfinants Refrigerant Amount valve time, this procedure. amounts Adjustment cylinder pressure will then contain nfinimal and water vapor. Charge of refrigerant charge is listed on unit nameplate. Refer to Carrier GTAC II; Module 5; Charging, Recovery, Recycling, Reclamation section for charging methods and procedures. panels nmst procedure. be in place when unit is operating during and Unit charging Puron® (R-410A) refrigerant systems should be charged with liquid refrigerant. Use a commercial type metering device in the manifold hose. Dampers have a spring return. In event of power failure, dampers will return to fully closed position until power is restored. Do not manually operate damper motor: UNIT Evacuation Proper evacuation of the system will remove noncondensables ensure a tight, dry system before charging. Evacuate from high and low side ports. Never use the system compressor vacuum pump. Refrigerant evacuated to 500 nficrons. nitrogen. The two possible methods and the triple evacuation method. Deep Vacuum are the deep vacuum AND SAFETY HAZARD cause personal Puron (R-410A) refrigerant systems operate at higher pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equipment. Gauge set, hoses, and recovery system nmst be designed to handle Puron refrigerant. If unsure about equipment, consult the equipment manufacturer. be dry method Method The deep vacuum pulling a minimum capable vacuum and both as a tubes and indoor coil should Always break a vacuum with OPERATION Failure to follow this warning could injury, death and/or equipment damage. method vacuum requires a vacuum pump capable of of 500 nficrons and a vacuum gauge of accurately measuring this vacuum depth. The deep method is the most positive way of assuring a system is tree of air and liquid water. (See Fig. 340 IMPORTANT: contanfinants. No Charge Use standard weigh 5OOO in in the the 4000 Charge LEAK IN 3500 refrigerant specified techniques. After amount refrigerant of Verify charge using the charging in the IMPORTANT: as it may contain System evacuating nameplate). the System." 4500 Do not use recycled evacuating system, (refer to unit chart via "Charge in System The circuit must be running in normal cooling 69 mode 3000 rC © 2500 2000 VACUUM TIGHT TOO WET 1500 1000 TIGHT DRY SYSTEM 5OO 2 3 4 5 Evacuation 6 system does not contain 1. Pump system to continue 2. Close Graph should only be used when vacuum down to 28-in. of mercury and any liquid water. Proceed down operating service valves to 28-in. air quantity limits for cooling fans must be on and running Cooling outdoor Service fans. liquid Method The triple evacuation method pump is capable of pumping at max of mercury for an additional as follows: and allow 15 nfinutes. and shut off vacuum Test Outdoor pressure gauge and indoor The VFD must be airflow must be within (See Appendix at high speed. Fan Override function D). All Use the to start all and temperature-sensing device is required. Charging is accomplished by ensuring the proper amount of liquid subcooling. Connect pressure gauge to the compressor discharge service valve. Connect temperature sensing device to the (:06264 Fig. 34 - Deep Vacuum speed at 100%. specified outdoor accurate fan capacity running An MINUTES Triple with the compressor pump. pump line between the condenser and the TXV (thermostatic expansion valve), and insulate it so that ambient temperature does not affect reading. Use the cooling charging chart (Fig. 35-36) to deternfine if additional charge is needed or if some charge needs to be removed from the system. To Use Use the the Coolinu Charuinu temperature and Chart pressure readings, and find the intersection point on the cooling charging chart. If intersection point on chart is above line, add refrigerant. If intersection point on chart is below line, carefully recover some of the charge. suction pressure as charge is adjusted. 64 Recheck TheTXVis setto maintain between 10 superheat at the compressors. The valves be adjusted. Do not use A TXV designed R410A OUTDOOR and 15 degrees of Table 26 -- Altitude are factory set and cannot for use with R-22. 48PG03-07 REFRIGERANT FAN M UST BE OPERA TING ON HIGH Compensation* SPEED ELEVATION (It) NATURAL GAS ORIFICEt PROPANE ORIFICEt 0-1,999 45 52 2,000 47 52 3,000 47 53 4,000 47 53 5,000 48 53 6,000 48 53 7,000 48 53 8,000 49 54 9,000 49 54 10,000 50 54 11,000 51 54 12,000 51 55 13,000 52 55 14,000 52 160 140 120 lOO 80 ¸ 60 *As the height Therefore, t 150 200 250 300 Compressor 350 400 Discharge 450 Pressure, 500 550 sea level heat input reduction 20 above increases, rate should there be reduced 56 is less oxygen at higher per cubic altitudes. foot of air. Includes a 4% input per each 1000 ft. Orifices available through your Carrier dealer. 6OO [psig] Gas Valve Adjustment (07040 Fig. 35 - Charging R410A OUTDOOR FAN M UST Chart-- 48/50PD05 OPERA opens and closes in response When power is supplied to valve terminals the main valve opens to its preset position. REFRIGERANT BE The gas valve limit control. TING ON HIGH to the thermostat or W2 (High Fire) and C1, SPEED The regular 160 To adjust factory setting is stamped 1. Set unit at setting 140 on the valve body. regulator: for no call for heat. 2. Turn main gas valve to OFF position. 3. Remove 120 1/8-in. connection. pipe Install plug a suitable from manifold pressure pressure-measuring tap device. 4. Set main gas valve to ON position. lOO 5. Set thermostat 6. Remove 80 ¸ at setting screw cap to call for heat. covering regulator adjustment screw. (See Fig. 37.) 7. Turn adjustment counterclockwise 60 screw clockwise to increase to decrease pressure. The in. wg on sizes 03-14 8. Once desired pressure call for heat, pressure-measuring 20 150 200 250 300 Compressor 350 400 Discharge 450 Pressure, 500 550 600 and 3.00 on size 16-28. is established, set unit setting screw cap. [psig] HIGH Puron® i Chart for no turn off main gas valve, remove device, and replace 1/8-in. pipe plug and (07041 Fig. 36 - Charging pressure or setting is 3.50 REGULATOR ADJUSTMENT 48/50PD06 SCREW LOW REGULATOR ADJUSTMENTSCREW Refrigerant OUTLETPRESSURE Puron refrigerant operates at 50 to 70 percent higher pressures than R-22. Be sure that servicing equipment and replacement components are designed to operate with Puron refrigerant. Do not mix with components that have been used with other refrigerants. Puron refrigerant, as with other HFCs, is only compatible with POE oils. Recovery cylinder systems should commercial-type service pressure rating HI (W2) MALE must be 400 psig. Puron INLET PRESSURE TAP (PLUGGED) be charged with liquid refrigerant. Use a metering device in the manifold hose. Manifold sets should be 750 psig high-side psig low-side retard. Use hoses rating. Leak detectors should and 200 psig low-side with 520 with 750 psig service pressure be designed to detect HFC MAIN (Wl) MALE SPADE TERMINAL SPADE TERMINAL (08663 Fig. 37 - 48PD refrigerant. 65 Gas Valve 9. Rotate High Altitude For high altitude applications greater than 2,000 ft the heat input rate should be reduced. The higher the altitude is above sea level, the less oxygen is in the air. See Table 8 for orifice sizing. A high altitude kit is available Main Burners to convert unit for altitudes up to 7,000 Cleaning ft. 2. Shut off power away assembly Adjustment order to prevent burner assembly. the outer burners main gas valve. in Main Burner gas flow from To prevent are returned exiting the sides of the ignition problems, make sure to their original position when done servicing. 3. Using access door. gas piping to the right, 2. Inspect burners, and if dirty, remove burners from rack. The two outer burners have the flame crossover closed off in to unit. 3. Open gas section 4. Disconnect manual and assembly and lift burner/manifold 1. Remove burner rack from unit as described Removal section above. For all applications, main burners are factory set and should require no adjustment. Main Burner Removal 1. Shut off (field-supplied) the burner/manifold from the flue extension out of unit. 5. Remove wires from gas valve. 6. Remove wires from rollout 7. Remove sensor 8. Remove plate. 2 screws that hold the burner brush, clean burners and crossover port as 4. Adjust spark gap. (See Fig. 38.) 5. Reinstall burners on rack. switch. wire and ignitor a soft required. from gas valve inlet. 6. Reinstall cable from IGC board. assembly burner rack as described above. to vestibule MA×.(_P. t I B E-E SECTION SCALE SPARK 2:1 GAP D_ _C 0.120 TO 0.140" SPARK GAP [3.05 TO 3.56] _ ............ I I r / SECTION O-O SECTION SCALE A-A SECTION 1:1 SCALE B-B SECTION / D-D 1:1 C06269 Fig. 38 - Spark Gap Adjustment Filter Drier High-Pressure Replace filter drier whenever refrigerant system is exposed to atmosphere. Only use factory specified liquid-line filter driers with If the high-pressure working pressures no less than 650 psig. Do not install a suction-line filter drier in liquid line. A liquid-line filter drier designed for use with Puron® refrigerant is required on every unit. Protective Devices Compressor Overcurrent Current The Sensor purpose switch trips, the compressor will shut sensor (3-phase units only) will not detect Sensor section below for more information. (CS) (3-Phase Units of the CS is to detect down current. Only) losses in compressor power. a loss in compressor power, unit control locks out for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, the alarm will automatically reset. If this alarm occurs 3 times consecutively, the compressor will remain locked out until an alarm reset is initiated Each compressor has internal line break motor protection. Overtemperature Each compressor has an internal protector excessively high discharge gas temperatures. and the current See the Current After detecting the compressor Rotation Switch to protect it against via CCN or manually via the Scrolling Alarms and Alerts section for more details). IMPORTANT: 48/50PD, 66 The but reserved current sensor for future is not Marquee currently implementation. display used (see in the Evaporator Fan Motor Protection ] Cut CompressorBase Sound / Indoor-fan motors less than 5 hp are equipped with internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection. Protection devices reset automatically. Disconnect and lock out power when servicing motor. Indoor-fan motors manual reset, calibrated 5 hp trip, and larger magnetic resetting Condenser-Fan Each or increase the cause the and Remove the breaker. motor is internally protected against are located in the control box and feed power condenser fan motors. Always replace blown fuses correct size fuse as indicated on the unit fuse label. to the with the (08664 Saturated Suction Pressure (SSP) Fig. 39 - Base If the SSP for a particular circuit is reading below the alarm set point for an extended period of time, that circuit will be shut down. After 15 minutes, the alarm will automatically reset. If this alarm occurs 3 times consecutively, the circuit will remain locked out until an alarm reset is initiated via CCN or manually via the Scrolling Marquee display (see Alarms and Alerts section for more Control Relief Devices units have relief devices to protect against damage excessive pressures (i.e., fire). These devices protect low side and are located at the suction line service joint during brazing operations near joint. Compressor Sound from the high and port. Protect trouble before annoyance The compressor jacket is held closed Velcro tape. To remove the compressor Diagnostic The MBB, loads and Since the ranges the caused by the loading around jacket, the compressor by separate the Velcro along the side and top of the compressor. Slide the jacket toward the back of the compressor to remove the jacket. Make sure the is reinstalled The compressor after servicing base shield or replacing is accessible when the compressor. the compressor is removed. To remove the base shield without removing the compressor, remove one front compressor mounting bolt and grommet. At the three remaining compressor mounting grommets, cut the sound shield so that the base shield can be slid in the direction of the compressor mounting bolt and grommet that was removed. (See Fig. 39.) Cut replacement base shield along dotted lines as shown in Fig. 39 and reinstall in reverse direction. When installing the base Reinstall compressor shield, place the soft side mounting grommet and bolt. facing / 24-V 1 resetting. Parts A complete list of replacement Carrier distributor upon request. shell of the compressor and the base shield is installed between the bottom of the compressor and the unit base pan. The sound shield sound shield reduces the speech and unloading of the compressor. Shield parts may be obtained from upward. 67 any LEDs ECB, AUXI, IGC and DSC control boards have LED lights for diagnostic purposes. The meanings and error codes be found in the the troubleshooting section of this manual. Shield reduces the difference in noise levels as the compressor unloads in the frequency ranges of 200 to 2000 Hz. human speech occurs in the 200 to 2000 Hz frequency Sound Each control circuit is protected against overcurrent by a 3.2 amp circuit breaker. Breaker can be reset. If it trips, determine cause of The 48/50PD units are equipped with a compressor sound shield. The sound shield has two parts, the compressor jacket encloses the jacket Circuit, Replacement details). All this compressor Slide Compressor Base Sound Shield in Ibis direction. overtemperature. Fuses ] lines mounting bolt and grommet at this location. Motor Protection condenser-fan alom, doiled are equipped with a circuit breaker and overcurrent protection. Do not bypass connections size of the breaker to correct trouble. Determine correct it before Shield can I APPENDIX A - LOCAL Table ITEM DISPLAY 27 -- MODE EXPANSION RANGE - RUN UNITS RUN STATUS VIEW STATUS CON View of Run Status HVAC Mode Status CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE STATUS Auto HVAC AND CCN TABLES CON WRITE STATUS POINT DISPLAY (VIEW = Display 1 =Disabled only) HVACMODE 2=Fan Only 3=Cool 4=Heat OCC SAT Yes/No xxx..x ALRM Currently Occupied Supply Air Temperature Current Alarms & Alerts TIME Time xx.xx MBB Software Version Numbers CESR 131459xx- xx VERS of Day OCCUPIED SAT DISP ALRMALRT dF xx hh.mm TIMECOPY VERSIONS (xx- xx in MODEL NUMBER 01 MODEL MODEL NUMBER NUMBER 02 03 MODEL NUMBER 04 table) ECB AUX CESR 131249xx- xx CESR131333-xx-xx MARQ CESR131171-xx-xx MODE Control SYS HVAC Modes MODEDISP SYS SYS Unit operation disabled Unit operation enabled Service test enabled HVAC Operation Ventilation Cooling only) Unoccupied Free Cooling Heating Remote HVAC Mode Disable (table only) HVACMODE TEXT Yes/No (table only) HVACDOWN XXX.X XXX.X CSP EFF HSP-EFF Currently Occupied Timed Override in Effect Yes/No OCCUPIED Yes/No D.LMT Linkage Demand Yes/No Yes/No MODETOVR MODELINK C.LOC H.LOC Compressor OAT Lockout Heat OAT Lockout E.LOC Econo HV.DN EFEC EFEH Cool Setpoint in Effect Heat Setpoint in Effect OCC T.OVR LINK COOL Active Limit In Effect Cool OAT Lockout Cooling SASP forcible Yes/No Yes/No ECONLOCK ^F dF Cool Supply Air Setpoint Cool Demand SASP Reset XXX.X dF XXX.X Dehumidifying XXX.X ^F ^F XXX % XXX.X Point SASP Reset COOL DMD SA CqTLPT SASP CD RESET RH RESET FAINSPEED F.SPD Commanded Fan Speed CMRA Compressor Compressor A Feedback A Timeguard On/Off Capacity xxx sec % TIMGD A CAPACITY MAX CAPC MIN -CAPC xxx COMP A MAX.C Max Compressor xxx % MIN.C LMT.C Min Compressor Capacity Max Capacity In Effect xxx xxx % % CAP-LIMIT SST.A Sat. Suction Temp A Suction Pressure A xxx.x dF SST xxx.x xxx.x SCRA Sat. Condenser Temp A Condenser Pressure A psig dF xxx.x psig SSP A SCT A SCP-A OFC.1 Outdoor On/Off SSRA SCT.A H EAT Capacity Fan 1 Relay OFC-1 HEATDISP Status Demand DMD.H AVL.H Available REQ.H MAX.H Requested Heating Stages Max Allowed Heat Stages X X REQHSTGS MAXHSTGS LMT.H Max Heat Stage X HSTGLIMT F.SPD Commanded Heat Stage XXX.X Heating Heat Stage Stages In Effect Fan Speed 1 Relay XXX 1 Timequard xxx Heat Stage 2 Relay TG.H2 Heat Stage Economizer 2 Timequard Status xxx % FANSPEED sec HEAT TIMED forcible 1 ml HEAT TIMGD sec H2 ECOND!SP EC.CP Econo xxx % ECONOCMD EC.AP Econo Actual Position Min Position in Effect xxx % ECONOPOS xxx % IAQ Level (switch) High/Low MIN POS IAQI-N (sensor) XXXX EC.MP IAQ.S IAQ IAQ Level OAT ENTH Outdoor Outdoor OAQ OAQ Level PE.1 PE.2 Power Power A1 CCH Component Compressor Crankcase IDF OFC.1 HRS Position HEAT DMD AVLHSTGS On/Off On/Off Commanded ^F X HT.2 ECON Air Temperature Enthalpy Switch (sensor) Exhaust Exhaust forcible A Heating Heating HT.1 TG.H1 forcible COMPLOCK HEATLOCK XXX.X Compressor 3 COOLD!SP Cooling Demand Supply Air Control TG .A CAPC 1 MODEDMDL Yes/No Status DMD.C SA.CP SR.CD SR.RH TEXT1 TEXT2 (tab_ only) SYS MODE TEXT3 (tab_ only) HVACMODE TEXT HVACMODE-TEXT-2 Disabled (fan- MODE MODE 1 Relay 2 Relay Run Hours A1 Run Hours Htr Run Hours XXX.X IAQ ppm dF OA TEMP ENTHALPY High/Low XXXX OAQ ppm PE 1 PE 2 On/Off On/Off STRTHOUR XXXXX.XX hours HR A1 forcible XXXXX.XX hours HR CCH Indoor Fan Run Hours Outdoor Fan 1 Run Hours XXXXX.XX HR IDF HR OFC forcible forcible XXXXX.XX hours hours 1 forcible HT.1 Heat Stage XXXXX.XX hours HR HTR 1 HT.2 PEA Heat Stage 2 Run Hours Power Exhaust1 Run Hours XXXXX.XX HR HTR 2 HR RE 1- forcible forcible XXXXX.XX hours hours PE.2 Power XXXXX.XX hours HR PE 2 ALRM Alarm XXXXX.XX hours HR ALM 1 Run Hours Exhaust2 Relay Run Hours Run Hours 68 forcible forcible forcible A - LOCAL APPENDIX DISPLAY Table 27 -- MODE ITEM EXPANSION STRT Component A1 RANGE AND CCN TABLES - RUN STATUS UNITS (CONT) (cont) CCN CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE Compressor A1 Starts Crankcase Heater Starts indoor Fan Starts XXXXXX ST A1 XXXXXX XXXXXX ST CCH ST IDF OFC.1 Outdoor XXXXXX ST OFC HT.1 HT.2 Heat Stage 1 Starts Heat Stage 2 Starts Power Exhaust 1 Starts XXXXXX Power PE.2 ALRM (ALRMDISP) Alarm CCN WRITE STATUS Starts CCH IDF PE.1 POINT Fan 1 Starts Exhaust Relay 2 Starts Starts forcible forcible forcible 1 forcible XXXXXX ST ST HTR 1 HTR 2 forcible forcible XXXXXX ST PE 1 forcible XXXXXX ST PE 2 ST ALM forcible forcible XXXXXX ALRMDiSP = CCN only) Active Alarm 1 Code XXX Active Alarm 2 Code XXX ALMCODE1 ALMCODE2 Active Active Alarm 3 Code Alarm 4 Code XXX ALMCODE3 XXX Active Alarm 5 Code XXX ALMCODE4 ALMCODE5 Yes/No ALRESET forcible Yes/No ALHISCLR forcible Reset All Current Reset Alarm Alarms History (GENERIC = CCN only) GENERIC (LON_DATA = CCN only) LON up to 20 points DATA nviSpaceTemp nviSetPoint xxx.x dF NVI SPT forcible xxx.x dF forcible nvoSpaceTemp nvoUnitStatus.mode xxx.x dF NVl SP NVO SPT NVO MODE nvoUnitStatus.heat_out_p nvoUnitStatus.heat out xxx.x % NVO HPRI xxx.x NVO NVO HSEC COOL ECON nvoUnitStatus.cool nvoUnitStatus.econ nvoUnitStatus.fan nvoUnitStatus.in xxxx s out xxx.x % % out out xxx.x % NVO xxx % NVO FAN NVO ALRM NVl SPTO alarm xxx nviSetPtOffset xxx.x ^F nviOutsideTemp nviOutsideRH XXX.X XXXX.X dF % nvoEffectSetPt XXX.X dF nvoOutsideTemp nvoOutsideRH XXXX.X XXX.X dF % nviSpaceRH nviC02 XXX.X % nvoC02 XXXXX nvoTEMP1 XXX.X dF NVO nvoTEMP2 nviPCT1 XXX.X XXX.X dF % NVO RAT NVl RHSP nvoPCT1 XXX.X % NVO SPRH nviDISCRETE1 nviDISCRETE2 Off/On NVl FSD No/Yes NVl OCC nviDiSCRETE3 Off/On nvoDISCRETE1 Off/On NVl IAQD NV(_ FSD nvoDISCRETE2 nvoDISCRETE3 No/Yes NVO Off/On nciCO2Limit xxxxx NVO_IAQD NCI C02 nciSetPnts.occupied_cool nciSet Pnts.standby_cool xxx.x nciSetPnts.unoccupd_cool NVl OAT NVl OARH NVO EFSP NVO OAT NVO OARH NVl SPRH NVl C02 NVO C02 XXXXX forcible forcible forcible SAT forcible forcible forcible forcible OCC xxx.x dF dF NCI NCI OCSP SCSP xxx.x dF NCI UCSP nciSet Pnts.occupied_heat nciSet Pnts.standby_heat xxx.x xxx.x dF dF NCI NCI OHSP SHSP nciSetPnts.unoccupd_heat xxx.x dF NCI UHSP 69 forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible forcible A - LOCAL APPENDIX DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES (CONT) Table 28 -- MODE - SERVICE TEST ITEM SERVICE EXPANSION RANGE UNITS DEFAULT CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE TEST MAINTENANCE TEST Field Service INDP Test Independent Test Mode ECON Economizer E.CAL Calibrate PE.1 Power Exhaust PE.2 Power Exhaust ALRM Alarm CCH Crankcase FANS On/Off (TEST = display Position Test 0 to 100 DISPLAY WRITE STATUS STATUS DISPLAY only) MAN CTRL forcible forcible 0 S ECONO forcible forcible Off S ECOCAL forcible forcible 1 Test On/Off Off SPE1 forcible forcible 2 Test On/Off Off SPE2 forcible forcible On/Off Off S ALMOUT forcible forcible On/Off Off S CCH forcible forcible Off S IDF forcible forcible 0 S VSPEED forcible forcible Off S OFC 1 forcible forcible Test Heat Test % TESTFANS IDF Supply VFD Power F.SPD Indoor Fan Speed OFC.1 Outdoor Test On/Off Test Fan Relay 0to Test 100 % On/Off TESTCOOL Test Cooling CTLR Dig Scroll Ctrl Pwr Test CAPC Compressor Capacity F.SPD Cool H EAT CON WRITE On/Off Test Fans COOL POINT TESTINDP Outputs Economizer Relay Off CCN Off S CMPCTL forcible forcible 0 to 100 % 0 S VCAP forcible forcible 0 to 100 % 0 S VSPDCL forcible forcible On/Off Test Test Fan Speed Test Heating TESTH EAT HT.1 Heat Stage 1 Test On/Off Off S HEAT 1 forcible forcible HT.2 Heat Stage 2 Test On/Off Off S HEAT 2 forcible forcible POINT CON WRITE DISPLAY WRITE STATUS STATUS Table ITEM EXPANSION 29 -- MODE RANGE - TEMPERATURES UNITS CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE STATUS TEMPERATURES AIR.T CCN DISPLAY UINPUT Air Temperatures SAT Supply OAT Outdoor SPT Space Temperature SPTO Space Temperature RAT REET xxx.x dF SAT xxx.x dF OA TEMP forcible forcible xxx.x dF SPACE forcible forcible xxx.x dF SPTO forcible forcible Return Air Temperature xxx.x dF RETURN forcible forcible Refrigerant xxx.x dF xxx.x dF SST A xxx.x dF SCT A Air Temperature Air Temperature Offset Temperatures SSZA Sat. Suction SCZA Sat. Condenser Temp A Temp A Table ITEM EXPANSION 30 -- MODE RANGE D!SP T T - PRESSURES UNITS CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE CCN POINT CON WRITE STATUS STATUS PRESSURES DISPLAY UINPUT SSRA Suction Pressure SCRA Condenser A Pressure A xxx.x psig SSP A xxx.x psig SCP 7O A APPENDIX A - LOCAL Table ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY 31 -- MODE RANGE AND CCN TABLES - SET POINTS UNITS DEFAULT SETPOINTS SET Occupied UCSP Unoccupied OHSP Occupied UHSP Unoccupied GAP Heat- STO. R SPT Offset SASP Cool Supply RH.SP Space RH Setpoint RH.DB Space RH Deadband C.LO Compressor HT.LO Heating EH.LO Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit ELLO Econo Cool Lo Temp FC.LO Free Cool Low Temp Cool 78 OCSP 75 to 95F dF 85 UCSP 55 to 80F dF 68 OHSP 40 to 80F dF 6O UHSP 2to ^F 5 HCSP GAP 0 to 5F ^F 5 SPTO RNG 45 to 75 dF 65 SASP 30 to 95 % 5O SPRH SP 2 to 20 % 5 SPRH DB 0 to 100F dF 0 OATLCOMP 40 to 125F dF 75 OATLH EAT 40 to 100F dF 65 OATLECLH Limit - 30 to 50F dF 0 OATLECLL Limit 0 to 70F dF 5O OATLUEFC Heat Setpoint Setpoint Cool Setpoint Range Gap (+/-) Air Setpoint Lockout Lockout Temp Temp 10F Table ITEM PNT dF Setpoint Heat CONFIGURATION 55 to 80F Setpoint Cool CON POINT CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE SETPOINT OCSP (CONT) EXPANSION RANGE 32 -- MODE - INPUTS CCN UNITS CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE STATUS INPUTS POINT CON WRITE DISPLAY WRITE STATUS STATUS DISPLAY UINPUTS GEN.I General Inputs FILS Filter Status FAN.S Fan Status FDWN Fire Shutdown ENTH Outdoor Enthalpy RM.OC Remote Occupancy HUM Space CMRA Compressor C.ALM Scroll CS.IN Current CS.A1 AIR.Q Switch Switch Switch Humidity Switch Switch A Feedback Compressor Sensor Compressor Switch Alarm Dirty/Clean FILTSTAT forcible On/Off FAN STAT forcible On/Off FIREDOWN forcible High/Low ENTHALPY forcible On/Off REM OCC forcible High/Low HUM STAT forcible On/Off COMP A On/Off COMP ALM On/Off CS Inputs A1 Feedback A1 Air Quality Inputs IAQ.S IAQ Level (switch) High/Low IAQIN forcible forcible IAQ IAQ Level (sensor) xxxx ppm IAQ forcible forcible OAQ OAQ Level xxxx OAQ forcible forcible SRRH Space ppm % SPRH forcible forcible (sensor) Humidity Sensor xxx.x 71 A - LOCAL APPENDIX Table DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES 33 -- MODE - OUTPUTS (CONT) CCN ITEM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE STATUS OUTPUTS POINT DISPLAY WRITE WRITE STATUS STATUS DISPLAY UOUTPUT FANS Fan Outputs IDF Indoor F.SPD Commanded OFC.1 Outdoor COOL Fan VFD Pwr Relay Fan Speed Fan 1 Relay IDF On/Off xxx FANSPEED % OFC On/Off 1 Cool Outputs CTLR Digital CAPC Compressor CCH Crankcase H EAT Scroll Ctrl Pwr On/Off Capacity xxx Heat Relay COMPCTLR CAPACITY % On/Off CCH Heat Outputs HT.1 Heat Stage 1 Relay On/Off HEAT 1 HT.2 Heat Stage 2 Relay On/Off HEAT 2 EC.CP Economizer Outputs Econo Commanded EC.AP Econo Actual PE.1 Power Exhaust 1 Relay On/Off PE.2 Power Exhaust 2 Relay On/Off Alarm Relay On/Off ECON ALRM CCN Position Position 0 to 100 % ECONOCMD 0 to 1O0 % ECONOPOS 72 forcible forcible PE 1 forcible forcible PE 2 forcible forcible ALMOUT forcible forcible A - LOCAL APPENDIX Table ITEM DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES 34 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION RANGE UNITS EXPANSION CON DEFAULT TABLE/SUB-TABLE CONFIGURATION DISP (CONT) CCN POINT PAGE NO. SERVICE CONFIGURATION Display DISPLAY Configuration METR Metric LANG Language Selection PROT Password Enable PSWD Service Password TEST Test Display On/Off Off Display On/Off Off DISPUNIT 0=English 1 =Spanish 2=French 0 LANGUAGE Enable/Disable Disable PASS EBL 12 0000 to 9999 1111 PASSWORD 12 DISPTEST 12 3=Portuguese LEDs (display only, not in table) UNIT UNIT Unit Configuration 0 to 600 30 STARTDLY 12 Yes OCC FAN 12 Yes FATALFAN 12 Fan Maximum Yes/No Yes/No 80 to 100 % 100 SPEEDMAX 12 Fan Minimum 10to % 2O SPEEDMIN 12 ^F 5O SPEEDVNT 12 0: no FlOP FANSTCFG 12 0: no FlOP 1: FlOP FILSTCFG 12 0: no FlOP SHTDNCFG 12 0 REMOCCFG 12 No RH OAQ 13 0 HUMSTCFG 13 S.DLY Startup OC.FN Fan On When IDF.F Shut Down FS.MX Supply Delay Occupied on IDF Failure Speed FS.MN Supply 40 Speed FS.VM Vent Mode Fan Speed 40 to 100 FN.SW Fan Status Switch 0=No Switch 1 =Normal 2=Normal FL.SW Filter Status Switch 0=No Switch 1 =Normal 2=Normal FS.SW Fire Shutdown Switch 0=No Remote Switch 0=No Occupancy RH Sensor RH.SW Space on OAQ Input Humidity Switch 1: FlOP Open Closed Switch 1 =Normal 2=Normal RH.S Open Closed Switch 1 =Normal 2=Normal RM.SW 1: FlOP Open Closed Open Closed Yes/No 0=No Switch 1 =Normal 2=Normal Open Closed TCS.C Temp Cmp Strt Cool Factr 0 to 60 mins TCSTCOOL 13 TCS.H Temp Cmp Strt Heat Factr 0 to 60 mins TCSTHEAT 13 COOL Cooling COOL Configuration MIN.C Min Compressor FS.CD Fan Speed Demand % 7O MIN CAPC 14 1 to 9.9 ^F 3 SPEEDDMD 17 MRT.C Compressor MOT.C Compressor Min On Time 120 to 999 sec 18O MIN ON Min Off Time 300 to 999 sec 3OO RST.C Runtime to Reset Strikes MIN OFF 120 to 999 sec 3OO FOD.C Fan-off MIN ON Delay, Mech Cool 0 to 600 sec 6O COOL CS.A1 Current Sensing Enable/Disable Capacity Control A1 15to 80 CFG Disable: future reserved for S 24 FOD A1 SENSE 25 use DO NOT ENABLE C.LO Compressor 0 to 100F Lockout dF 0 OATLCOMP Yes ALM Temp ALM.N Alert SAT Supply Each Strike Yes//No NOW 24 Air Temperature SASP Cool Supply 45 to 75 dF 65 SASP 17 SA.MU SASP Maximum Reset Up 0 to 20 ^F 10 SASPMAXU 18 SA.MD SASP Maximum Reset -20 ^F -10 SASPMAXD 18 35.0 to 65.0 35.0 to 65.0 dF 6O SATMIN H dF 45 SATMIN L Air Setpoint to 0 Down SAT.U Minimum SAT Upper Level SAT.L Minimum SAT Lower Level SST Low Suction Control SSZO Suction 10to 50 dF 18 SSTOK 26 SSZ1 Low Suction - Level 1 10to 50 dF 2O SSTLEV1 26 SSZ2 Low Suction - Level 2 5 to 50 dF 15 SSTLEV2 26 SSZ3 Low Suction - Level 3 0 to 50 dF 10 SSTLEV3 PSI.D Ckt A Minimum 0 to 500 psig 2O DELTAP OFC Outdoor OK Temperature Pressure 26 A 26 Fan Control 1 .MXP Fan Levl Max Pressure 100 to 500 psig 450 LEV1MAXP 15 2.MNP Fan Lev2 Min Pressure 100 to 500 psig 200 LEV2MINP 15 2.ON Fan Lev2 On Temperature 0to 100 F 55 LEV2ON 15 2.OFF Fan Lev2 Off Temperature 0to 100 F 45 LEV2OFF 15 73 A - LOCAL APPENDIX DISPLAY Table 34 -- MODE ITEM H EAT EXPANSION Heating HT.TY RANGE AND CCN TABLES - CONFIGURATION UNITS (cont) CCN DEFAULT TABLE/SUB-TABLE HEAT Configuration Type of Heat Installed 0=No Heat 1 =Gas 0 (50 series with electric heat) 2=Electric 1 (48 series) 2 (50 series with electric CCN POINT PAGE NO. CFG no HEATTYPE 2O NUM HEAT 22 heat) N.HTR Number MRT.H Heat Minimum On Time 60 to 999 sec series 12O HMIN ON 22 MOT.H Heat Minimum Off Time 60 to 999 sec 12O HMIN OFF 22 H.DEC Heat Stage Time Decrease 120 to 999 sec 3OO HSTAGDEC 22 H.INC Heat Stage Increase 120 to 999 sec 450 HSTAGINC 21 FOD.E Fan- 10 to 600 sec 30 ELEC 22 FOD.G Fan-off Delay, Gas Heat 45 to 600 sec 45 GAS FOD 20 HT.LO Heating Lockout 40 to 125F dF 75 OATLHEAT 20 SAT SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SAT. H SAM.L of Heat Stages Time off Delay, Elect Heat SAT Heat Maximum Temp 1 to2 (CONT) 1 (50 series <15kW) 2 (48 series, 50 Enable/Disable > = 15kW) FOD Mode Sensing SAT Lower Disable SAT 85 to 200 dF 140 SATMAX HEAT L 21 21 SAT Upper 85 to 200 dF 160 SATMAX H 21 Level SAM.U SPT Maximum Level SPACE TEMPERATURE HT, PD SPT Heat Level Demand (+) 0.5to 5 ^F 1 HDEM POS 21 HZND SPT Heat Level Demand (-) -5to -0.5 ^F -1 HDEM NEG 21 H.LAG Heat Thermal min 1 ECON Lag Factor Economizer Configuration EC.EN Economizer Installed E.CTL Economizer Control MR25 Econ Min at 25% Type 0 to 5 HEAT ECON LAG Yes/No No: no FlOP Yes: FlOP ECONO 1 =Dig/Position 2=Dig/Command 1 ECON 3=Analog 21 CFG 8 CTL 10 Ctrl 0to 100 % 0 MINP 25 19 0to 100 % 0 MINP 50 19 0to 100 % 0 MINP 75 19 0 to 100 % 30 MINP MAX 19 0to % 100 ECONOMAX Fanspeed MR50 Econ Min at 50% Fanspeed MR75 Econ Min at 75% Fanspeed MRMX Econ Min at Max Fanspeed EC.MX Econo M.ANG Min Actuator Oool Max Position 100 EH.LO Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit 40 to 100F EL.LO Econo Oool Lo Temp Limit - 30 to 50F DF.DB Diff Dry Bulb Control UEFC Unoccupied 75 to 90 Ctrl Angle Free Cooling 88 MINANGLE 27 dF 65 OATLECLH 15 dF 0 OATLECLL 15 Disable/Enable Enable DIFFBULB 0=Disabled 2 UEFC CFG 15 1 =Unoccupied 2= Preoccupancy FC.TM Free Cool PreOcc FC.LO Free Cool Low Temp PE.EN Power Exhaust installed Yes/No PE1 .C Power CFM Exhaust Stage1 100 to 15000 PE2.C Power CFM Exhaust Stage2 IDF.C Indoor CFM Fan Max Speed EN.SW Enthalpy Switch Time Limit 1 to 9999 min 120 UEFCTIME 16 -30 dF 50 OATLUEFC 16 No: no FlOP Yes: FlOP PE ENABL 16 cfm 600 PE1CFM 16 100 to 15000 cfm 0 PE2 CFM 16 500 to 15000 cfm 1600 (05) 2000 (06) IDF CFM 16 0: no FlOP ENTHLCFG 59 0=No to 70F Switch 1 =Normal 2=Normal Open Closed 1: FlOP 74 APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY Table 34 -- MODE ITEM AIR.Q EXPANSION Air Quality IA.CF RANGE AND CCN TABLES - CONFIGURATION UNITS DEFAULT (cont) CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE IAQ Config. IAQ Analog Input Config 0=No IAQ 1 = DCV (CONT) CCN POINT PAGE NO. CFG 0: no FlOP 1: FlOP IAQANCFG 59 0 IAQANFAN 14 0 IAQINCFG 17 IAQINFAN 17 2=Override IAQ 3=Ctrl Min Pos IA.FN IAQ Analog Fan Config 0 = Neve r 1 =Occupied 2=Always II.CF IAQ Switch Input Config 0=No IAQ 1 = DCV N/O 2 = DCV N/C 3=Override 4=Override II.FN IAQ Switch Fan Config N/O N/C 0 = Neve r 1 =Occupied AQ.MN Econo OVR.P IAQ Override OA.CF OAQ Analog 2=Always 0to 100 % 10 IAQMINP 17 Position 0to % 100 IAQOVPOS 17 Input Config 0=No 0 OAQANCFG 17 Min IAQ Position 100 OAQ 1 = DCV 2=Lockout OAQ OAQ.L OAQ Lockout Limit 0 to 5000 6OO OAQLOCK 17 AQD.L AQ Differential Low 0 to 5000 100 DAQ LOW 19 AQD.H AQ Differential High 0 to 5000 7OO DAQ HIGH 19 DF.ON Fan On AQ Differential 0 to 5000 6OO DAQFNON 17 DF.OF Fan Off AQ Differential 0 to 5000 2OO DAQFNOFF 17 1.4M IAQ Sensor Value at 4mA 0 to 5000 0 IAQ 4MA 16 1.20M IAQ Sensor Value at 20mA 0 to 5000 2000 IAQ_20MA 16 O.4M OAQ Sensor Value at 4mA 0 to 5000 0 OAQ_4MA 17 O.20M OAQ Sensor 20mA Value at 0 to 5000 2000 OAQ 17 H.4M RH Sensor Value at 4mA 0 to 50 % 0 RH 4MA H.20M RH Sensor Value at 20mA 60 to 100 % 100 ALM.O Alarm Relay A.SPC SPT/SPRH A.SRT SAT/RAT A.OAT OAT Thermistor A.CS Current A.CMP Compressor A.CKT Refrig Circuit A.SSP SSP Transducer A.SCT SCT Thermistor A.FAN Indoor A.FIL Dirty Filter A.ECO Economizer PID Sensor Failure Sensor Failure Failure Sensor RH 20MA ALM Config. Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Fan Failure Failure 20MA CFG Yes/No Yes SPACE Yes/No Yes SATRATAL Yes/No Yes OAT Yes/No No CS Yes/No Yes COMP Yes/No Yes CKT AL Yes/No Yes SSP AL Yes/No Yes SCT AL Yes/No Yes FAN AL Yes/No Yes FILT AL Yes/No Yes AL AL AL ECON PID PID Configurations AL AL CFG EC.P Economizer PID - kP 0.0 to 99.9 2.5 ECONO P EC.I Economizer PID - kl 0.0 to 99.9 0.1 ECONO I EC.D Economizer PID - kD 0.0 to 99.9 1 ECONO D EC.DT Economizer PID - rate 10.0 to 180.0 sec 15 ECONO DT E.DBD Economizer Deadband PID 0 to 25 % 3 ECONBAND CRP Capacity PID - kP 0 to 99.9 1.5 VCAP P CRI Capacity PID - kl 0 to 99.9 0.1 VCAP I CRD Capacity PID - kD 0 to 99.9 1 VCAP D CRDT Capacity PID - rate 1 to 30 5 VCAP LK.P Linkage Staging PID - kP 0.0 to 99.9 10 LINK P LK.I Linkage Staging PID - kl 0.0 to 99.9 5 LINK I LK.D Linkage Staging PID - kD 0.0 to 99.9 5 LINK D LK.DT Linkage rate Staging PID - 10.0 to 180.0 30 LINK DT secs secs 75 DT APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY Table 34 -- MODE ITEM (GENERIC = CCN TRIM EXPANSION RANGE AND CCN TABLES - CONFIGURATION UNITS DEFAULT (CONT) (cont) CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE CCN POINT GENERICS only) POINT 01 Definition 8- char ASCII Point 01 POINT 02 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 02 POINT 03 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 03 POINT 04 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 04 POINT 05 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 05 POINT 06 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 06 POINT 07 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 07 POINT 08 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 08 POINT 09 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 09 POINT 10 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 10 POINT 11 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 11 POINT 12 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 12 POINT 13 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 13 POINT 14 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 14 POINT 15 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 15 POINT 16 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 16 POINT 17 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 17 POINT 18 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 18 POINT 19 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 19 POINT 20 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 20 Sensor Calibration PAGE NO. 5 (CCN TRIM - see Maintenance Display) SPT.C SPT.T SAT.C Space Space Temp Calibration Temp Trim Supply -30to 130 dF 38 ^ F dF 0 Air Temp Calib. -30 to 30 -30to 130 38 38 Air Temp Trim -30 ^ F 0 38 dF ^ F 0 38 37 SAT.T to 30 Supply RAT.C RAT.T Return Air Temp Calib. Return Air Temp Trim CCN.A CCN Configuration CCN Element Number 1to 239 1 CCNADD 8 CCN.B CCN Bus Number 0to 239 0 CCNBUS 8 BAUD CCN Baud 2400,4800,9600, 3 CCNBAUDD 8 No No CCNBC OATBC 23 23 No GSBC 23 No CCNBCACK 23 SCHEDNUM 23 -30to 130 -30 to 30 CONFIGURATION CCN Rate 48 50 PD 19200,38400 BROD B.TIM B.OAT CCN Broadcast Config. CCN Time/Date Broadcast CCN OAT Broadcast B.GS Global B.ACK CCN Broadcast CCN Schedule SCH.O SCH.N Schedule Schedule Broadcst Ack'er Overrides Number BRODEFS Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No SCHEDOVR 0 = Always Occupied 1-64 Local = Global HOL.G OV.TL OV. EX OV.SP LDSH = Schedule 65-99 Schedule Accept Global Holidays Override Time Limit Timed Override Hours Yes/No 0to 4 No HOLIDAYT 23 hours 4 OTL 23 0to hours SPT Override Yes/No 0 Yes OVR EXT TIME-OVER 23 23 0 100 SHED NUM MAXCREDL 24 24 100 MAXCSHED 2 2 MAXHREDL MAXHSHED CCN Schedule Enabled 4 Overrides S.GRP R.MXC Loadshed Group Number Redline Max Capacity S.MXC Loadshed R.MXH S.MXH Redline Max Heat Stages Loadshed Max Heat Max Capacity LOADSHED Oto Oto Oto Oto Oto 16 100 100 2 2 % % Stages 76 24 A - LOCAL APPENDIX Table ITEM TIME DISPLAY 35 -- EXPANSION MODE AND CCN TABLES - TIME RANGE (CONT) CLOCK UNITS CCN DEFAULT CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE CLOCK POINT CONFIGURATION TIME TIME Time of Day TIME Hour DATE MNTH and Minute Current Date Month of Year xx.xx hh.mm January, February, December [] TIME MOY &, DOM Day of Month 1 to31 DOM YEAR Year xxxx YOCDISP DAY Day of Week Monday, Tuesday, [] DOWD!SP &, Sunday DST Daylight Savings BRODEFS Config. (continued) STR.M Start Month January, February, December STR.W Start Week 1 to5 2 STARTW STR.D Start Day 1 to7 7 STARTD M.ADD Minutes 0 to 90 6O MINADD STRM Stop Month January, February, December 11 STOPM STRW Stop Week 1 to5 1 STO PW STRD Stop Day 1 to7 7 STOPD M.SUB Minutes 0 to 90 6O SCH.L to Add to Subtract Occupancy [] [] STARTM &, &, MINSUB Schedule (SCH.L = Display only) PER.x Occupancy OCC.x Occupied From OO.OO to 23.59 hh.mm 00.00 PERxOCC UNC.x Occupied To OO.OO to 23.60 hh.mm 00.00 PERxUNC MON.x Monday in Period Yes/No No PERxMON TUE.x Tuesday in Period Yes/No No PERxTUE WED.x Wednesday Yes/No No PERxWED THU.x Thursday Yes/No No PERxTHU FRI.x Friday Yes/No No PERxFRI SAT.x Saturday Yes/No No PERxSAT SUN.x Sunday in Period Yes/No No PERxSUN HOL.x Holiday in Period Yes/No No PERxHOL (repeat Period x in Period in Period in Period in Period up to x=8 Periods) (OCCFECS = CCN OCCDEFCS only) Timed Override Period x DOW Hours hours x OVR- xxxxxxxx EXT 00000000 DOWx 00.00 00.00 OCCTODx (MTWTFSSH) Occupied From 00.00 to 24.00 hh.mm Occupied To 00.00 to 24.00 hh.mm UNOCTODx (repeat up to x=8 Periods) HOL.L HOLIDAY Holiday Schedule HOL.x Holiday x MON.x Holiday Start Month 1 to 12 = January December DAY.x Holiday Start Day 1 to31 HOLDAYxx LEN.x Holiday Duration 1 to 99 HOLLENxx (repeat HOLDYxxS (days) HOLMONxx to up to x=9 (repeat xx=30 Holidays) up to Holidays) Table ITEM (ALARMDEF EXPANSION = CCN RANGE TABLES UNITS DEFAULT only) Routing Equipment Comm Control Priority Failure Re-Alarm Retry 00000000 Oto Time Time Alarm System = CCN ONLY CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE CCN POINT ALARMDEF Alarm (CTLRID 36 -- CCN Name to 11111111 7 11000000 ALRM 4 EQP 1 to 240 min 10 RETRY 1 to 255 min 18O RE-ALARM 48 up to 8 alphanum 50 PD ALRM CTLR- only) Device Name: Description: Software Model Serial 48 50 PD text string Location: text string Part Number: CESR 131459 - XX- XX Number: Number: Reference CNT TYPE Number: 77 ID TM NAM APPENDIX A - LOCAL DISPLAY AND CCN TABLES Table 37 1 MODE - OPERATING ITEM OPERATING EXPANSION RANGE UNITS MODES MODE MODES CCN CCN CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE POINT DISPLAY WRITE WRITE STATUS STATUS MAINTENANCE DISPLAY Control SYS (CONT) Modes MODES SYS SYS Unit operation disabled Unit operation enabled Service test enabled MODE MODE TEXT1 TEXT2 (table only) SYS MODE TEXT3 (table only) HVAC HVAC Operation Ventilation (fanCooling Unoccupied HVACMODE 1 _4VACMODE Disabled only) Free Cooling 3 (table Remote HVAC Mode TEXT 2 (table only) _4VACMODE TEXT Heating HV.DN TEXT only) Yes/No HVACDOWN forcible Disable EFF.C Cool Setpoint in Effect XXX.X CSP EFF EFF.H Heat Setpoint in Effect XXX.X HSP EFF OCC Currently Yes/No OCCUPIED T.OVR Timed Yes/No MODETOVR LINK Linkage Active D.LMT Demand Limit C.LOC Compressor H.LOC E.LOC COOL Occupied Override in Effect forcible Yes/No MODELINK In Effect Yes/No MODEDMDL OAT Lockout Yes/No COMPLOCK Heat OAT Lockout Yes/No HEATLOCK Econo Yes/No Cool OAT Lockout Cool Mode COOL In Cooling OK.CL OKto MS.TG OK.EC ECONLOCK COOLDIAG Diagnostic Yes/No IN Yes/No OKTOCOOL Mode Select Timeguard OK to Use Economizer? xxx COOLMSTG Yes/No ECONCOOL OK.MC OK to Use Compressor? Yes/No MECHCOOL C.LOC Compressor OAT Lockout Yes/No C.LO Compressor Lockout xxx IDF Indoor F.SPD Commanded REQ.C Requested Mode? Select Cool Mode? Temp Fan State Fan Speed Cooling COOL COMPLOCK dF OATLCOMP On/Off IDFSTATE xxx FANSPEED xxx REQ CAPC Capacity MIN.C Min Compressor MAX.C Max Compressor LMT.C Max Capacity CAPC Compressor CTLR Digital CMRA Compressor ST.A Circuit F.LEV Outdoor SAT Supply Air Temperature SAT Supply Air Temperature xxx.x dF SAT DISP SA.DM Supply Air Temp xxx.x ^F SAT DMD SAT. U Minimum Minimum xx.x dF SATMIN H xx.x dF SATMIN L xxx.x dF SPACE SAT. L SPT Scroll xxx % MIN xxx % MAX xxx % CAPLIMIT Capacity xxx % CAPACITY Ctrl Pwr On/Off COMPCTLR A Feedback On/Off COMP x ASTRIKES x FANLEV Capacity Capacity In Effect A Strikes Fan Level Demand SAT Upper SAT Lower Space Temperature SPT Space Temperature TRND Spacetemp DMD.C Cooling Trend Demand Level Level (F/min) CAPC A T SPTTREND xxx.x xxx.x CAPC ^F COOL 78 DMD forcible forcible A - LOCAL APPENDIX Table 37 -ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY MODE RANGE AND CCN TABLES - OPERATING MODES (cont) CCN CCN UNITS (CONT) CCN POINT TABLE/SUB-TABLE H EAT Heat Mode In Heating OK.HT OKto Select Heat MS.TG Mode Select Timeguard H.LOC Heat OAT Lockout HT.LO Heating IDF indoor F.SPD Commanded AVL.H Available REQ.H Requested LMT.H Max Heat Stage ACT.H Actual HT.1 Heat Stage HT.2 Heat Stage SAT Supply Mode? Mode? IN Yes/No OKTOHEAT xxx Temp secs HEAT HEATLOCK OATLH EAT On/Off IDFSTATE xxx FANSPEED x AVLHSTGS x REQHSTGS x HSTGLIMT x ACTHSTGS 1 Relay On/Off HEAT 1 2 Relay On/Off HEAT 2 Fan Speed Heating Stages Heating Heating Stages In Effect Stages Air Temperature SAT Heat SAT Supply SAM.L Maximum SAT Lower SAM.U Maximum SAT Upper Mode SAT HEAT xxx.x dF SAT DISP Level xxx dF SATMAX L Level xxx dF SATMAX H Sensing Air Temperature Enable/Disable Space Temperature SPT Space Temperature xxx.x dF SPACE DMD.H Heating Demand xxx.x dF HEAT TRND Spacetemp (F/min) xxx.x HT.PD SPT Heat Level Demand (+) xx.x HZND SPT Heat Level Demand (-) H.LAG Heat Thermal ECON Trend Economizer EC.EN Economizer OCC Currently IDF Indoor HDEM POS ^F HDEM NEG min HEAT Fan State In Cooling E.LOC Econo Cool EH.LO Econo EL.LO Econo LAG ECONDiAG Installed Commanded Yes/No ECONO Yes/No OCCUPIED On/Off IDFSTATE NNN FANSPEED Yes/No IN OAT Lockout Yes/No ECONLOCK Cool Hi Temp Limit xxx dF OATLECLH Cool Lo Temp Limit xx dF OATLECLL FC.LO Free Cool Low Temp Limit xx dF OATLUEFC EN.LO Econo Cool Enth Lockout Yes/No EC.MX Econo Cool Max Position xxx AQ.DV IAQ DCV Mode Yes/No AQ.MN Econo xxx AQ.OV IAQ Override Mode Yes/No OVR.P IAQ Override Position xxx AQ.LO OAQ Lockout Mode Yes/No IN_OAQLO OAQ.L OAQ Lockout Limit xxxx OAQLOCK LROV Lo Refrig EC.CP Econo Commanded Position xxx % ECONOCMD EC.AP Econo xxx % ECONOPOS EC.MP Min Position xxx % MIN C.ANG Actuator E.CAL Economizer Fan Speed Mode? Min IAQ Position Press Override Actual Position in Effect Control Limiting D.LMT Demand Limit LMT.C Max Capacity LMT.H Max Heat Stage REDL Redline SHED Loadshed MAX.C Max Compressor MAX.H Max Allowed (Display TRIM Configuration) - see Sensor forcible COOL ECONOMAX IN % iAQDV IAQMINP IN_iAQOV % IAQOVPOS IN Yes/No LPOV POS forcible forcible CTLANGLE Yes/No ECOiNCAL DMDL In Effect Yes/No MODEDMDL In Effect xxx CAPLIMIT x HSTGLIMT Yes/No MODEREDL Yes/No MODESHED Capacity x MAX Stages x MAXHSTGS In Effect Activated Activated Heat Calibration forcible CAPC forcible TRIM Space Temp Calibration -30to dF SPT CAL forcible Space Temp Trim - 30 to 30 ^F SPT OFF forcible Supply Air Temp Calib. -30to dF SAT CAL forcible Supply Air Temp Trim - 30 to 30 ^F SAT OFF forcible -30to dF RAT CAL forcible ^F RAT OFF forcible Return Air Temp forcible ENTHLOCK % Angle Calibrating Demand forcible SPTTREND Lag Factor Occupied F.SPD T DMD ^F Diagnostic COOL DMD.L WRITE STATUS HEATMSTG dF xxx Fan State SAT. H SPT Yes/No Yes/No Lockout DISPLAY HEATDiAG Diagnostic HEAT WRITE STATUS Calib. Return Air Temp Trim 130 130 130 - 30 to 30 79 APPENDIX A - LOCAL Table 37 -- ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY MODE AND CCN TABLES - OPERATING RANGE MODES (cont) CCN CCN UNITS (CONT) CCN POINT WRITE STATUS TABLE/SUB-TABLE (OCCDEFM (LINKDATA = CCN = CCN only) only) Occupancy Mode Current Occup (1 =Occup) Period # 0,1 0to MODE 8 Time-Override in Effect Yes/No Time- Duration 0to Override Current Occupied Current Unoccupied Time Time PER Day Next Occupied Time hours OVR xx.xx 4 hh:mm STRTTIME xx.xx hh:mm ENDTIME hh:mm Day Next Unoccupied Time NXTOCTIM hh:mm Previous Unoccupied Day Previous Unoccupied Time NXTUNTIM PRVUNDAY hh.mm PRVUNTIM LINKDATA - Linkage Supervisory Element Supervisory Bus Supervisory Block # Number xxx SUPE-ADR xxx SUPE-BUS xxx BLOCKNUM Average Occup. Heat Stp. xxxx.x dF AOHS Average Occup. Cool Stp. xxxx.x dF AOCS Average Unocc. Heat Stp. xxxx.x dF AUHS Average Unocc. Cool Stp. xxxx.x dF AUCS Average Zone Temperature xxxx.x dF AZT Average Occup. Zone Temp xxxx.x dF AOZT Linkage System Occupied? Yes/No Next Occupied HRS NXTUNDAY Next Unoccupied Next Occupied NO OVERLAST NXTOCDAY Next Occupied CCN "Mon", Day Time LOCC "Tue", 3-cha LNEXTOCD &, "Sun" r text xx:xx hh:mm LNEXTOCC 3-cha LNEXTUOD Next Unoccupied Day "Mon", &, "Sun" r text Next Unoccupied Time xx:xx hh:mm LNEXTUNC Last Unoccupied Day "Mon", "Tue", &, "Sun" 3-cha r text LLASTUOD Last Unoccupied Time xx:xx hh:mm LLASTUNC "Tue", Table 38 -- ITEM WRITE STATUS OCCDEFM Supervisory Current DISPLAY EXPANSION RANGE MODE DEFAULT forcible forcible forcible - ALARMS CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE CCN POINT CCN WRITE STATUS DISPLAY WRITE STATUS MAINTENANCE DISPLAY ALARMS ALARMS R.CUR Reset All Current R.H!S Reset Alarm CURR Currently alarm# (repeat Alarms History Active Yes/No No ALRESET forcible forcible Yes/No No ALH!SCLR forcible forcible Alarms ALARM01C ALARM25C text string up to 25 alarms) HIST Alarm alarm# (repeat History alarm#mm/dd/yy-text string ALARM hh.mm up to 20 Alarms) 8O HISTORY - APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION On 48/50PD units, the supply fan speed is controlled by a 3-phase VFD. The VFD is located in the supply fan section behind an The VFD condensation indoor fan scroll. The VFD speed is controlled directly by the ComfortLink controls through a 0-10Vdc signal based on a is stopped is powered during normal operation to prevent from forming on the boards during the off mode and by driving space temperature sensor. The VFD has a display, which can be used for service diagnostics, but setup of the control is to be done through the scrolling marquee display. Configurations Table 39 -- the speed to 0 (by sending a 0Vdc signal to the VFD). The units use ABB VFDs. The interface wiring for the VFDs is shown in the figure below. The VFD connects to ComfortLink through a 0-10Vdc output on the AUXI board. Terminal designations are shown in the Terminal Designation table. TM VFD TERMINAL are shown in the VFD Configurations table. DESIGNATIONS TERMINAL FUNCTION U1 V1 W1 Three-Phase main circuit input power supply V2 Three-Phase AC output to motor, 0V to maximum input W2 voltage level U2 X1-11 (GND) Xl - 12 (COMMON) Factory-supplied jumper Xl - 10 (24VDC) Xl - 13 (DI- 1) Run (factory-supplied Xl -10 (24VDC) Start Enable 1 (factory-supplied Xl -16 (DI-4) the drive goes to emergency stop X1-2 (AI- 1) X1-3 (AGND) Factory wired for 0-10Vdc TERMINAL O o0 ' Z Co < _ jumper) _ "_" 04 + Z CO jumper). When opened, remote input Xl O O £3 .... _ _ E 5 ZS] ZZ I m 0-10Vdc signal from Comfort Link (08674 Fig. 40 - VFD Wiring 81 APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION Table APPLICATION Parameter Group 40 -- VFD CRITICAL (CONT) CONFIGURATIONS DRIVE PARAMETERS FOR ABB ACH550 DRIVES Value Parameter Number UNITS Description H K30WA001 - 208/230V I H K30WA008- NOTE 460V 9901 Language 9902 Application 9904 Motor Control Mode 9905 Motor Nominal Voltage 23O 46O Volts PD Product specific setting 9906 Motor Nominal Current 7.0 3.5 Amps PD Product specific setting 9907 Motor Nominal Frequency 9908 Motor Nominal Speed 9909 Motor Nominal Power 1001 EXT1 Commands (1) DI - 1 Start/Stop ABB Drive default 1002 EXT2 Commands (1) DI - 1 Start/Stop 1003 Direction ABB Drive default PD Product specific setting 1301 Minimum AI - 1302 Maximum 1401 Relay Output 1 1402 Relay Output 2 1403 Relay Output 3 SYSTEM 1601 Run Enable CONTROL 1608 START-UP DATA START/STOP/DIR ANALOG ABB Drive default (0) English Macro PD Product specific setting (1) HVAC Default ABB Drive default (3) Scalar : Freq 60 Hz 1725 2.4 ABB Drive default RPM PD Product specific setting HP PD Product specific setting (1) Forward 1 20 % ABB Drive default AI - 1 100 % ABB Drive default INPUTS RELAY OUTPUTS OVER RIDE LIMITS Carrier default settings from PPS (7) Started (2) Run ABB Drive default (3) Fault (-1) ABB Drive default (0) Not Set ABB Drive default Start Enable 1 (4) DI - 4 ABB Drive default 1701 Override Set (3) DI - 3 Carrier default settings from PPS 1702 Override Freq 60 Hz Carrier default settings from PPS 1703 Override Speed 1750 RPM Carrier default settings from PPS 1704 Over Pass Code 0 Carrier default settings from PPS 1705 Override On Carrier default settings from PPS 2003 Maximum Current 2007 Minimum Frequency 0 Hz PD Product specific setting ABB Drive default 60 Hz ABB Drive default 8.0 4.0 Amps 2008 Maximum 2101 Start Function 2102 Stop Function 2202 Accelerate Time 30 Seconds ABB Drive default 2203 Decelerate Time 30 Seconds ABB Drive default 2601 Flux Optimization (1) On 2605 Volt/Freq Ratio 2606 Switching 3006 Motor Thermal Time Frequency (6) Ramp PD Product specific setting (2) Ramp PD Product specific setting START/STOP ACCEL/DECEL MOTOR FAULT FUNCTIONS PD Product specific setting Carrier default settings from PPS (2) Squared Frequency All Other Parameter Settings are ABB Drive Default Settings 82 8 kHz Carrier default settings from PPS 1050 Seconds Carrier default settings from PPS APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION VFD Operation The VFD keypad is shown in Fig. 41. The function of SOFT KEYS 1 and 2 change depending on what is displayed on the screen. The function of SOFT KEY 1 matches the word in the lower left-hand box on the display screen. The function of SOFT KEY 2 matches the word in the lower right-hand box on the display screen. If the box is empty, then the SOFT KEY does not have a function on that specific screen. The UP and DOWN keys are used to navigate through the menus. The OFF key is used to turn off the VFD. The AUTO key is used to change control of the drive (CONT) IMPORTANT: to automatic control. The HAND control of the drive to local (hand is used to access the help screens. For the VFD to operate key is used held) control. to change The HELP button highlight The parameter. UP and DOWN settings, current parameter value To view the default keys simultaneously. select the application appears above parameter the value, press the To restore the default factory macro "HVAC Default." VFD Modes The VFD has several different modes for configuring, and diagnosing the VFD. The modes are: • Standard Display operates mode -- shows operating, drive status information and the drive • Parameters • Start-up mode -Assistant edits parameter mode-- guides values individually the start up and configuration on the 48/50PD units, the drive nmst be set in AUTO mode. The word "AUTO" will appear hand corner of the VFD display. Press the AUTO drive in AUTO mode. in the upper left button to set the • Changed Parameters • Drive Parameter mode -- Backup shows mode -- all changed parameters stores or uploads the parameters • Clock Set mode -• I/O Settings Standard sets the time and date for the drive mode -- checks Display and edits the I/O settings Mode Use the standard display mode to read information on the drive status and operate the drive. To reach the standard display mode, press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below. See Fig. 42. The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive. The HAND icon indicates that the drive control is local AUTO {ALWAYS AVAILABLE} The OFF (08675 Fig. 41 - VFD Keypad Start Up with Initial start-up has been performed Start Initial configured at the factory. Use of the start See below table are on the VFD. start-up is performed at the factory. individual parameters, (SOFT KEY 2. Use the UP or DOWN on the display the UP parameter 4. Use 5. Use screen or group the UP parameter To start up the VFD perform the following Main to highlight and press ENTER DOWN keys or DOWN or DOWN keys will be PARAMETERS to highlight KEY 2). icon indicates that the and motor rotation status. parameters (CURRENT) rooftop units, shows the frequency the correct A that the forward drive is that the rotation is set point that the drive 34, the middle of the LCD display can be 3 parameter values. The default display 0103 (OUTPUT in amperes, and 0120 FREQ) in percentages, 0104 (AI1) in milliamperes. The bottom corners of the LCD display show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys. The lower middle displays time (if configured to show the time). The first time the drive is powered up, it is in the OFF mode. To switch to local hand-held control and control the drive using the control HAND panel, button press and hold the HAND button. Pressing switches the drive to hand control while keeping the the desired drive running. Press the AUTO button to switch to remote input control. To start the drive press the HAND or AUTO buttons, to the desired stop the drive press the OFF button. KEY 2). to change 7. Choose another parameter or press EXIT return to the listing of parameter groups. have been configured KEY 1) to return AUTO such as the basic I/O (X1) or field the drive For Carrier Using parameter group configured to display the value AUTO "_, of the to the mare 15.8Hz [email protected] 3,7A 6. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to store the modified value. Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value. Any modifications that are not saved will not be changed. (SOFT icon indicates The upper right corner will maintain. parameter. the parameters The mode, the KEY 2). to highlight (SOFT keys menu (SOFT and press SEL (SOFT and press EDIT the UP keys 2). The panel. control rotating arrow (clockwise or counterclockwise) indicates drive is running and at set point and the shaft direction is or reverse. A rotating blinking arrow indicates that the running but not at set point. A stationary arrow indicates the current 1. Select MENU displayed. 3. Use arrow shows Up by Changing Parameters Individually with by changing procedure: the control drive is stopped. counterclockwise. Assistant up assistant will override factory VFD configurations. to check that all parameters listed in VFD Configurations correctly from drive is in remote bus. 838 HA I 00:00 I mEHU (SOFT KEY 1) to Continue until all (08676 and then press EXIT Fig. 42 - Standard menu. 83 Display Example APPENDIX To adjust the speed in HAND mode, press buttons (the reference changes immediately). modified in the local control (HAND) parameterized modification (using Group 11 in the remote control Parameters The B - VFD INFORMATION the UP or DOWN The reference can be mode, and can be reference mode. select) to also allow Mode Parameters is used parameters, 1. Select MENU displayed. to change perform (SOFT on the display the parameter 4. Use the screen UP or group UP parameter 2). The keys to highlight keys DOWN or DOWN keys will be (SOFT KEY 2). the desired the desired KEY 2). KEY 2). to change the value VFD to the removable control panel. The control transferred to another drive and the parameters Depending Any modifications highlight of the 9909, 1605, motor parameters Upload value. value. The parameter. settings, To view the default Assistant To use the Start-Up (SOFT the display factory (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will screen keys to highlight and press ENTER 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight and press SEL (SOFT Assistant to be configured. (SOFT will 1. Install the control VFD. that need the display (SOFT screen DRIVE ALL progress indicator. 7. The display Main menu will Select EXIT be 8. The control 2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CHANGED PAR on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). A list of the recently changed parameters will be displayed. UP or DOWN keys 4. Press EXIT mode. (SOFT to highlight (SOFT menu. from the drive. the control panel to the VFD, onto the the desired KEY 2) to change KEY 1) to exit the Changed Parameters 84 2). The Main keys to highlight the will be PAR BACKUP (SOFT keys to highlight Parameters" menu on KEY 2). DOWNLOAD TO KEY 2). will be displayed process, select with a ABORT KEY 1). perform procedure: KEY To stop The ('hanged Parameters mode is used to view and edit recently changed parameters on the drive. To view the changed parameters, the TO upload to the PAR BACKUP and press SEL (SOFT 5. The text "Restoring (SOFT parameter group and press EDIT the parameter if desired. UPLOAD the text "Parameter and press ENTER 6. When the download download successful" 3. Use to highlight KEY 2). panel with the correct parameters 4. Use the UP or DOWN Mode 2). The on KEY 2). and press SAVE Constant Speeds, PID Control, Timed Functions, and Outputs. KEY be PAR BACKUP (SOFT panel can now be disconnected To download all parameters from perform the following procedure: The assistant is divided into separate tasks. The user can activate the tasks one after the other or independently. The tasks are typically done in this order: Application, References 1 and 2, (SOFT will All Parameters 3. Use the UP or DOWN the following menu KEY 1) to return to the main menu. are in range. 1. Select MENU displayed. keys then return (SOFT to make sure that entered Parameters keys to highlight is complete, 2. Select MENU displayed. Changed Main will be displayed. change. The process will are set. The assistant checks Start/Stop Control, Protections, Low Noise Setup, Panel Display, 2). The KEY 1). (SOFT KEY 2) after every continue until all the parameters values and internal KEY 2). KEY 2). values to Parameters" will be displayed with a To stop the process, select ABORT the upload Select EXIT Download Commission will display the parameters Select the desired options panel from the VFD, and press ENTER or DOWN 6. The display be ASSISTANTS KEY and press SEL (SOFT successful" procedure: 51 parameters in the control (SOFT 4. The text "Copying progress indicator. press the 5. When the following are two procedure: screen the UP PANEL the macro. perform and group and store parameters 7. The control 2. Use the UP or DOWN 4. The Start-Up value, To restore the default application Assistant, on the display parameter above 5201, the following 3. Use appears there are not copied. 2. Use the UP or DOWN menu. value 1607, 1. Select MENU displayed. Mode 1. Select MENU displayed. Drive parameter keys sinmltaneously. select the Carrier Start-Up to the main current and application, All Parameters perform that are not saved will not be changed. KEY 1) to return UP and DOWN on the motor The second option downloads only the application parameters to the drive. This is recommended when using the same application for drives of different sizes. Parameters 9905, 9906, 9907, 9908, 7. Choose another parameter or press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the listing of parameter groups. Continue until all the parameters have been configured and then press EXIT (SOFT panel can then be downloaded into available. The first option is to download all parameters. This copies both application and motor parameters to the drive from the control panel. This is recommended when using the same To upload 6. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to store the modified Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous IMPORTANT: Mode application for drives of the same size. This can also be used create a backup of the parameters group for the drive. PARAMETERS to highlight (SOFT keys menu to highlight and press SEL (SOFT or on the procedure: Main and press ENTER DOWN and press EDIT 5. Use the UP parameter. the parameters the following KEY 2. Use the UP or DOWN 3. Use Backup Parameter The drive parameter back up mode is used to export the parameters from one drive to another. The parameters can be uploaded from a memory. mode drive. To change Drive (CONT) will is complete, the will be displayed. then return (SOFT text "Parameter to the PAR BACKUP menu. KEY 1) to return to the main menu. panel can now be disconnected from the drive. Download Application Parameters 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight the desired I/O setting and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). 4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select the parameter to view. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2). 5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press SAVE (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration. Press CANCEL (SOFT KEY 1) to keep the previous value. Any modifications that are not saved will not be changed. To download application parameters only to the control panel from the VFD, perform the following procedure: 1. Install the control panel with the correct parameters onto the VFD. 2. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight PAR BACKUP on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). 4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DOWNLOAD APPLICATION and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). 5. The text "Downloading Parameters (partial)" will be displayed with a progress indicator. To stop the process, select ABORT (SOFT KEY 1). 6. When the download is complete, the text "Parameter download successful" will be displayed. 7. The display will then return to the PAR BACKUP menu. Select EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) to return to the main menu. 8. The control panel can now be disconnected from the drive. Clock Set Mode The clock set mode is used for setting the date and time for the internal clock of the VFD. In order to use the timer functions of the VFD control, the internal clock must be set. The date is used to determine weekdays and is visible in the fault logs. To set the clock, perform the following procedure: 1. Select MENU (SOFT KEY 2). The Main menu will be displayed. 2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CLOCK SET on the display screen and press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). The clock set parameter list will be displayed. 3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight CLOCK VISIBILITY and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). This parameter is used to display or hide the clock on the screen. Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET TIME and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the hours and minutes. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 5. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight TIME FORMAT and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 6. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight SET DATE and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the day, month, and year. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 7. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight DATE FORMAT and press SEL (SOFT KEY 2). Use the UP or DOWN keys to change the parameter setting. Press OK (SOFT KEY 2) to save the configuration and return to the Clock Set menu. 8. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) twice to return to the main menu. I/O Settings Mode The I/O Settings mode is used for viewing and editing the I/O settings. To configure the I/O settings, perform the following procedure: 1. Select MENU (SOFT displayed. 2. Use the UP or DOWN the display screen and I/O Settings parameter KEY 2). The Main menu will be keys to highlight I/O SETTINGS on press ENTER (SOFT KEY 2). The list will be displayed. 6. Press EXIT (SOFT KEY 1) twice to return to the main menu. VFD Diagnostics The drive detects error situations and reports them using: • Green and red LEDs on the body of the drive (located under the keypad) • Status LED on the control panel • Control panel display • The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits (parameters 0305 to 0309) The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. The user can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to ignore the error situation, report the situation as an alarm, or report the situation as a fault. Faults (Red LED Lit) The VFD signals that it has detected a severe error, or fault, by: • Enabling the red LED on the drive (LED is either steady or flashing) • Setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter (0305 to 0307) • Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code • Stopping the motor (if it was on) • Sets an @propriate bit in Fault Word parameter 0305- 0307. The fault code on the control panel display is temporary. Pressing the MENU, ENTER, UP button or DOWN buttons removes the fault message. The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active. Alarms (Green LED Flashing) For less severe errors, called alarms, the diagnostic display is advisory. For these situations, the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual. In these situations, the drive: • Flashes the green LED on the drive (does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors) • Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter (0308 or 0309) • Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and/or name Alarm messages dis@pear from the control panel display after a few seconds. The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists. Correcting Faults The recommended corrective action for faults is shown in the Fault Listing Table 41. The VFD can also be reset to remove the fault. If an external source for a start command is selected and is active, the VFD may start immediately after fault reset. To reset a fault indicated by a flashing red LED, turn off the power for 5 minutes. To reset a fault indicated by a red LED (not flashing), press RESET from the control panel or turn off the power for 5 minutes. Depending on the value of parameter 1604 (FAULT RESET SELECT), digital input or serial communication could also be used to reset the drive. When the fault has been corrected, the motor can be started. 85 VFD Maintenance History For reference, 0401, 0412, the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0413. For the most recent fault (identified by parameter 0401), the drive stores additional data (in parameters 0402 through 0411) to aid in troubleshooting a problem. For example, a parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault. To clear the fault parameters), history (all of Group 04, Fault History follow these steps: 1. In the 0401. control panel, Parameters mode, select parameter 2. Press EDIT. 3. Press the UP and DOWN buttons To Heat alarms, first determine If diagnostics troubleshooting defective during the warranty if the Alarm has determined period, contact 1-800-435-7365, option will review the problem determination by Sink The heat sink dusty sink is faults become sink annually, fins accumulate dust from the cooling air. Since a less efficient at cooling the drive, overtemperature more likely. In a normal environment check the heat in a dusty environment check more often. 2. Remove the cooling fan. corrective action (action is not always required). find and address the root cause of the problem. Inc., at technician Table 43 lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended Carrier. Alarms correct the VFD requires very Check the heat sink as follows (when necessary): 1. Remove power from drive. simultaneously. 4. Press SAVE. Correcting If installed in an appropriate environment, little maintenance. regarding how to requires any Use Table 42 to that the drive is ABB Automation 4, option 3. with the caller proceed. 3. Blow clean compressed air (not hunfid) from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust. If there a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning in another room. 4. Replace the cooling fan. This 5. Restore power. A qualified and make a may involve dispatching a designated service station (DSS) representative from an authorized station, dispatching a replacement unit, or advising return for repair. 86 APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION Table FAULT CODE 1 FAULT NAME IN PANEL OVERCURRENT 2 DC OVERVOLT 41 -- FAULT DESCRIPTION (CONT) CODES AND RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE ACTION Output current is excessive. Check for excessive motor load, insufficient acceleration ACCELER TIME 1, default 30 seconds), or faulty motor, motor cables or connections. time (parameters 2202 Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. Check for static or transient over voltages in the input power supply, insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1, default 30 seconds), or undersized brake chopper (if present). 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4 SHORT CIRC 5 OVERLOAD 5 DC OVERVOLT 7 All LOSS Analog input 1 loss. Analog input value is less than All FLT LIMIT (3021). Check source and connection input and parameter settings for All FLT LIMIT (3021) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION. for analog 8 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss. Analog input value is less than AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022). Check source and connection input and parameter settings for AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION. for analog 9 MOT OVERTEMP 10 Drive heat sink is overheated. Temperature is at or above 115°C (239°F). flow, dirt or dust coating on the heat sink, excessive ambient temperature, Fault current. Check for short-circuit Inverter overload condition. Check for fan failure, obstructions or excessive motor load. in the air in the motor cable(s) or motor or supply disturbances. The drive output current exceeds the ratings. Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient. under voltage on main circuit. Check for missing phase in the input power supply, blown fuse, or Motor is too hot, as estimated by the drive. Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters (3005 through 3009). Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters. used for the estimate PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to accept start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel. To correct check the communication lines and connections. Check parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR, parameters in Group 10: Command Inputs and Group 11 :Reference Select (if drive operation is REM). 11 ID RUN FAIL The motor ID run was not completed 12 MOTOR STALL successfully. Motor or process stall. Motor is operating Check parameters 3010 through 3012. Check motor connections. in the stall region. Check for excessive load or insufficient 13 RESERVED 14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active. See parameter 15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active. See parameter 15 EARTH FAULT The load on the input power system is out of balance. cable does not exceed maximum specified length. 17 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected. Check for disconnected through 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE. 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault. The thermistor 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault. A communication-related Carrier. 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault. Low voltage condition detected on the OINT board. Contact Carrier. 21 CURR MEAS 22 SUPPLY PHASE 23 RESERVED 24 OVERSPEED motor power. Not used. measuring Internal fault. Current measurement FAULT 1. 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2. Check for faults in the motor or motor cable. Verify that motor load. Check parameters the internal temperature problem 3003 EXTERNAL 3013 UNDERLOAD of the drive is open or shorted. FUNCTION Contact Carrier. has been detected between the OMIO and OINT boards. Contact is out of range. Contact Carrier. Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high. Check for missing main phase or blown fuse. Not used. Motor speed is greater than 120% of the larger (in magnitude) of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED parameters. Check parameter settings for 2001 and 2002. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check applicability of torque control. Check brake chopper and resistor. 25 RESERVED 26 DRIVE ID 27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration SERIAL 1 ERR Field bus communication has timed out. Check fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME). Check communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate). Check for poor connections and/or noise on line. 29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration 30 FORCE TRIP 31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application. The meaning is protocol dependent. 32 EFB 2 Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application. The meaning is protocol dependent. 33 EFB 3 Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol application. The meaning is protocol dependent. 34 MOTOR PHASE 28 35 OUTP WIRING Not used. Internal fault. Configuration block drive ID is not valid. file has an error. Contact Carrier. file for the field bus adapter. Fault trip forced by the field bus. See the field bus reference literature. Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor phases is lost. Check for motor fault, motor cable fault, thermal relay fault, or internal fault. Error in power wiring suspected. Check that input power wired to drive output. Check for ground faults. 101-105 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive. Contact Carrier and report the error number. 201-205 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive. Contact Carrier and report the error number. 87 APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION Table FAULT CODE FAULT NAME IN PANEL 1000 PAR HZRPM 1001 PAR PFA REFNG 1002 PAR PFA IOCNF 41 -- FAULT DESCRIPTION CODES (CONT) (cont) AND RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following: 2001 MINIMUM SPEED > 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2001 MINIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range: 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside of the range: 2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range: 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside of the range: Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that 2007 MINIMUM Parameter values are inconsistent. The number of programmed ACTION -128/+ 128 -128/+ 128 128/+ 128 128/+ 128 FREQ is negative, when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active. PFA relays does not match with Interlock configuration, when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active. Check consistency of RELAY OUTPUT parameters 1401 through 1403, and 1410 through 1412. Check 8117 NR OF AUX MOTORS, 8118 AUTOCHANGE INTERV, and 8120 INTERLOCKS. 1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. 2MIN > 1305AI 2 MAX. Check that parameter 1301 AI 1 MIN > 1302 AI 1 MAX and that parameter 1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. AO2MIN > 1511AO2MAX. Check that parameter 1504 AO 1 MIN > 1505 AO 1 MAX and that parameter 1005 PAR PCU 2 1006 PAR EXT RO 1007 PAR FBUS 1008 PAR PFA MODE 1009 PAR PCU 1 1010 OVERRIDE/PFA CONFLICT Parameter values for following parameters: 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR Where: PN = 1000 * • 9909 MOTOR NOM power control are inconsistent: Improper 1304 AI 1510 motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power. Check the NOM CURR * 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT * 1.73 / PN) < 2.6 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are kW) or PN = 746 POWER (if units are HP, e.g., in US) Parameter values are inconsistent. Check the extension OUTPUTS 4 through 6 have non-zero values. relay module for connection Parameter values are inconsistent. Check that a parameter 10 (COMM)), but 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 0. Parameter values are inconsistent. ENABLE activated. is set for field bus control and 1410 through 1412 RELAY (e.g., 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS The 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must = 3 (SCALAR SPEED) when 8123 PFA Parameter values for power control are inconsistent or improper motor nominal frequency or speed. Check for both of the following: 1 < (60 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ/9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED < 16 0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED / (120 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / Motor poles) < 0.992 Override mode is enabled and PFA is activated at the same time. This cannot be done because PFA interlocks be observed in the override mode. 88 cannot = APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION Table 42 -- ALARM (CONT) CODES ALARM CODE ALARM NAME IN PANEL 2001 - Reserved 2002 - Reserved 2003 - Reserved 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed. Do not attempt to change the direction Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change (if reverse operation is safe). 2005 I/O COMM Field bus communication has timed out. Check fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME). Check communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate). Check for poor connections and/or noise on line. 2006 All LOSS Analog input 1 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting, Check input source and connections. Check the parameter that sets the minimum (3021) and the parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001). 2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting, Check input source and connections. Check parameter that sets the minimum (3022) and the parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001). 2008 PANEL LOSS 2009 - 2010 MOT OVERTEMP 2011 UNDERLOAD DESCRIPTION AND RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE ACTION of motor rotation, Panel communication is lost and either the VFD is in local control mode (the control panel displays HAND), or the VFD is in remote control mode (AUTO) and is parameterized to accept start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel, To correct, check the communication lines and connections, Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS, and parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE SELECT (if drive operation is REM). Reserved 2012 MOTOR STALL 2013* AUTORESET 2014 AUTOCHANGE 2015 PFA INTERLOCK 2016 - 2017" OFF BUTTON 2018 PID SLEEP Motor is hot, based on either the VFD estimate or on temperature feedback, This alarm warns that a Motor Overload fault trip may be near, Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005 through 3009). Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters. Motor load is lower than expected. This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near. Check that the motor and drive ratings match (motor is NOT undersized for the drive). Check the settings on parameters 3013 to 3015. Motor is operating in the stall region. This alarm warns that a Motor Stall fault trip may be near. This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault reset, which may start the motor. To control automatic reset, use parameter group 31 (AUTOMATIC RESET). This alarm warns that the PFA autochange Pump Alternation macro. function is active. To control PFA, use parameter group 81 (PFA) and the This alarm warns that the PFA interlocks are active, which means that the drive cannot start any motor (when Autochange is used), or a speed regulated motor (when Autochange is not used). Reserved This alarm indicates that the OFF button has been pressed. This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active, which means that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends. To control PID sleep, use parameters 4022 through 4026 or 4122 through 4126. 2019 ID RUN 2020 OVERRIDE 2021 START ENABLE 1 MISSING This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing. To control Start Enable 1 function, correct, check the digital input configuration and the communication settings. use parameter 2022 START ENABLE 2 MISSING This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing. To control Start Enable 2 function, correct, check the digital input configuration and the communication settings. use parameter1609. 2023 This EMERGENCY alarm is not indicated The VFD is performing STOP by a relay an ID run. Override mode is activated. Emergency output, even when 43 -- MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE Heat sink temperature cleaning check and 1608. To To stop is activated. the relay output is configured to indicate FLT/ALARM). Table or INTERVALS INTERVAL Every 6 to 12 months (depending on the dustiness of the environment) Main cooling fan replacement Every five years HVAC Control panel battery change Every ten years 89 alarm conditions, parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT = 5 (ALARM) or 16 APPENDIX B - VFD INFORMATION (CONT) Main Fan Replacement The main cooling fan of the VFD has a life span of about 60,000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load. The expected life span doubles temperature (fan temperature and drive loads). Fan failure can for each 18 F drop in the fan is a function be predicted by the of ambient increasing temperatures noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heat sink temperature in spite of heat sink cleaning. If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available To replace the main fan for frame sizes RI through following (see Main Fan Replacement 1. Remove power 2. Remove drive cover. the from drive. the retaining clips the fan cable. 5. Install the new fan by reversing 6. Restore R2, perform figure): 3. For frame sizes RI and R2, press together on the fan cover and lift. 4. Disconnect 2 from Carrier. Steps 2 to 4. power. (08681 Fig. 43 - Main (Frame Control Panel Fan Replacement Sizes R1-R2) Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. cleaners which could scratch the display window. Avoid harsh Battery Replacement A battery function is only used in assistant control available and enabled. The panels that have the clock battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions. The expected for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control Replace the battery with type CR2032. 90 life use panel. APPENDIX Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 44 -- Fan Performance - 48PDD05 DATA Vertical Units AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.4 0.6 0.2 Rpm 5O4 527 551 576 6OO 626 651 677 7O3 C - START-UP Bhp 0.16 0.19 0.22 0.26 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.46 0.52 Rpm 613 632 652 673 694 716 739 762 785 Bhp 0.23 0.27 0.31 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.51 0.57 0.64 Rpm 710 725 741 759 777 797 817 838 859 Bhp 0.31 0.35 0.40 0.44 0.50 0.55 0.62 0.69 0.76 Rpm 798 810 823 838 854 871 889 9O8 927 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.4 1.6 1.2 (in. wg) 0.8 1.0 Bhp 0.40 0.44 0.49 0.54 0.60 0.66 0.73 0.80 0.88 Rpm 881 890 900 912 926 941 957 974 992 Bhp 0.49 0.54 0.59 0.65 0.71 0.78 0.85 0.93 1.01 (in. wg) 1.8 2. Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm Bhp 957 0.59 1030 0.70 1098 0.80 1163 0.91 1225 1.03 964 973 983 0.64 0.70 0.76 1035 1042 1050 0.75 0.81 0.87 1102 1107 1114 0.86 0.92 0.99 1166 1170 1176 0.98 1.04 1.12 1227 1231 1235 1.10 1.17 1.24 994 1007 1021 0.82 0.89 0.97 1060 1071 1083 0.94 1.02 1.10 1122 1132 1143 1.06 1.14 1.23 1183 1191 1200 1.19 1.27 1.36 1241 1248 Rpm 1256 1.32 1.41 Bhp 1.50 1037 1053 1.05 1.14 1097 1111 1.18 1.27 1155 1168 1.32 1.41 1211 1223 1.45 1.55 1266 1276 1.60 1.70 Bhp 0.41 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.61 0.67 0.74 0.82 0.90 Rpm 884 894 905 917 931 947 963 981 999 Bhp 0.92 0.98 1.05 1.12 1.20 1.28 1.37 1.47 1.57 Rpm 1228 1230 1234 1239 1245 1253 1261 1271 1282 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower NOTES: i. Maxinmm 2. See General continuous BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Notes. Table 45 -- Fan Performance - 48PDE05 Vertical Units AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.4 0.6 0.2 Rpm 509 533 557 582 608 634 660 686 713 Bhp 0.16 0.19 0.23 0.27 0.31 0.36 0.41 0.47 0.54 Rpm 618 637 658 679 701 723 747 770 795 Rpm 714 730 746 764 783 803 824 846 868 Bhp 0.32 0.36 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.56 0.63 0.70 0.78 Rpm 802 814 828 843 860 877 896 915 935 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.4 1.6 1.2 Rpm 961 968 977 987 999 1013 1027 1043 1060 Bhp 0.24 0.27 0.31 0.36 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.58 0.66 Bhp 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.77 0.83 0.90 0.98 1.06 1.16 Rpm 1033 1039 1046 1054 1065 1076 1089 1103 1118 Bhp 0.70 0.76 0.82 0.88 0.95 1.03 1.11 1.20 1.29 Rpm 1101 1106 1111 1118 1127 1137 1148 1161 1175 (in. wg) 0.8 Bhp 0.81 0.87 0.93 1.00 1.07 1.15 1.24 1.33 1.43 2. See General 91 continuous 1.8 Rpm 1166 1169 1174 1180 1187 1196 1206 1217 1229 BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Bhp 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.66 0.72 0.79 0.86 0.94 1.02 (in. wg) NOTES: i. Maxinmm 1.0 Notes. 2.0 Bhp 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.25 1.33 1.42 1.51 1.61 1.72 Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 46 -- Fan Bhp 0.17 0.20 0.24 0.28 0.32 0.37 0.43 0.50 0.57 Rpm 628 648 668 691 714 737 762 787 813 Vertical Units Bhp 0.24 0.28 0.32 0.37 0.42 0.48 0.54 0.61 0.68 Rpm 723 739 756 775 795 816 838 861 884 Bhp 0.33 0.37 0.41 0.46 0.52 0.58 0.65 0.72 0.80 Bhp 0.61 0.66 0.72 0.78 0.85 0.92 1.00 1.09 1.19 Rpm 1040 1046 1054 1063 1074 1087 1100 1116 1132 Bhp 0.71 0.77 0.83 0.90 0.97 1.05 1.13 1.22 1.32 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower Rpm 1108 1112 1119 1127 1136 1147 1159 1173 1188 (in. wg) 0.8 Rpm 811 823 837 853 870 889 909 929 951 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.4 1.6 1.2 Rpm 968 976 985 996 1009 1024 1039 1056 1074 - 48PDF05 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.4 0.6 0.2 Rpm 520 545 570 596 623 650 677 705 734 Performance Bhp 0.82 0.88 0.95 1.02 1.09 1.17 1.26 1.36 1.46 1.0 Bhp 0.41 0.46 0.51 0.56 0.62 0.69 0.76 0.84 0.93 Rpm 892 902 913 927 942 958 976 994 1014 Bhp 0.93 1.00 1.07 1.14 1.22 1.31 1.40 1.50 1.61 Rpm 1233 1237 1241 1247 1254 1262 1272 1283 1295 Bhp 0.56 0.62 0.69 0.76 0.84 0.92 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.33 1.45 Rpm 925 939 955 972 990 1009 1029 1050 1071 1092 1115 Bhp 1.14 1.22 1.30 1.39 1.49 1.60 1.71 1.83 1.95 2.09 2.23 Rpm 1245 1252 1260 1269 1280 1291 1304 1318 1333 1349 1365 Bhp 0.51 0.56 0.61 0.67 0.73 0.80 0.88 0.97 1.06 (in. wg) 1.8 Rpm 1172 1176 1181 1188 1196 1205 1216 1229 1242 2.0 Bhp 1.04 1.11 1.19 1.27 1.35 1.44 1.54 1.64 1.75 NOTES: i. Maxinnml 2. See General continuous BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Notes. Table 47 -- Fan Performance - 48PDD06 Vertical Units AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.4 0.6 0.2 Rpm 593 62O 646 673 7OO 728 755 783 811 84O 868 Bhp 0.27 0.32 0.37 0.43 0.49 0.56 0.63 0.71 0.80 0.90 1.00 Rpm 688 711 734 758 783 807 833 858 884 910 937 1.2 Rpm 995 1007 1021 1036 1053 1070 1088 1107 1127 1147 1168 Bhp 0.78 0.85 0.92 1.00 1.08 1.18 1.28 1.38 1.50 1.62 1.75 Rpm 1061 1072 1084 1098 1112 1128 1145 1162 1181 1200 1220 Bhp 0.37 0.42 0.47 0.53 0.60 0.68 0.76 0.84 0.94 1.04 1.15 Rpm 773 793 813 835 857 879 903 926 950 975 1000 Bhp 0.46 0.52 0.58 0.64 0.72 0.80 0.88 0.97 1.07 1.18 1.30 (in. wg) 0.8 Rpm 851 868 886 905 925 946 968 990 1012 1035 1059 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.4 1.6 Bhp Rpm Bhp 0.89 1125 1.01 0.96 1134 1.09 1.04 1145 1.17 1.13 1157 1.26 1.22 1170 1.35 1.31 1184 1.45 1.42 1199 1.56 1.53 1216 1.68 1.65 1233 1.80 1.77 1251 1.93 1.91 1270 2.07 2. See General 92 continuous 1.8 Rpm 1186 1194 1203 1214 1226 1238 1253 1268 1284 1300 1318 BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Bhp 0.67 0.73 0.80 0.88 0.96 1.05 1.14 1.24 1.35 1.47 1.60 (in. wg) NOTES: i. Maxinnml 1.0 Notes. 2.0 Bhp 1.26 1.35 1.44 1.53 1.63 1.74 1.86 1.98 2.11 2.25 2.40 Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 48 -- Fan AVAILABLE 0.4 0.2 Bhp 0.29 0.33 0.39 0.45 0.51 0.59 0.67 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.06 Rpm 607 634 662 690 719 748 777 807 837 867 897 Rpm 7OO 724 748 773 799 825 852 879 9O7 935 963 Bhp 0.79 0.86 0.94 1.02 1.11 1.21 1.31 1.43 1.55 1.68 1.82 Rpm 1070 1081 1094 1109 1125 1142 1160 1179 1198 1219 1240 - 48PDE06 Rpm 784 8O4 826 848 872 896 92O 946 971 998 1024 Bhp 0.91 0.98 1.06 1.15 1.24 1.35 1.45 1.57 1.70 1.83 1.97 Rpm 1133 1143 1155 1168 1182 1197 1214 1231 1250 1269 1290 i. Maxinnml Table AIRFLOW (CFM) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower Bhp 0.47 0.53 0.60 0.67 0.74 0.83 0.92 1.01 1.12 1.24 1.36 (in. wg) 0.8 Rpm 861 879 898 918 94O 962 985 1008 1032 1057 1082 Bhp 1.03 1.11 1.19 1.28 1.38 1.49 1.60 1.72 1.85 1.99 2.14 1.0 Bhp 0.57 0.64 0.71 0.78 0.86 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.26 1.38 1.51 Rpm 934 950 967 985 1004 1024 1045 1067 1090 1113 1137 Bhp 0.68 0.75 0.82 0.90 0.98 1.08 1.18 1.29 1.40 1.53 1.66 Bhp 1.15 1.24 1.32 1.42 1.52 1.63 1.75 1.87 2.01 2.15 2.30 Rpm Bhp 1260 1269 1279 1291 1304 1318 1333 1253 1349 1366 1.37 1.46 1.56 1.66 1.78 1.90 2.03 1.28 2.17 2.31 Bhp 0.59 0.65 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 1.08 1.19 1.31 1.43 1.57 Rpm 944 960 978 997 1017 1039 1061 1084 1108 1133 1158 Bhp 1.17 1.25 1.35 1.44 1.55 1.67 1.79 1.92 2.06 2.21 2.37 Rpm 1260 1269 1278 1290 1302 1316 1331 1348 1365 1384 (in. wg) 1.8 Rpm 1194 1203 1213 1224 1237 1251 1267 1283 1300 1318 1337 2. NOTES: 2. See General 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 Units EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.6 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower AIRFLOW (Cfm) Vertical EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.6 Bhp 0.38 0.43 0.49 0.55 0.63 0.70 0.79 0.88 0.98 1.09 1.21 AVAILABLE 1.4 1.2 Rpm 1004 1017 1032 1048 1066 1084 1104 1124 1145 1167 1189 Performance 49 -- Fan Performance 0.2 Rpm 62O 648 677 7O7 737 767 798 829 861 893 925 Bhp 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.47 0.54 0.61 0.70 0.79 0.89 1.00 1.12 Rpm 711 736 762 788 815 843 871 9OO 929 959 989 1.2 Rpm 1013 1027 1043 1060 1078 1098 1119 1140 1163 1186 1210 Bhp 0.81 0.88 0.96 1.05 1.14 1.24 1.35 1.47 1.60 1.73 1.88 Rpm 1078 1091 1105 1120 1137 1155 1174 1195 1216 1238 1261 - 48PDF06 continuous BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Vertical Units AVAILABLE 0.4 Bhp 0.39 0.45 0.51 0.58 0.65 0.73 0.82 0.92 1.03 1.15 1.27 EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.6 Rpm Bhp 794 0.49 816 0.55 838 0.61 862 0.69 887 0.77 912 0.85 938 0.95 965 1.05 992 1.17 1020 1.29 1048 1.42 AVAILABLE 1.4 EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.6 Bhp 0.92 1.00 1.08 1.18 1.27 1.38 1.49 1.62 1.75 1.89 2.04 Rpm 1141 1152 1165 1179 1194 1210 1228 1247 1267 1288 1309 Notes. Bhp 1.05 1.13 1.21 1.31 1.41 1.52 1.64 1.77 1.90 2.05 2.20 (in. wg) 0.8 Rpm 871 89O 910 931 954 977 1001 1026 1052 1078 1105 2. See General 93 continuous 2.0 1.8 Rpm 1202 1211 1222 1235 1249 1264 1280 1298 1317 1336 1357 BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Bhp 0.70 0.76 0.84 0.92 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.33 1.45 1.58 1.72 (in. wg) NOTES: i. Maxinnml 1.0 Notes. Bhp 1.30 1.39 1.48 1.59 1.70 1.81 1.94 2.08 2.22 2.37 Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 50 -- Fan Performance AIRFLOW Bhp 0.12 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.24 0.28 0.32 0.37 0.43 Rpm 559 574 592 611 631 652 674 697 720 Bhp 0.19 0.22 0.25 0.29 0.33 0.38 0.43 0.48 0.55 Units Rpm 661 673 687 703 721 739 759 779 801 Bhp 0.27 0.30 0.34 0.38 0.43 0.48 0.54 0.60 0.67 (Cfm) Rpm Bhp 1200 918 0.54 1300 922 0.58 1400 929 0.63 1500 937 0.69 1600 947 0.74 1700 959 0.81 1800 973 0.88 1900 988 0.95 2000 1004 1.04 Rpm 993 995 1000 1006 1015 1025 1037 1050 1065 Bhp 0.64 0.69 0.74 0.80 0.86 0.93 1.00 1.08 1.17 Rpm 1063 1064 1067 1072 1079 1088 1098 1110 1123 (in. wg) 0.8 Rpm 753 762 774 787 801 818 835 854 873 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.4 1.6 1.2 Bhp 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.91 0.98 1.05 1.13 1.21 1.30 1.0 Bhp Rpm Bhp 0.35 839 0.45 0.39 845 0.49 0.43 853 0.53 0.48 864 0.58 0.53 877 0.63 0.58 891 0.69 0.64 906 0.76 0.71 923 0.83 0.79 941 0.91 Bhp 0.86 0.91 0.97 1.03 1.10 1.18 1.26 1.35 1.44 Rpm 1193 1193 1194 1196 1201 1207 1214 1223 1234 Bhp Rpm Bhp 0.36 842 0.45 0.40 849 0.49 0.44 858 0.54 0.48 869 0.59 0.54 882 0.64 0.59 896 0.70 0.66 912 0.77 0.72 930 0.84 0.80 948 0.92 Rpm 1196 1196 1197 1200 Bhp 0.97 1.03 1.10 1.17 (in. wg) 2.0 1.8 Rpm 1130 1130 1132 1136 1141 1148 1157 1168 1179 Bhp 0.97 1.03 1.09 1.16 1.23 1.31 1.39 1.48 1.58 NOTES: LEGEND Bhp Horizontal AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.4 0.6 0.2 Rpm 436 456 477 500 523 548 573 600 627 - 48PDD05 i. Maxinmnl - Brake Horsepower 2. See General High Range Motor/Drive 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Notes. Required Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) continuous 51 -- Fan Performance Horizontal Units AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.4 0.6 0.2 Rpm 443 463 485 508 532 558 584 611 639 - 48PDE05 Bhp 0.12 0.15 0.17 0.21 0.24 0.28 0.33 0.38 0.44 Rpm 564 580 598 617 638 660 682 706 731 1.2 Bhp 0.20 0.22 0.26 0.30 0.34 0.39 0.44 0.50 0.56 Rpm 666 678 693 709 727 746 766 788 810 Bhp 0.27 0.31 0.34 0.39 0.43 0.49 0.55 0.61 0.68 (in. wg) 0.8 Rpm 758 767 778 792 8O7 824 842 861 882 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg) 1.4 1.6 1.8 Bhp Rpm Bhp Rpm 1.0 AIRFLOW (Cfm) Rpm Bhp Rpm 1200 1300 1400 1500 922 926 933 942 0.55 0.59 0.64 0.69 996 999 1004 1011 0.65 0.69 0.75 0.80 1066 1068 1071 1077 0.75 0.80 0.86 0.92 1133 1133 1136 1140 Bhp 0.86 0.92 0.98 1.04 1600 1700 952 965 0.75 0.82 1020 1030 0.87 0.94 1084 1093 0.99 1.06 1146 1153 1.11 1.19 1205 1211 1.24 1.32 1800 1900 2000 979 995 1012 0.89 0.97 1.05 1043 1057 1072 1.01 1.09 1.18 1104 1116 1130 1.14 1.22 1.32 1163 1174 1186 1.27 1.36 1.46 1220 1229 1240 1.41 1.50 1.60 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower High Range Motor/Drive NOTES: i. Maxinmnl continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Per_rmanee Notes. Required 94 2.0 Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 52 -- Fan Performance AIRFLOW Bhp 0.13 0.16 0.18 0.22 0.26 0.30 0.35 0.41 0.47 Rpm 574 591 610 630 652 675 699 724 750 Bhp 0.20 0.23 0.27 0.31 0.35 0.40 0.46 0.52 0.59 1 (Cfm) Rpm Bhp 1200 929 0.56 1300 934 0.60 1400 941 0.65 1500 951 0.71 1600 963 0.77 1700 976 0.84 1800 991 0.91 1900 1008 0.99 2000 1026 1.08 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower Bhp 0.28 0.32 0.36 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.57 0.63 0.71 Rpm 766 776 788 8O2 819 836 856 876 898 1.0 Bhp 0.37 0.41 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.61 0.68 0.75 0.83 Rpm 850 857 867 879 893 908 925 944 964 (in. wg) 1.8 2. Bhp 0.66 0.71 0.76 0.82 Rpm 1073 1075 1079 1085 Bhp 0.76 0.82 0.87 0.94 Rpm 1139 1140 1143 1148 Bhp 0.87 0.93 0.99 1.06 Rpm 1202 1202 Bhp 0.98 1.05 1208 1.18 1029 1041 1054 1070 1086 0.89 0.96 1.04 1.12 1.21 1093 1103 1115 1129 1144 1.01 1.08 1.16 1.25 1.35 1155 1163 1174 1186 1199 1.13 1.21 1.30 1.39 1.49 1214 1221 1230 1241 1253 1204 1.26 1.34 1.43 1.53 1.63 1.11 Bhp 0.49 0.55 0.61 0.67 0.74 0.82 0.91 1.00 1.10 1.21 1.32 Rpm 877 890 906 922 940 959 979 1001 1022 1045 1069 Bhp 1.05 1.13 1.21 1.29 1.38 1.48 1.59 1.70 1.82 1.96 2.10 Rpm 1207 1212 1219 1227 1238 1249 1262 1277 1292 1309 1326 i. Maxinmm 53 -- Fan Performance AVAILABLE 0.4 Bhp 0.22 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.46 0.53 0.61 0.69 0.78 0.88 Rpm 628 649 671 695 719 745 771 797 824 852 88O Bhp 0.31 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.51 0.58 0.66 0.74 0.83 0.92 1.03 AVAILABLE 1.4 1.2 Rpm 949 961 974 988 1004 1022 1040 1060 1081 1102 1124 continuous 2. See General 0.2 Rpm 521 546 572 599 627 655 684 714 744 775 8O6 Bhp 0.70 0.77 0.83 0.91 0.99 1.07 1.17 1.27 1.38 1.50 1.62 Bhp 0.46 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.66 0.72 0.79 0.87 0.95 Rpm 1003 1006 1012 1020 Required Table 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 Rpm 675 688 703 720 739 759 781 804 828 (in. wg) 0.8 NOTES: - Brake Horsepower High Range Motor/Drive AIRFLOW (Cfm) Units AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.4 1.6 1.2 LEGEND Bhp Horizontal AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.4 0.6 0.2 Rpm 456 477 500 524 550 576 604 633 662 - 48PDF05 Rpm 1018 1027 1039 1052 1066 1082 1099 1117 1136 1156 1177 Bhp 0.82 0.88 0.95 1.03 1.11 1.20 1.30 1.41 1.52 1.65 1.78 - 48PDD06 BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Horizontal Notes. Units EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.6 Rpm 718 737 757 777 799 822 846 871 896 922 948 0.8 Bhp Rpm 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.56 0.63 0.70 0.78 0.87 0.96 1.06 1.18 F]800 F]816 F]834 F]852 F]872 F]893 _915 _938 _961 _985 1010 EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.6 Rpm 1083 1091 1101 1112 1125 1139 1155 1172 1190 1209 1228 (in. wg) Bhp 0.93 1.00 1.08 1.16 1.25 1.34 1.44 1.55 1.67 1.80 1.94 2. See General 95 continuous 1.8 Rpm 1146 1153 1161 1171 1182 1195 1209 1225 1242 1259 1278 BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Bhp 0.60 0.65 0.72 0.79 0.86 0.94 1.03 1.13 1.24 1.35 1.47 (in. wg) NOTES: i. Maxinmm 1.0 Notes. 2.0 Bhp 1.18 1.26 1.34 1.43 1.52 1.62 1.73 1.85 1.98 2.12 2.26 Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 54 -- Fan Performance - 48PDE06 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL 0.2 0.4 Bhp 0.23 0.27 0.31 0.37 0.43 0.49 0.56 0.65 0.73 0.83 0.94 Rpm 536 563 590 619 648 678 709 740 772 8O4 837 Rpm Bhp Rpm 640 0.32 729 663 0.36 749 686 0.42 770 711 0.47 792 737 0.54 816 764 0.61 840 792 0.69 865 820 0.78 891 849 0.87 918 879 0.97 946 909 1.09 974 Rpm 958 971 985 1001 1018 1036 1056 1077 1099 1122 1146 Bhp 0.72 0.78 0.85 0.93 1.01 1.10 1.20 1.31 1.43 1.55 1.69 Rpm 1027 1037 1049 1063 1079 1096 1114 1134 1154 1176 1198 Bhp 0.83 0.90 0.97 1.05 1.14 1.24 1.34 1.45 1.57 1.70 1.84 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower Units STATIC PRESSURE 0.6 Bhp 0.41 0.46 0.52 0.58 0.65 0.73 0.81 0.91 1.01 1.12 1.24 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL 1.4 1.2 Horizontal 0.8 Rpm 811 828 846 866 887 9O9 933 957 982 1008 1034 STATIC PRESSURE 1.6 Rpm 1092 1101 1111 1124 1138 1153 1170 1188 1207 1228 1249 (in. wg) Bhp 0.95 1.02 1.10 1.18 1.27 1.37 1.48 1.60 1.72 1.86 2.00 1.0 Bhp 0.51 0.56 0.62 0.69 0.77 0.85 0.94 1.04 1.14 1.26 1.38 Rpm 887 901 917 935 954 975 996 1019 1042 1066 1092 Bhp 1.07 1.15 1.23 1.32 1.41 1.51 1.63 1.75 1.88 2.02 2.16 Rpm 1214 1221 1228 1238 1249 1262 1276 1292 1309 1327 1346 Bhp 0.52 0.58 0.64 0.71 0.79 0.88 0.97 1.08 1.19 1.31 1.44 Rpm 896 912 929 948 968 990 1013 1037 1062 1087 1114 Bhp 1.09 1.16 1.25 1.34 1.44 1.55 1.67 1.79 1.93 2.07 2.23 Rpm 1222 1229 1238 1248 1261 1275 1290 1307 1325 1344 1365 Bhp 0.61 0.67 0.74 0.81 0.89 0.98 1.07 1.17 1.28 1.40 1.53 (in. wg) 2.0 1.8 Rpm 1154 1162 1171 1182 1194 1208 1224 1241 1259 1278 1298 Bhp 1.20 1.28 1.36 1.45 1.55 1.66 1.78 1.90 2.03 2.18 2.33 NOTES: i. Maxinnml continuous 2. See General BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Notes. Table 55 -- Fan Performance - 48PDF06 Horizontal Units AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower 0.2 Rpm 551 579 6O8 638 668 7OO 732 765 799 833 867 Bhp 0.24 0.28 0.33 0.39 0.45 0.52 0.60 0.68 0.78 0.88 1.00 Rpm 653 676 701 727 755 783 812 842 873 904 936 1.2 Rpm 968 981 996 1013 1031 1051 1072 1094 1118 1142 1168 Bhp 0.73 0.80 0.87 0.95 1.04 1.14 1.24 1.35 1.48 1.61 1.75 Rpm 1035 1047 1060 1075 1092 1110 1129 1150 1172 1195 1219 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL 0.4 Bhp Rpm 0.33 741 0.38 761 0.43 783 0.49 807 0.56 831 0.64 857 0.72 884 0.81 912 0.92 940 1.03 969 1.15 999 STATIC PRESSURE 0.6 Bhp 0.42 0.48 0.54 0.60 0.68 0.76 0.85 0.95 1.05 1.17 1.30 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL 1.4 STATIC PRESSURE 1.6 Bhp 0.85 0.92 0.99 1.08 1.17 1.27 1.38 1.50 1.62 1.76 1.91 Rpm 1100 1110 1121 1135 1150 1166 1185 1204 1225 1246 1269 Bhp 0.97 1.04 1.12 1.21 1.30 1.41 1.52 1.64 1.77 1.92 2.07 (in. wg) 0.8 Rpm 821 839 858 879 9O2 925 95O 976 1002 1030 1058 2. See General 96 continuous 2.0 1.8 Rpm 1162 1171 1181 1193 1206 1221 1238 1256 1275 1296 1317 BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance Bhp 0.62 0.69 0.76 0.83 0.91 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.33 1.46 1.60 (in. wg) NOTES: i. Maxinnml 1.0 Notes. Bhp 1.21 1.29 1.38 1.48 1.58 1.69 1.82 1.95 2.09 2.24 2.40 Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 56 -- AVAILABLE 0.4 0.2 Rpm 492 513 534 557 58O 6O3 627 651 675 Bhp 0.15 0.18 0.21 0.24 0.28 0.33 0.38 0.43 0.49 Rpm 604 620 638 657 677 697 718 739 761 Bhp 0.22 0.26 0.29 0.33 0.38 0.43 0.48 0.54 0.61 - 50PD05 Vertical Units EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.6 Rpm 701 714 729 745 762 779 798 817 837 Bhp 0.31 0.34 0.38 0.43 0.48 0.53 0.59 0.65 0.72 (in. wg) 0.8 Rpm 790 800 812 825 839 855 871 889 907 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.4 1.6 1.2 Rpm 95O 955 962 971 981 993 1005 1019 1034 Fan Performance 1.0 Bhp 0.39 0.43 0.48 0.53 0.58 0.64 0.70 0.77 0.85 Rpm 873 880 889 900 912 926 940 956 972 Bhp 0.49 0.53 0.58 0.63 0.69 0.75 0.82 0.89 0.97 (in. wg) 1.8 2.0 Bhp 0.58 0.63 Rpm 1023 1027 Bhp 0.69 0.74 Rpm 1092 1094 Bhp 0.79 0.85 Rpm 1157 1158 Bhp 0.90 0.96 Rpm 1219 1220 Bhp 1.02 1.08 0.68 0.74 0.80 0.87 0.94 1.02 1.10 1032 1039 1047 1057 1068 1080 1094 0.79 0.85 0.92 0.99 1.06 1.14 1.23 1098 1103 1110 1118 1128 1139 1151 0.91 0.97 1.04 1.11 1.19 1.28 1.37 1161 1165 1171 1178 1186 1196 1206 1.03 1.09 1.17 1.24 1.33 1.41 1.51 1222 1225 1229 1235 1242 1251 1260 1.15 1.22 1.30 1.38 1.46 1.56 1.65 Bhp 0.54 0.59 0.65 0.72 0.79 0.87 0.95 1.04 1.14 1.24 1.35 Rpm Bhp 908 0.64 920 0.70 934 0.76 950 0.83 966 0.91 983 0.99 1001 1.08 1020 1.18 1039 1.28 1059 1.38 1079 1.50 Bhp 1.11 1.18 1.26 1.35 1.44 1.53 1.64 1.75 1.87 1.99 2.13 Rpm 1231 1236 1242 1250 1259 1269 1280 1293 1306 1320 1335 LEGEND NOTES: i. Maximum continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Performance Notes. Bhp - Brake Horsepower Table 57 -- Fan Performance - 50PD06 Vertical Units AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 LEGEND Bhp - Brake Horsepower AVAILABLE EXTERNAL 0.4 0.2 Bhp 0.25 0.29 0.34 0.39 0.45 0.51 0.57 0.65 0.73 0.81 0.91 Rpm 568 592 616 641 665 690 716 742 768 794 820 Rpm 667 687 708 730 752 775 798 821 845 869 894 Rpm 753 771 789 809 829 850 871 892 915 937 960 Bhp 0.44 0.49 0.54 0.61 0.67 0.75 0.82 0.91 1.00 1.10 1.20 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL 1.4 1.2 Rpm 978 989 1001 1015 1029 1045 1061 1078 1096 1115 1134 Bhp 0.34 0.39 0.44 0.50 0.56 0.63 0.70 0.78 0.86 0.96 1.05 Bhp 0.75 0.81 0.88 0.96 1.04 1.12 1.21 1.31 1.42 1.53 1.65 Rpm 1046 1055 1065 1077 1090 1104 1119 1135 1151 1169 1187 Bhp 0.87 0.93 1.00 1.08 1.16 1.26 1.35 1.45 1.57 1.68 1.81 STATIC PRESSURE 0.6 0.8 Rpm 833 848 864 881 900 918 938 958 979 1000 1021 STATIC PRESSURE 1.6 Rpm 1110 1117 1126 1136 1148 1161 1174 1189 1204 1221 1238 (in. wg) Bhp 0.98 1.05 1.13 1.21 1.30 1.39 1.49 1.60 1.71 1.84 1.97 (in. wg) 2. See General 97 continuous BHP is 2.0. Fan Performance 2.0 1.8 Rpm 1172 1178 1185 1194 1204 1216 1228 1241 1256 1271 1287 NOTES: i. Maxinnml 1.0 Notes. Bhp 1.23 1.31 1.39 1.48 1.58 1.68 1.79 1.90 2.02 2.15 2.29 1 Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 58 -- Fan Performance Bhp 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.22 0.25 0.29 0.34 0.39 Bhp 0.26 0.29 0.33 0.37 0.41 0.46 0.51 0.57 Rpm 745 752 761 773 786 801 817 834 Bhp 0.35 0.38 0.42 0.46 0.51 0.56 0.62 0.68 Rpm 831 835 842 851 862 875 889 904 Bhp 0.44 0.47 0.51 0.56 0.61 0.67 0.73 0.80 694 0.51 777 0.63 852 0.75 921 0.87 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.4 1.6 1200 1300 911 913 0.53 0.57 _986 _986 1500 1600 1700 1800 925 934 944 956 0.67 0.72 0.78 0.85 _995 1002 1010 1021 1900 2000 1400 LEGEND 970 985 918 0.92 1.00 0.62 1033 1047 _989 1.2 Rpm 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 1.8 2.0 Rpm 1056 Bhp 0.74 Rpm 1123 Bhp 0.85 Rpm 1187 Bhp 0.96 0.68 0.72 0.78 0.84 1056 1058 1061 1067 0.78 0.84 0.89 0.95 1122 1123 1125 1129 0.90 0.95 1.01 1.08 1185 1185 1186 1189 1.01 1.07 1.14 1.21 0.90 0.97 1074 1083 1.02 1.09 1135 1143 1.15 1.23 1194 1200 1.28 1.36 1.04 1.13 1094 1106 1.17 1.26 1152 1162 1.31 1.40 1208 1217 1.45 1.54 NOTES: i. Maxinmnl continuous BHP is 2.0. 2. See General Fan Perfornlanee Notes. Required Table AIRFLOW (Cfm) (in. wg) Bhp 0.63 Bhp - Brake Horsepower 2500 1.0 Rpm 652 662 674 688 704 720 738 757 Bhp 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 (in. wg) 0.8 Bhp 0.19 0.21 0.24 0.27 0.31 0.35 0.40 0.45 Rpm AIRFLOW (Cfm) Units Rpm 548 561 577 593 611 630 650 672 AIRFLOW (Cfm) High Range Motor/Drive Horizontal AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.4 0.6 0.2 Rpm 422 439 457 477 498 521 545 569 595 - 50PD05 59 -- Fan Performance Rpm 491 513 537 561 586 613 64O 667 Bhp 0.19 0.23 0.27 0.31 0.36 0.41 0.47 0.54 695 724 753 Bhp - Brake Horsepower Low Range Motor/Drive Required Units (in. wg) 0.8 1.0 0.61 0.69 Rpm 604 623 643 664 686 709 732 757 782 807 Bhp 0.28 0.32 0.37 0.42 0.47 0.53 0.60 0.67 0.75 0.84 Rpm 697 714 731 750 770 790 812 834 857 881 Bhp 0.37 0.42 0.47 0.52 0.58 0.65 0.72 0.80 0.89 0.98 Rpm 781 795 810 827 845 864 884 904 926 948 Bhp 0.47 0.52 0.57 0.63 0.70 0.77 0.85 0.93 1.02 1.12 Rpm 859 871 884 899 915 932 950 969 989 1010 Bhp 0.57 0.62 0.68 0.75 0.82 0.89 0.97 1.06 1.16 1.26 0.78 833 0.93 905 1.08 971 1.23 1032 1.38 Bhp 1.03 1.09 1.17 1.24 1.33 1.42 1.52 1.63 1.74 1.86 1.99 Rpm 1192 1196 1201 1208 1217 1227 1238 1251 1265 1279 1295 AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 1.4 1.6 1.2 LEGEND Horizontal AVAILABLE EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0.4 0.6 0.2 Rpm 932 942 953 966 98O 996 1012 1030 1049 1068 1089 - 50PD06 Bhp 0.68 0.73 0.80 0.86 0.94 1.02 1.11 1.20 1.30 1.41 1.53 Rpm 1002 1009 1019 1030 1043 1057 1072 1088 1106 1124 1143 Bhp 0.79 0.85 0.91 0.99 1.06 1.15 1.24 1.34 1.44 1.56 1.68 Rpm 1068 1074 1082 1092 1103 1115 1129 1144 1160 1178 1196 Bhp 0.91 0.97 1.04 1.11 1.19 1.28 1.38 1.48 1.59 1.71 1.84 (in. wg) 1.8 Rpm 1132 1136 1143 1151 1161 1172 1184 1198 1213 1229 1246 NOTES: i. Maxinmnl 2. See General 98 continuous BHP is 2.0. Fan Perfornlanee Notes. 2.0 Bhp 1.15 1.22 1.30 1.38 1.47 1.56 1.67 1.78 1.89 2.02 2.16 GENERAL 1, Static pressure losses from NOTES accessories and FOR FAN PERFORMANCE 4. Extensive motor and drive testing on these units ensures that the full horsepower range of the motor can be utilized with confidence, Using the fan motors up to the bhp rating shown will not result in nuisance tripping or premature motor failure, Unit warranty will not be affected, 5. Use of a field-supplied motor may affect wire size. Recalculate the unit power supply MCA and MOCP if required. Contact your Carrier representative for details. options (economizer, etc.) must be added to external static pressure before entering Fan Performance table, Refer to Accessory/FIOP Static Pressure information, 2. Interpolation is permissible, DATA TABLES Do not extrapolate. 3, Fan performance tables are based on wet coils, clean filters, and casing losses, Gas heat losses are included for 48 series units, 6. Use the following formula to calculate input watts: Input Watts = Bhp x (746/Motor Eft) 99 APPENDIX Table UNIT 50PD 05 06 60 -- Air Quantity COOLING (cfm) 1200 1500 2000 2500 Limits D - ADDITIONAL (50PD Units) HEATING (cfm) OPTIONAL ELECTRIC 1200 1500 Table DRIVE 05 & 06 2000 2500 bhp motor (746) 63 -- Fan Rpm at Motor UNIT 48/50PD 05 08 HEATING Min (cfm) Max 2000 2000 600 940 1680 2810 05 (High Heat) 1200 2000 1130 2820 08 (Low 08 (Med Heat) Heat) 1500 1500 2500 2500 940 1130 2810 2820 08 (High Heat) 1500 2500 1510 2520 - 48/50PD MAX BHP MAX AMPS 2.0 2.0 6.4 3.2 3. The EPAC_ (Energy Policy Act of 1992) regulates energy requirements for specific types of indoor-fan motors. Motors regulated by EPAC_ include any general purpose, T-frame (three-digit, 143 and larger), single-speed, foot mounted, polyphase, squirrel cage induction motors of NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) design A and B, manufactured for use in the United States. Ranging from 1 to 200 Hp, these continuous-duty motors operate on 230 and 460 volt, 60 Hz power. If a motor does not fit into these specifications, the motor does not have to be replaced by an EPAC_-compliant energy-efficient motor. Variable-speed motors are exempt from EPACW compliance requirements. Therefore, the indoor-fan motors for Carrier 48/50PG03-14 units are exempt from these requirements. efficiency Table Units) 1200 1200 0.80 0.80 1. Extensive motor and electrical testing ensures that the motors can be utilized with confidence up to the maximum applied bhp, watts, and amps. Using the fan motor up to the maximum ratings shown will not result in nuisance tripping or premature motor failure. Unit warranty will not be affected. 2. Convert bhp to watts using the following formula: = (48PD Heat) Heat) EFFICIENCY 208/230-3ph 460-3ph Limits (cfm) Max Fan Motor Specifications NOTES: watts 61 -- Air Quantity COOLING Min 05 (Low 05 (Med VOLTAGE/PHASE Low & High DATA UNIT 48PD HEAT Table 62 -- Evaporator 48/50PD START-UP Pulley MOTOR Settings* PULLEY - 48/50PD TURNS OPEN DRIVE 0 1/2 1 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 41/2 5 Low 910 878 847 815 784 753 721 690 659 627 596 High Low Hiclh 1173 978 1261 1139 949 1227 1104 920 1194 1070 891 1161 1035 863 1128 1001 834 1095 966 805 1062 932 776 1028 897 748 995 863 719 962 828 690 929 *Approximate fan rpm shown, based on 1725 rpm motor. NOTE: Factory speed setting is at 5 turns open. Table AIRFLOW 64 -- Accessory/FlOP Pressure ELECTRIC Drop (in. wg) - 48/50PD ECONOMIZER (Vertical) ECONOMIZER (CFM) HEAT 800 800 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.05 1000 1200 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.07 O. 10 1400 0.03 0.04 O. 14 1600 1800 0.04 0.05 0.08 0.07 O. 17 0.22 2000 2200 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.28 0.31 2400 0.10 0.13 0.37 2600 2800 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.43 0.49 3000 0.15 0.21 0.56 100 (Horizontal) CONTROL SET POINT AND CONFIGURATION Model Number: Serial Number: Date: Technician: MBB: CESR131320-- ECB: CESRI31249-- MAR@ INDICATE Control Type: SetPoints: Thermostat/T55 UNIT Space Temp./T-56 Cooling Space Temp./T-58 BELOW Space Temp. Unoccupied: Occupied: Unoccupied: Table ITEM CESRI31171-- SETTINGS Occupied: Heating 65 -- MODE EXPANSION RANGE - CONFIGURATION UNITS DEFAULT CONFIGURATION DISP LOG Software Versions: Display CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE SERVICE CONFIGURATION CCN POINT DISPLAY Configuration METR Metric Display On/Off Off DISPUNIT LANG Language Selection 0=English 1=Spanish 2=French 0 LANGUAGE PROT Password Enable Enable/Disable Disable PASS EBL PSWD Service Password 0000 to 9999 1111 TEST Test Display On/Off Off 3 = Portuguese UNIT LEDs Unit Configuration DISPTEST S.DLY Startup Delay 0 to 600 30 STARTDLY OC.FN Fan On When Occupied Yes/No Yes OCC IDF.F Shut Down on IDF Failure Yes/No Yes FATALFAN FS.MX Supply Speed Fan Maximum 80 to 100 % 100 SPEEDMAX FS.MN Supply Fan Minimum 10 to 40 % 2O SPEEDMIN FS.VM Vent Mode Fan Speed Fan Status Switch 40to ^F 5O SPEEDVNT 0: no FlOP 1: FlOP FANSTCFG 0: no FlOP 1: FlOP FILSTCFG 0: no FlOP 1: FlOP SHTDNCFG O=No Switch 1=Normal Open 2=Normal Closed O REMOCCFG Yes/No 0=No Switch No 0 RH OAQ TCSTCOOL FN.SW Speed 100 O=No Switch 1=Normal 2=Normal FL.SW Filter Status Switch Fire Shutdown Open Closed O=No Switch 1=Normal 2=Normal FS.SW sec PASSWORD (display only, not in table) UNIT Switch Open Closed O=No Switch 1=Normal 2=Normal RM.SW Remote Occupancy RH.S RH Sensor on QAQ Input RH.SW Space Humidity Switch Switch 1=Normal 2=Normal Open Closed Temp Cmp Strt Cool Factr 0 to 60 mins 0 TCS.H Temp Crop Strt Heat Factr 0 to 60 mins 0 Cooling Min Compressor FS.CD Fan Speed MRT.C Compressor MOT.C TCSTHEAT COOL Configuration MIN.C HUMSTCFG Open Closed TCS.C COOL FAN CFG 15 to 80 % 70 MIN CAPC 1 to 9,9 ^ F 3 SPEEDDMD Min On Time 120 to 999 sec 180 MIN ON 300 to 999 sec 300 MIN OFF RST.C Compressor Min Off Time Runtime to Reset Strikes 120 to 999 sec 300 MIN ON S FOD.C Fan-off 0 to 600 sec 60 COOL CS.A1 Current Sensing Disable: reserved for future use DO NOT ENABLE A1 SENSE C.LO Compressor Lockout Alert Each Strike 0 OATLCOMP ALM.N Yes ALM SAT Supply Air Temperature Capacity Control Demand Delay, Mech Cool A1 Enable/Disable Temp 0 to 100F dF Yes//No FOD NOW SASP Cool Supply 45 to 75 dF 65 SASP SA.MU SASP Maximum Reset Up 0 to 20 ^ F 10 SASPMAXU SA.MD SASP Maximum Down Reset -20 ^ F -10 SASPMAXD SAT.U Minimum SAT Upper Level 35.0 to 65.0 dF 60 SATMIN H SAT.L Minimum SAT Lower Level 35.0 to 65.0 dF 45 SATMIN L SST SST.O Low Suction Air Setpoint to 0 Control Suction OK Temperature Low Suction - Level 1 10 to 50 dF 18 SSTOK SST.1 10 to 50 dF 20 SSTLEV1 SST.2 Low Suction - Level 2 5 to 50 dF 15 SSTLEV2 SST.3 Low Suction - Level 3 0 to 50 dF 10 SSTLEV3 PSI.D Ckt A Minimum 0 to 500 psig 20 DELTAP A OFC Outdoor Pressure Fan Control 1.MXP Fan Levl Max Pressure 100 to 500 psig 450 LEVlMAXP 2.MNP Fan Lev2 Min Pressure Fan Lev2 On Temperature psig F 200 55 LEV2MINP 2.ON 100 to 500 0 to t00 2.OFF Fan Lev2 Off Temperature 0 to 100 F 45 LEV2OFF 101 LEV2ON ENTRY Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION ITEM H EAT EXPANSION Heating HT.TY RANGE UNITS (cont) CCN DEFAULT TABLE/SUB-TABLE HEAT Configuration Type of Heat 0=No Installed Heat 0 (50 series with 1 =Gas 2=Electric CCN POINT CFG HEATTYPE no electric heat) 1 (48 series) 2 (50 series with electric heat) N.HTR Number NUM HEAT MRT.H Heat Minimum On Time 60 to 999 sec 12O MOT.H Heat Minimum Off Time 60 to 999 HMIN ON sec 12O HMIN H.DEC Heat Stage Time Decrease OFF 120 to 999 sec 3OO HSTAGDEC H.INC Heat Stage Increase FOD.E Fan- 120 to 999 sec 450 HSTAGINC 10 to 600 sec 30 FOD.G Fan-off ELEC Delay, Gas Heat 45 to 600 sec 45 GAS HT.LO Heating SAT SUPPLY AIR Lockout 40 to 125F dF 75 OATLHEAT of Heat Stages 1 to2 1 (50 series <15kW) 2 (48 series, 50 series Time off Delay, Elect Heat Temp > = 15kW) FOD FOD TEMPERATURE SAT. H SAT Heat Mode Disable SAT SAM.L Maximum Level SAT Lower 85 to 200 dF 140 SATMAX L SAM.U Maximum Level SAT Upper 85 to 200 dF 160 SATMAX H SPT SPACE Sensing Enable/Disable HEAT TEMPERATURE HT, PD SPT Heat Level Demand (+) 0.5to 5 ^F 1 HDEM POS HZND SPT Heat Level Demand (-) -5to -0.5 ^F -1 HDEM NEG H.LAG Heat Thermal min 1 ECON Lag Factor Economizer Configuration EC.EN Economizer Installed E.CTL Economizer Control Type 0 to 5 HEAT ECON LAG CFG Yes/No No: no FlOP Yes: FlOP ECONO 1 =Dig/Position 1 ECON CTL 2=Dig/Command 3=Analog Ctrl MR25 Econ Min at 25% 0to 100 % 0 MINP 25 0to 100 % 0 MINP 50 0to 100 % 0 MINP 75 0 to 100 % 30 MINP MAX 0to % 100 ECONOMAX Fanspeed MR50 Econ Min at 50% Fanspeed MR75 Econ Min at 75% Fanspeed MRMX Econ Min at Max Fanspeed EC.MX Econo M.ANG Min Actuator Cool Max Position 100 EH.LO Econo Cool Hi Temp Limit 40 to 100F EL.LO Econo Cool Lo Temp Limit - 30 to 50F DF.DB Diff Dry Bulb Control Disable/Enable UEFC Unoccupied 0=Disabled 75 to 90 Ctrl Angle Free Cooling 88 MINANGLE dF 65 OATLECLH dF 0 OATLECLL Enable DIFFBULB 2 UEFC CFG 1 =Unoccupied min 120 UEFCTIME -30 dF 50 OATLUEFC No: no FlOP Yes: FlOP PE ENABL cfm 600 PE1 CFM 100 to 15000 cfm 0 PE2 CFM 500 to 15000 cfm 1600 (05) 2000 (06) IDF CFM 0: no FlOP ENTHLCFG Free Cool PreOcc FC.LO Free Cool Low Temp PE.EN Power Exhaust installed Yes/No PE1 .C Power CFM Exhaust Stage1 100 to 15000 PE2.C Power CFM Exhaust Stage2 IDF.C Indoor CFM Fan Max Speed EN.SW Enthalpy Switch Time 2= Preoccupancy 1 to 9999 FC.TM Limit 0=No to 70F Switch 1 =Normal 2=Normal Open Closed 1: FlOP 102 ENTRY Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION ITEM AIR.Q EXPANSION Air Quality IA.CF RANGE DEFAULT Input Config 0=No IAQ 3=Ctrl IAQ Analog CON TABLE/SUB-TABLE IAQ Config. IAQ Analog Fan Config CCN POINT CFG 0: no FlOP 1 = DCV 2=Override IA.FN UNITS (cont) IAQANCFG 1: FlOP IAQ Min Pos 0 = Neve r 0 IAQANFAN 0 IAQINCFG 1 =Occupied 2=Always II.CF IAQ Switch Input Config 0=No IAQ 1 = DCV N/O 2 = DCV N/C 3=Override N/O 4=Override N/C II.FN IAQ Switch Fan Config 0 = Neve r IAQINFAN 1 =Occupied 2=Always 0to 100 % 10 Position 0to % 100 IAQOVPOS Input Config 0=No OAQ 1 = DCV 0 OAQANCFG 0 to 5000 6OO OAQLOCK Low 0 to 5000 100 DAQ LOW High 0 to 5000 7OO DAQ HIGH Fan On AQ Differential 0 to 5000 6OO DAQFNON DF.OF Fan Off AQ Differential 0 to 5000 2OO DAQFNOFF 1.4M IAQ Sensor Value at 4mA 0 to 5000 0 IAQ 4MA 1.20M IAQ Sensor Value at 20mA 0 to 5000 2000 IAQ_20MA O.4M OAQ Sensor Value at 4mA 0 to 5000 0 OAQ_4MA O.20M OAQ Sensor 20mA Value at 0 to 5000 2000 OAQ H.4M RH Sensor Value at 4mA 0 to 50 % 0 RH 4MA H.20M RH Sensor Value at 20mA 60 to 100 % 100 AQ.MN Econo Min IAQ Position OVR.P IAQ Override OA.CF OAQ Analog OAQ.L OAQ Lockout Limit AQD.L AQ Differential AQD.H AQ Differential DF.ON 100 2=Lockout ALM.O Alarm Relay SPT/SPRH A.SRT SAT/RAT A.OAT OAT Thermistor A.CS Current A.CMP Compressor A.CKT Refrig Circuit A.SSP SSP Transducer A.SCT SCT Thermistor A.FAN Indoor A.FIL Dirty Filter A.ECO Economizer PID OAQ Sensor Failure Sensor Failure Failure Sensor Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure Fan Failure Failure 20MA RH 20MA ALM Config. A.SPC IAQMINP CFG Yes/No Yes SPACE Yes/No Yes SATRATAL Yes/No Yes OAT Yes/No No CS Yes/No Yes COMP Yes/No Yes CKT AL Yes/No Yes SSP AL Yes/No Yes SCT AL Yes/No Yes FAN AL Yes/No Yes FILT AL Yes/No Yes PID Configurations AL AL AL AL ECON PID AL CFG EC.P Economizer PID - kP 0.0 to 99.9 2.5 ECONO P EC.I Economizer PID - kl 0.0 to 99.9 0.1 ECONO I EC.D Economizer PID - kD 0.0 to 99.9 1 ECONO D EC.DT Economizer PID - rate 10.0 to 180.0 sec 15 ECONO DT E.DBD Economizer PID 0 to 25 % 3 ECONBAND Deadband CRP Capacity PID - kP 0 to 99.9 1.5 VCAP P CRI Capacity PID - kl 0 to 99.9 0.1 VCAP I CRD Capacity PID - kD 0 to 99.9 1 VCAP D CRDT Capacity PID - rate 1 to 30 5 VCAP LK.P Linkage Staging PID - kP 0.0 to 99.9 10 LINK P LK.I Linkage Staging PID - kl 0.0 to 99.9 5 LINK I LK.D Linkage Staging PID - kD 0.0 to 99.9 5 LINK D LK.DT Linkage rate Staging PID - 10.0 to 180.0 30 LINK DT secs secs 103 DT ENTRY Table 65 -- MODE - CONFIGURATION ITEM (GENERIC = CCN TRIM EXPANSION RANGE UNITS DEFAULT only) (cont) CCN TABLE/SUB-TABLE GENERICS CCN POINT POINT 01 Definition 8-char ASCII Point 01 POINT 02 Definition 8- char ASCII Point 02 03 POINT 03 Definition 8- char ASCII Point POINT 04 Definition 8- char ASCII Point 04 POINT 05 Definition 8- char ASCII Point 05 POINT 06 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 06 POINT 07 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 07 POINT 08 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 08 POINT 09 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 09 POINT 10 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 10 POINT 11 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 11 POINT 12 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 12 POINT 13 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 13 POINT 14 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 14 POINT 15 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 15 POINT 16 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 16 POINT 17 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 17 POINT 18 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 18 POINT 19 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 19 POINT 20 Definition 8- char ASCii Point 20 Sensor Calibration (CCN TRIM - see Maintenance Display) SPT.C Space SPT.T Space Temp Trim Supply Air Temp Calib. SAT.C SAT.T Supply Temp Calibration Air Temp Trim -30to 130 dF - 30 to 30 ^F 0 -30to 130 - 30 to 30 dF ^F 0 dF RAT.C Return Air Temp Calib. -30to 130 RAT.T Return Air Temp Trim - 30 to 30 CCN.A CCN.B CCN Configuration CCN Element Number CCN Bus Number BAUD CCN Baud ^F 0 CONFIGURATION CCN BROD Rate PD CCNADD CCNBUS 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 3 CCNBAUDD Yes/No No CCNBC OATBC GSBC BRODEFS CCN Broadcast CCN Time/Date B.OAT B.GS CCN OAT Broadcast Global Schedule Broadcst Yes/No Yes/No No No B.ACK CCN Broadcast Yes/No No SCH.N CCN Schedule Overrides Schedule Number Ack'er 50 1 0 B.TIM SCH.O Config. Broadcast 48 1 to 239 0 to 239 CCNBCACK SCHEDOVR SCHEDNUM O = Always Occupied 1-64 = Schedule 65-99 Local = Global Schedule HOL.G OV.TL Accept Global Holidays Override Time Limit Yes/No Oto 4 hours No 4 HOLIDAYT OTL OV. EX Timed Override Hours SPT Override Enabled Oto 4 hours O OVR EXT TIME-OVER OV.SP LDSH CCN Schedule Yes/No Yes Oto 16 0 100 100 Overrides LOADSHED S.GRP Loadshed R.MXC S.MXC Redline Max Capacity Loadshed Max Capacity Oto Oto R.MXH Redline Max Heat Stages Loadshed Max Heat Oto 2 2 MAXHREDL Oto 2 2 MAXHSHED S.MXH Group Number % % 1O0 1O0 Stages 104 SHED NUM MAXCREDL MAXCSHED ENTRY UNIT MODEL START-UP CHECKLIST NO.: SERIAL DATE: NO: TECHNICIAN: I. PRE-START-UP: [] VERIFY THAT ALL PACKAGING [] VERIFY INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR [] VERIFY INSTALLATION OF FLUE [] VERIFY THAT CONDENSATE [] VERIFY THAT ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS [] VERIFY GAS PRESSURE GAS VALVE [] CHECK GAS PIPING (48PD ONLY) [] CHECK THAT INDOOR-AIR [] CHECK THAT [] VERIFY THAT UNIT [] CHECK FAN WHEELS [] VERIFY THAT FAN SHEAVES [] VERIFY THAT SCROLL [] VERIFY INSTALLATION [] VERIFY CONFIGURATION [] VERIFY THAT CRANKCASE [] VERIFY THAT THE VFD MATERIALS EXHAUST TO UNIT FILTERS OUTDOOR BEEN AND INLET CONNECTION FOR LEAKS HAVE REMOVED FROM UNIT AIR HOOD ARE AIR INLET HOOD IS INSTALLED AND TERMINALS IS WITHIN CLEAN SCREENS (48PD ONLY) PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ARE TIGHT SPECIFIED RANGE (48PD ONLY) AND IN PLACE ARE IN PLACE IS LEVEL AND PROPELLER ARE FOR LOCATION ALIGNED COMPRESSORS OF SPACE ARE IN HOUSING/ORIFICE AND BELTS ROTATING ARE PROPERLY IN THE CORRECT AND VERIFY SETSCREW IS TIGHT TENSIONED DIRECTION SENSOR VALUES FOR ELECTRONIC HEATERS IS IN AUTO HAVE BEEN CONTROLS ENERGIZED (REFER TO CONTROL FOR AT LEAST SET UP CHECKLIST) 24 HOURS MODE II. START-UP ELECTRICAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE L1-L2 COMPRESSOR AMP_-COMPRESSOR A1 L2-L3 L3-L1 L1 L2 L3 --COMPRESSOR B1 L1 L2 L3 --COMPRESSOR C1 L1 L2 L3 ELECTRIC HEAT AMPS (IF EQUIPPED) L1 L2 L3 SUPPLY FAN AMPS L1 L2 L3 TEMPERATURES OUTDOOR-AIR RETURN-AIR COOLING TEMPERATURE F DB (Dry Bulb) TEMPERATURE FDB SUPPLY AIR F WB (Wet Bulb) F GAS HEAT SUPPLY AIR (48PG) F ELECTRIC HEAT SUPPLY AIR (50PG) F PRESSURES GAS INLET PRESSURE GAS MANIFOLD REFRIGERANT REFRIGERANT [] VERIFY PRESSURE SUCTION DISCHARGE REFRIGERANT IN. WG STAGE NO. 1 IN. WG CIRCUIT A PSIG CIRCUIT B PSIG CIRCUIT C PSIG CIRCUIT A PSIG CIRCUIT B PSIG CIRCUIT C PSIG CHARGE USING CHARGING STAGE NO. 2 CHARTS GENERAL [] ECONOMIZER MINIMUM VENT AND CHANGEOVER SETTINGS 105 TO JOB REQUIREMENTS IN. WG Copyright 2009 Carrier Corp. * 73 i0 W. Morris St. * hldianapolis. Manufacturer reserves IN 46231 the right to change_ at any time_ specifications and designs Printed in U.S.A. without Edition notice and without Date: 3/09 obligations. 106 Catalog No:48-50PD-01T Replaces: NEW